HomeMy WebLinkAboutMONTAVA PUD - ODP180002 - MONTAVA SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS - ROUND 4 - ALTERNATIVE COMPLIANCE REQUESTBHA Design Incorporated
1603 Oakridge Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80525
Page 1 of 5 voice: 970.223.7577
fax: 970.223.1827
landscape architecture | planning | urban design www.bhadesign.com
January 23, 2019
Stephanie Blochowiak
Environmental Planner
City of Fort Collins,
281 North College Avenue
Fort Collins, Colorado 80524
RE: Montava PUD Alternative Compliance Buffer Reduction Plan – LUC 3.8.26
Alternative Compliance Request
Dear Ms. Blochowiak,
Section 3.8.26 of the LUC establishes buffering for residential and high occupancy building
units from existing industrial uses. These uses include existing oil and gas operations,
including plugged and abandoned wells. The minimum buffer distances from oil and gas
operations are established as 500’ from residential development and 1,000’ from high
occupancy building units. Alternative compliance buffer reduction from plugged and
abandoned wells is available for consideration and approval by the decision maker if
specific measures are taken.
We are requesting an Alternative Compliance buffer reduction to 150’ from the two oil
wells on the Montava property. To support this request, we offer the following
information for your review.
Background
There are two oil well sites located near the north end of the Montava property. Unlike
many wells in the area, these two wells were never operational. They were most likely
historic test wells that never found an oil resource. Based on the documentation for the
wells, neither of these wells have documented history of any active operations. The Lind
Farms (west) wellbore documentation indicates it was drilled, abandoned and plugged all
within a short time period in 1973. The Chandler wellbore has only the documentation
from the COGCC indicating from 1999 indicating it was drilled and abandoned. We have
provided the available historic documentation for the two wells with this request
(attached).
Appendix 12-1
BHA Design Incorporated
1603 Oakridge Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80525
Page 2 of 5 voice: 970.223.7577
fax: 970.223.1827
landscape architecture | planning | urban design www.bhadesign.com
Figure 1 - Underground well locations indicated on the Montava Existing Conditions Plan
Existing Conditions
There is no visible indication of either well. Farming operations have been in place over the
well locations for many years.
The two well sites are mapped from the COGCC website, and GPS coordinates for each well
are documented. Since there is no visible sign of the wells, the Developer engaged GPRS
(Ground Penetrating Radar Systems, LLC) to help confirm the location of the underground
well heads. Using electromagnetic equipment, they have confirmed the two well locations.
Shallow excavations (2’ depth) have been conducted in both locations but no well head was
found or exposed, so they are presumed to be deeper underground.
Figure 2 – Well site locations from COGCC mapping
BHA Design Incorporated
1603 Oakridge Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80525
Page 3 of 5 voice: 970.223.7577
fax: 970.223.1827
landscape architecture | planning | urban design www.bhadesign.com
Figure 3 – Lind Farms underground well location based on Ground Penetrating Radar survey conducted
Figure 4 - Chandler underground well based on Ground Penetrating Radar survey conducted
Research and Testing Measures
A Phase I Environmental Assessment has been completed and was included with the initial
PUD Master Plan application documents.
BHA Design Incorporated
1603 Oakridge Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80525
Page 4 of 5 voice: 970.223.7577
fax: 970.223.1827
landscape architecture | planning | urban design www.bhadesign.com
In addition, the engineering firm, TRC Solutions, has been engaged to conduct soil and soil
vapor testing in conjunction with the City of Fort Collins grant process from the
Environmental Protection Agency. Their efforts have included a Sampling and Analysis Plan
(attached) for this and other well sites in the northeast area.
The planned testing includes soil grab samples, soil vapor sampling, and groundwater
sampling in multiple areas around each underground well site. The testing will document
any adverse impacts such as odor, air pollutants, hazardous materials or site
contamination. TRC also plans to undertake similar investigations for the two off-site wells.
The Sampling and Analysis Plan is currently under final review by the Environmental
Protection Agency. Once approved, TRC will complete the initial testing measures.
Buffer Reduction Plan
a. The Montava PUD establishes a minimum setback of 150’ from each underground
well site to planned residential buildings. The west well area will be protected as a
natural open space, and the east well area will remain in farming operations with
the planned farm use for Montava. This plan will equally well or better eliminate
and minimize nuisances and reduce adverse effects referenced in LUC Section
3.8.26 by:
i. Providing research and identification of the locations of the underground
wells;
ii. Identifying appropriate minimum setbacks in the master plan;
iii. Minimizing grading in the areas near the underground well sites; and
iv. Conducting testing and documentation to meet applicable EPA and State
regulations regarding the site conditions.
b. Environmental testing: Current and ongoing future measures for environmental
testing of the well site areas are planned as part of the buffer reduction plan.
Currently, plans are underway through the City of Fort Collins grant process from
the Environmental Protection Agency to conduct research and test soil and site
conditions in the areas around both underground well sites. Engineering firm, TRC
Solutions, has completed a Sampling and Analysis Plan (attached) describing the
testing methods. The Sampling and Analysis Plan is currently under final review by
the Environmental Protection Agency. Once approved, TRC will complete the initial
testing measures which include:
i. Site survey, historical research, and/or physical locating techniques to
determine the exact location and extent of the plugged oil wells.
ii. Documentation of plugging activities, abandonment and any subsequent
inspections.
iii. Soil sampling, including soil gas testing.
iv. Groundwater sampling.
BHA Design Incorporated
1603 Oakridge Drive
Fort Collins, CO 80525
Page 5 of 5 voice: 970.223.7577
fax: 970.223.1827
landscape architecture | planning | urban design www.bhadesign.com
v. Installation of permanent groundwater wells for future site investigations.
vi. Upon completion of the site investigation and sampling, TRC will provide a
written report verifying that the soil and groundwater samples meet
applicable EPA and State residential regulations and that a reduced buffer
would not pose a greater health or safety risk for future residents or users
of the site.
In addition, a minimum of five (5) years of annual soil gas and groundwater
monitoring will be completed by the Developer as per the requirements of LUC
Section 3.8.26(c). If monitoring indicates any applicable EPA or State residential
regulations are no longer being met and if recommended for the reduced buffer,
the Developer will complete remediation of environmental contamination to
background levels and/or will repair or re-plug the abandoned wells.
Based on the above Buffer Reduction Plan, we are requesting an Alternative Compliance
buffer reduction to 150’ from the two oil wells on the Montava property.
Sincerely,
Angela K. Milewski, BHA Design, Inc.
encl:
COGCC well site documentation
Sampling and Analysis Plan, TRC, June 21, 2018
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Montava
Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield
Assessment Project
Fort Collins, Colorado
Submitted to
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Region 8
Prepared by
TRC
131 E. Lincoln Avenue
Suite 200
Fort Collins, CO 80524
June 21, 2018
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 TITLE AND APPROVAL PAGE .................................................................................................................................... II
2.0 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................. 1
3.0 METHODOLOGY ...................................................................................................................................................... 1
4.0 SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1 FIELD PREPARATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 4
4.2 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4
4.3 SOIL VAPOR PROBE CONSTRUCTION/ INFRARED CAMERA SCAN .................................................................................................. 4
4.4 SAMPLING STRATEGY .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
4.5 SAMPLING METHODOLOGY .................................................................................................................................................. 5
4.6 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES .................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.7 SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND HANDLING ............................................................................................................................... 11
4.8 INVESTIGATION DERIVED WASTE ......................................................................................................................................... 13
4.9 REPORTING ..................................................................................................................................................................... 13
5.0 REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Proposed Soil Boring/Monitoring Well Locations
Figure 2 Proposed Soil Vapor Sampling Locations
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Project Schedule
Attachment B U.S. EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk
Attachment C Standard Operating Procedures
Attachment D Soil Vapor Probe Sampling Form
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
1
2.0 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT OBJECTIVES
The City of Fort Collins plans to investigate the property at 2316 Giddings Road and East County Road 52 for
potential environmental impacts to the surrounding soils and groundwater due to previous land use activities at the
site. This investigation will evaluate potential impacts in relation to future site development.
This Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP) identifies the means and methods that will be utilized by TRC
Environmental Corporation (TRC) in the execution of a Phase II investigation at the location referenced above. The
investigation will include monitoring well and soil vapor point installation and sampling around two plugged and
abandoned wells located on site. This work will be scheduled to commence within three weeks of the approval of
this plan and the field work should be completed within one week. If there are delays to the schedule due to weather,
etc., the project team will be notified of the delay and revised schedule. The proposed project schedule is included
as Attachment A
This SAP describes the technical approach for monitoring well and soil vapor point installation, well gauging, soil,
groundwater, and vapor sampling, analytical requirements, investigation-derived waste (IDW) management, and
quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) requirements. A site layout map depicting the proposed locations of the
monitoring wells to be installed and sampled is included as Figure 1. A Health and Safety Plan (HASP) (TRC,
2018) has been prepared for this site as a separate document.
3.0 METHODOLOGY
The previous land use activity on site involved oil and gas production. The property currently contains active,
inactive, and abandoned oil and gas wells. Possible impacts include hydrocarbons and metals from oil well
production fluids. The Phase II investigation is solely focused on the two plugged and abandoned wells on site, the
locations of which have been confirmed by the property owner. If it is determined at a future date that the property
owner did not properly locate the plugged and abandoned oil and gas wells, the data collected as part of this SAP
will be considered inadequate to evaluate potential environmental impacts associated with the plugged and
abandoned oil and gas wells properly. The property owner is solely responsible for any additional data collection
needed as a result of misidentifying the locations of the plugged and abandoned oil and gas wells.
In accordance with the Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC) Policy for Plugged and
Abandoned Wells and Exploration and Production (E&P) Waste Encountered by Surface Development Projects,
E&P waste discovered during surface development excavation will be addressed with the following requirements:
1. If E&P waste is discovered, with the exception of water based bentonitic drilling fluid, during a Phase I or
Phase II analysis or soil investigation or during excavation operations related to surface development, such
discovery shall be reported to the Director by the surface developer or its designee on a COGCC
Spill/Release Report, Form 19 within ten days. Any new spills that occur as a result of a surface developer’s
activities must be reported in accordance with Rule 906. If de minimis amounts of E&P waste are
encountered during excavation operations, a surface developer or its designee may excavate and properly
dispose of the waste and no reporting shall be required.
2. The surface developer or its designee may, at its discretion, collect samples for chemical analysis to
determine if the allowable concentrations listed in Table 910-1 in the COGCC 900 Series Rules have been
exceeded. The analytical results from the initial samples shall be reported on a COGCC Soil Analysis
Report, Form 24 and Water Analysis Report, Form 25, whichever is applicable, and shall be submitted
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
2
along with a Spill/Release Report, Form 19. The Director may conduct sampling and analysis if the surface
developer or its designee does not.
3. If the analytical results indicate that soil or groundwater has been impacted by E&P waste in concentrations
that exceed those listed in Table 910-1 in the COGCC 900 Series Rules, and the surface developer or its
designee intends to initiate voluntary remediation, then the surface developer or its designee shall submit a
Site Investigation and Remediation Workplan, Form 27 to the Director. Approval of the Remediation
Workplan, Form 27 shall be obtained from the Director prior to commencement of remediation operations.
As an alternative to voluntary remediation by the surface developer or its designee, the Director may
identify a responsible party, if it exists, or expend monies from the Environmental Release Fund to
remediate E&P waste. For the purpose of the voluntary remediation, the surface developer or its designee
shall not be required to be registered as an operator with COGCC.
4. If the analytical results indicate that soil or groundwater has not been impacted by E&P waste in
concentrations that exceed those listed in Table 910-1 of the COGCC 900 Series Rules, then any
remediation operations conducted by the surface developer or its designee shall not be subject to COGCC
jurisdiction.
Unless otherwise stated in this SAP, all field work will be conducted in accordance with the COGCC Policy for
Plugged and Abandoned Wells and Exploration and Production Waste Encountered by Surface Development
Projects, Fort Collins Brownfields Assessment Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP) Revision 2 (TRC, 2018).
The approved QAPP, including the Program QAPP, Project SAP, and SAP Document Review Crosswalk
(Attachment B), will be maintained by the QA Manager and the Project Manager. The TRC personnel that will
complete the investigation are included in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 – Key Personnel Certifications
TRC Personnel Experience/ Certifications
Jason Jayroe 17 year Environmental Professional
OSHA 40-HR HAZWOPER
Evan Green 4 year Environmental Professional
OSHA 40-HR HAZWOPER
The field and laboratory Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) relevant to the site investigation are listed in Table
3.2 and are included in Attachment C.
Table 3.2 – Field SOPs
SOP # SOP Title Revision # Date of SOP
RMD 001
Field Activity Documentation for
Environmental Investigations
0 January 2013
RMD 002 Chain-of-Custody Procedures 0 March 2013
ECR 003 Soil Sampling 1 November 2016
ECR 004 Water Level and Product
Measurements
1 December 2016
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
3
RMD 005 Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil
Description and Identification
0 September 2013
ERC 006 Well Development 1 August 2017
RMD 007 Groundwater Monitoring Well
Installation
0 January 2014
ECR 009 Groundwater Sampling 2 November 2016
ECR 010 Equipment Decontamination 1 December 2016
RMD 011 Calibration of Field Instruments
for Water Quality Parameters
0 November 2014
RMD 014 Headspace Field Screening
Procedure
0 April 2015
ERC 023 Packaging and Shipping of
Non-Hazardous Environmental
Samples
0 January 2018
4.0 SCOPE OF WORK
Four groundwater monitoring wells and four soil vapor probes will be installed around each of the plugged and
abandoned wells to assess possible impacts to the surrounding soil and groundwater. COGCC suggests a
development setback of 200 feet of the abandoned well but the City of Fort Collins’ proposed variance of
development set back is 150 feet, therefore the monitoring wells will be installed within 150 feet of the abandoned
well. The proposed locations of the monitoring wells are included on Figure 1. The proposed locations of the soil
vapor probes are included on Figure 2. If the proposed locations become inaccessible, TRC will attempt to identify
alternate sampling locations that provide adequate or sufficient data as the original based upon the best judgment
of the project team, as necessary. All field work will be performed using Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) Level D work attire consisting of hard hats, safety glasses, protective gloves, and protective
boots. The following tasks will be conducted:
Utility locate;
Marking of locations of proposed boreholes/monitoring wells and soil vapor probes surrounding the
abandoned wells;
Borehole installation
Soil sampling;
Installation of monitoring wells;
Groundwater sampling;
Methane air monitoring at monitoring well heads;
Installation of soil vapor probes;
Soil vapor sampling;
Laboratory analysis of samples; and
Reporting, including analytical results and site figures.
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
4
4.1 Field Preparation
A HASP has been developed as a separate document to cover the activities associated with the scope of this work.
On-site personnel, including subcontractors, will have completed 40-hour OSHA training for Hazardous Waste
Operation Workers (HAZWOPER) and have current 8-hour OSHA HAZWOPER annual refresher training.
Colorado one-call will be notified a minimum of 72 hours prior to the commencement of drilling activities to
mark underground utilities and a private utility locate company will be utilized to mark the work area.
4.2 Monitoring Well Construction
Monitoring wells will be installed using the procedures outlined in TRC’s Groundwater Monitoring Well
Installation SOP (RMD 007). Soil borings will be advanced using an appropriate drilling methodology, such as
direct push techniques (Geoprobe Systems®). Prior to drilling, boring locations will be cleared for potential
subsurface utilities. Soil borings will be advanced and continuously logged, in accordance with TRC’s Visual-
Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification SOP (RMD 005), by a TRC geologist. Additional field
documentation will be recorded in accordance with TRC’s Field Documentation SOP (RMD 001). Well
construction will follow Colorado guidelines and will be detailed on the Colorado Notice of Intent to Construct
Monitoring Hole(s) Form (GWS-51) and registered with the Colorado State Engineer’s Office (SEO). The well
owners will be responsible for maintaining the wells per the SEO regulations and plugging and abandoning the
monitoring wells if necessary.
Monitoring wells will be constructed of one-inch inner diameter, flush-threaded, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC), 0.10-inch slot, screened casing. The well screen will be installed from the bottom of the boring to
approximately two to five feet above the saturated zone, such that the well is screened across the upper most
aquifer to accommodate fluctuations in the water table (10-foot long screens). Monitoring well PVC risers will be
installed to bring the well casing above the ground surface, where it will be completed as a stick-up well. An
expandable, locking well cap will be installed in each well. Upon completion of the well installations, the wells
will be developed using standard development techniques (SOP ERC 006). The wells will be allowed to recharge
for a minimum of 24 hours to allow the water table to stabilize before beginning groundwater sampling
procedures.
Down-hole drilling equipment will be decontaminated with high pressure potable water prior to each soil boring.
Sampling tools will be decontaminated using a trisodium phosphate cleaning detergent and potable water rinse
followed by a distilled water rinse. The equipment and tools will be decontaminated prior to each soil boring and
collection of each sample. Decontamination will follow the procedure in TRC’s Equipment Decontamination
SOP (ERC 010). Polyethylene tubing from ground water purging and sampling activities will be discarded after
the collection of project samples.
For safety concerns, a six-gas monitor will be used for monitoring of combustible or toxic gases during drilling to
prevent exposure or possible explosive atmosphere being generated. The exposure limits of specific gases are
addressed in the HASP.
4.3 Soil Vapor Probe Construction/ Infrared Camera Scan
Four soil vapor probes will be installed surrounding each of the plugged and abandoned wells at five-foot intervals
to a maximum radius of 20 feet. Figure 2 shows the approximate locations of the proposed soil gas probes. One
additional soil vapor probe will be installed at the edge of the study areas as a control sample. The soil gas probes
will be installed to a target depth of approximately three to five feet below ground surface (bgs) by a direct push
drill rig, manually with a slide hammer, or with an electrically-powered rotary hammer. The soil probe will consist
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
5
of a dedicated stainless-steel soil vapor tip, connected to the ground surface with Teflon tubing. After the soil vapor
probe is installed to the target depth, the borehole will be backfilled with hydrated bentonite to create a seal and
completed at-grade with a flush mount surface completion. Soil probe installation equipment will be
decontaminated with high pressure potable water prior to each soil vapor probe installation.
An infrared camera will be used to scan the areas around the plugged and abandoned well locations. The plugged
and abandoned wells will be scanned with the infrared camera from each of the monitoring well locations. The
infrared camera uses optical gas imaging to determine the presence or absence of a methane leak in real time.
4.4 Sampling Strategy
The soil borings will be installed with continuous sampling and one unsaturated soil sample will be collected from
each soil boring using a macro-core or split spoon sampler. Soil samples will be collected using procedures outlined
in TRC’s Soil Sampling SOP (ERC 003) and submitted for laboratory analysis. The soil sample selected for
laboratory analysis will be collected from a depth that exhibits the highest photo-ionization detector (PID) reading
or visual and olfactory evidence of impacts, if present. If no evidence of impacts is apparent, the soil sample will
be collected directly above the first occurrence of saturated soil.
Prior to groundwater sampling activities, water level measurements will be collected from each well at the site as
described in TRC’s Water Level and Product Measurements SOP (ECR 004). The depth to water, measured from
the top of casing, will be recorded at each well for use in creating a potentiometric surface map. The water levels
will be measured to the nearest one-hundredth foot.
Groundwater sampling procedures are described in TRC’s Groundwater Sampling SOP (ECR 009). Disposable
polyethylene tubing will be used in conjunction with a pump that has low-flow capabilities to collect groundwater
samples. A peristaltic pump will be used if groundwater levels are less than 20 feet bgs. Hand bailers may be
used in wells where groundwater levels are greater than 20 feet bgs.
Ambient air monitoring will be conducted at each of the monitoring well heads and in the general vicinity of the
investigation area using a hand held six-gas monitor (SOP RMD 014). The six-gas monitor displays readings from
0-99 percent lower explosive limit (LEL) for combustible gases (calibrated to methane) and parts per million
(ppm) of other gases (oxygen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, sulfur dioxide). The six-gas
monitor and PID will also be used to scan the headspace at the opening to each monitoring well.
Soil vapor screening at each soil probe location will be conducted following soil vapor probe installation. Soil
vapor screening will consist of real-time readings from a multi-gas monitor (e.g. landfill gas monitor), capable of
detecting methane as percent atmosphere or ppm, and readings from a PID. The multi-gas monitoring will also be
used where well headspace exceeds 25% LEL to record methane precisely as percent atmosphere. The data
collected from the soil vapor points will be used for screening purposes only and will be recorded on the form
provided in Attachment D. If methane is detected at the soil vapor points, additional investigation will be
required.
4.5 Sampling Methodology
A description of the water quality (e.g., turbidity, odor) will be recorded during the purging process. Water quality
parameters will be recorded in the field during groundwater sampling. The water quality parameters to be recorded
are: temperature, pH, specific conductivity, dissolved oxygen (DO), oxidation reduction potential (ORP), and
turbidity. These water quality parameters will be recorded to monitor for stabilization of the groundwater during
well purging and to provide general information about the groundwater chemistry. Generally, an adequate purge
with respect to groundwater chemistry is achieved when, stability for at least three consecutive measurements is as
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
6
follows: pH ± 0.1 standard unit, specific conductance within three percent, and turbidity within 10 percent for values
greater than five nephelometric turbidity units (NTUs). If three turbidity readings are less than five NTUs, the values
are considered stabilized. Other parameters, such as DO, may also be used as a stabilization parameter. Additional
information regarding field parameter stabilization is included in section 2.2.3 of TRC’s Groundwater Sampling
SOP (ERC 009). Prior to groundwater quality measurements, field instruments will be calibrated. Information
regarding calibration techniques is included in TRC’s Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters
SOP (RMD 011). Once the field parameters indicate stabilization, a sample will be collected directly from the
discharge port of the pump tubing prior to passing through the flow-through cell. Samples will be collected using
laboratory provided containers and immediately placed on ice. Care will be taken to minimize agitation and aeration
of the samples during sample collection activities as the analytical results provide critical information for the
characterization of the groundwater. Each sample container will be labeled with a unique sample identification,
sample location, time and date of sample collection, analytical parameters required, site name, and the sampler’s
initials. The samples will be preserved, as appropriate, and shipped on ice, under proper chain-of-custody, to the
laboratory. Additional information is included in TRC’s Chain-of-Custody Procedures SOP (RMD 002) and
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples SOP (ERC 023).
If there is limited water in the well, then collection of the laboratory sample will take priority over the field
parameters. If a monitoring well is purged dry prior to stabilization of parameters, a grab sample will be collected
after the well has recharged. Purge water generated during sampling activities will be managed as described in
Section 4.6.
QA/QC samples (field duplicates, matrix spike/matrix spike duplicate [MS/MSD] samples and equipment/field
blanks) will be collected at a frequency of one per every 10 environmental samples (a minimum of one for each
media being sampled). Each sample cooler shipped to the laboratory for volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
analysis will contain a laboratory prepared trip blank for analysis. QA/QC samples are collected for informational
purposes to verify the accuracy of the critical analytical data.
Each soil and groundwater sample collected for analysis will be assigned a unique site-specific sample
identification at the time of sample collection. This sample identification will be used throughout sample
collection, analysis, and reporting activities. The site-specific sample identification will consist of the following
two parts, a sample matrix code and a sample location code. The nomenclature used to identify each sample is
included below in Table 4.1. The sampling strategy rationale for soil boring installation, soil samples,
groundwater samples, and soil vapor samples is included below in Table 4.2. The sample rationale for the site is
included in Table 4.3.
Table 4.1 – Sample Nomenclature
Sample Type Identification Notes
Soil SB-# SB = Soil Boring
# = Boring Number
Groundwater MW-# MW = Monitoring Well
# = Well Number
Soil Vapor
Probe
SVP-# SVP = Soil Vapor Probe
# = Probe Number
Duplicates Dup-# Dup = Duplicate
# = Sample Number
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
7
Table 4.2 – Sample Location Rationale Summary Table
Sample
Location
# of Samples and
Sample Type Rationale Outcome Objective
Sub‐surface Soil Boring Samples
SB‐01
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐02
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐03
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐04
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐05
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐06
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
8
SB‐08
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
Groundwater Samples
MW‐01 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐02 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐03 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐04 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐05 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐06 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐07 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
9
SVP‐06 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐07 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐08 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐09 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Background soil
vapor Background soil vapor for comparison.
Table 4.3 – Sample Rationale
Environmental
Concern
Assessment
Technique
Sample Type and
Representation
Total Number of Samples
Collected
Contaminants of
Concern in COGCC
Table 910-1
Baseline Study -
Sampling
Groundwater, Soil,
Soil Vapor
Groundwater – four samples
Soil – four samples
Soil Vapor – five samples
4.6 Analytical Procedures
The groundwater samples will be analyzed for the constituents listed below in Table 4.4. The soil samples will be
analyzed for the constituents listed below in Table 4.5. Groundwater and soil samples will be submitted under
proper chain-of-custody to ESC Lab Sciences, a National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NELAP) laboratory in Mount Juliet, Tennessee. The sample parameters and analytical methods are provided in
the table below and will be analyzed on a standard turn-around time.
Table 4.4 – Groundwater Sample Analytical Parameters
Parameters Analytical Method
Benzene, Toluene, Ethylbenzene, Xylenes (BTEX) EPA Method 8260C
Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH) GRO/DRO SW-846 5035A/8015C
Dissolved Gases: Methane, Ethane, Ethylene RSK 175
Major Cations: Dissolved (Calcium, Magnesium,
Sodium, Iron, Potassium)
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
10
Strontium EPA Method 6020
Table 4.5 – Soil Sample Analytical Parameters
Parameters Analytical Met
Benzene, Toluene, Ethylbenzene, Xylenes (BTEX) EPA Method 8260C
Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH) GRO/DRO SW-846 5035A/8015C
RCRA 8 Metals SW-846 3050B/
6010C/6020A/7471B
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
11
4.7 Sample Preservation and Handling
Table 4.6 provides a summary of the preservation, container, and holding time requirements for analytical methods that will be used during the investigation.
Table 4.6 – Container, Preservation, and Holding Time Requirements
Field
Sample
Matrix
Parameter Sample
Type(A)
Estimated
Number
of
Samples
Preparation/
Analytical Method
References
Sample Preservation Holding Time
from Collection Container
Soil VOCs
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, MS/MSD, EB,
and Trip Blank
8 SW-846 /8260C Cool to 4C
14 days to analysis
1-4 oz. glass jar with Teflon
lined cap
Soil TPH-DRO Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SW-846 3540C,
3546/8015C Cool to 4C
14 days to extraction;
40 days from
extraction to analysis
1-4 oz. glass jar with Teflon
lined cap
Soil TPH-GRO Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8 SW-846 5035A/8015C Cool to 4C
14 days to analysis 1-4 oz. glass jar with Teflon
lined cap
Soil RCRA 8 Metals
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, EB, and
MS/DUP
8
SW-846 3050B/
6010C/6020A/7471B Cool to 4C
Mercury: 28 days to
analysis
Other Metals: 180
days to analysis
1-4 oz. glass jar with Teflon
lined cap
Groundwater VOCs
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, EB, MS/MSD,
and Trip Blank
8 SW-846 5030B/8260C Cool to 4C
7 days to analysis 2-40 mL VOA vials with
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
12
Field
Sample
Matrix
Parameter Sample
Type(A)
Estimated
Number
of
Samples
Preparation/
Analytical Method
References
Sample Preservation Holding Time
from Collection Container
Groundwater
Bromide,
Chloride,
Sulfate
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SW- 300.0 Cool to 4C
28 days to analysis 125 mL HDPE
Nitrate and
Nitrite,
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
E353.2 or SM4500 Cool to 4C
28 days to analysis 125 mL HDPE with H2SO4
Groundwater Alkalinity Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SM- 2320B Cool to 4C
14 days to analysis 250 mL HDPE
Groundwater Strontium Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SW- 6020 Cool to 4C
180 days to analysis 250 mL HDPE with HNO3
(A)Potential sample types listed; actual sample types will vary and will be specified in the site-specific SAPs: MS/DUP = Matrix spike/duplicate samples; MS/MSD = Matrix spike/matrix
spike duplicate sample,
FD = Field duplicate samples, EB = Equipment blank samples.
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
13
4.8 Investigation Derived Waste
Investigation derived waste (IDW) will be generated during the investigation described in this SAP. The IDW
will consist of the following:
Spent polyethylene tubing and disposable personal protective equipment generated during the sampling
activities will be discarded as municipal solid waste.
Well development water and purge water generated during groundwater sampling will be containerized in
55-gallon drum(s) and will be properly disposed of after receipt of the analytical results.
Soil generated during soil boring and monitoring well installation will be left at the site.
4.9 Reporting
A report will be completed upon receipt of analytical results. The report will provide a discussion of the activities
performed during the Phase II investigation, the analytical results for soil and groundwater samples, a potentiometric
surface map, and a sample location figure. Analytical results will be compared to the Project Action Limits (PALs)
listed below in Tables 4.7 and 4.8.
Table 4.7 – Soil PALs
Analyte PAL (mg/kg) PAL Reference
EPA RSL –
Residential
EPA RSL –
Industrial
COGCC Table 910-1
Benzene 1.2 5.1 0.17 U.S. EPA RSL Table and COGCC Table
910-1
Toluene 4,900 47,000 85 U.S. EPA RSL Table and COGCC Table
910-1
Ethylbenzene 5.8 25 100 U.S. EPA RSL Table and COGCC Table
910-1
Xylenes 580 2,500 175 U.S. EPA RSL Table and COGCC Table
910-1
TPH
GRO/DRO
-- -- 500 U.S. EPA RSL Table and COGCC Table
910-1
Table 4.8 – Groundwater PALs
Analyte CAS
Number
PAL (ug/L) PAL Reference
EPA MCL CDPHE
WQCC Reg 41
Benzene 71-43-2 5.00 5.00 EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
Toluene 108-88-3 1,000 1,000 EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
Ethylbenzene 100-41-4 700 700 EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
Xylenes 1330-20-7 10,000 10,000 EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
GRO -- -- -- EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
DRO -- -- -- EPA MCL/ COGCC Table 910-1
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Fort Collins, Colorado June 21, 2018
14
5.0 REFERENCES
Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission, 2018. 900 Series Exploration and Production Waste Management
Rule. May 2018.
Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC), 2001. COGCC Policy for Plugged and Abandoned
Wells and Exploration and Production Waste Encountered by Surface Development Projects. December
2001.
TRC, 2018. Fort Collins, Colorado Brownfields Assessment Program Quality Assurance Project Plan Revision 2.
TRC Solutions, Inc. April 2018.
0 1850
SCALE BAR LEGEND
PLUGGED & ABANDONED (P&A)
PROPOSED MONITORING WELL
IMAGE SOURCE: GOOGLE EARTH 2018 PROPERTY BOUNDARY
131 EAST LINCOLN AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, CO 80524
PHONE: 970.484.3263 FAX: 970.484.3250
CITY OF FORT COLLINS BROWNFIELD
MONTAVA
FIGURE 1 – APPROXIMATE SOIL BORING /
MONITORING WELL LOCATIONS
FEET
0' 1850'
SCALE BAR LEGEND
PLUGGED & ABANDONED (P&A)
PROPOSED MONITORING WELL
IMAGE SOURCE: GOOGLE EARTH 2018 PROPERTY BOUNDARY
131 EAST LINCOLN AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, CO 80524
PHONE: 970.484.3263 FAX: 970.484.3250
CITY OF FORT COLLINS BROWNFIELD
MONTAVA
FIGURE 2
APPROXIMATE SOIL VAPOR PROBE LOCATIONS
FEET
Attachment A: Project Schedule
Attachment A: Project Schedule
Activity Responsible Party Planned Start Date Planned Completion Date Deliverables Deliverables Due Date
Project Kick‐ off EPA, TRC and City 3/1/2018 3/1/2018 NA NA
Develop a Draft
SAP and the EPA
Region 8 QA
Document
Crosswalk
TRC 4/3/2018 5/1/2018 Draft SAP and the EPA Region 8
QA Document Crosswalk 5/1/2018
EPA and City
Review of Draft
SAP
EPA and City 5/1/2018 6/21/2018 Comments on Draft SAP 6/21/2018
Address Comments
/ Finalize SAP TRC 6/25/2018 6/29/2018
SAP and the EPA Region 8 QA
Document Crosswalk 6/29/2018
Develop Health
and Safety Plan
(HASP)
TRC 6/11/2018 6/15/2018 HASP 6/15/2018
Mobilization TRC 7/2/2018 7/2/2018 NA NA
Field Activities TRC 7/2/2018 7/6/2018 Field Notes 7/6/2018
Demobilization TRC 7/6/2018 7/6/2018 NA NA
Email Summary of
Field Work TRC 7/13/2018 7/13/2018 NA NA
Analytical Data TRC 7/6/2018 7/20/2018 Laboratory Data 7/20/2018
Develop Draft
Phase II Report TRC 7/16/2018 7/27/2018 Draft Phase II Report 7/27/2018
EPA and City
Review of Draft
Phase II
EPA and City 7/30/2018 8/10/2018 Comments on Phase II 8/10/2018
Address Comments
/ Finalize Phase II TRC 8/10/2018 8/24/2018 Final Report 8/24/2018
Page 1 of 1
Attachment B: U.S. EPA Region 8 QA Document Review
Crosswalk
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 1 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
EPA REGION 8 QA DOCUMENT REVIEW CROSSWALK
QAPP/FSP/SAP for:
(check appropriate box)
Entity (grantee, contract, EPA AO, EPA Program, Other)
City of Fort Collins, Colorado
Regulatory
Authority
and/or
Funding
Mechanism
_X_ 2 CFR 1500 for
Grantee/Cooperative Agreements
___ 48 CFR 46 for Contracts
___ Interagency Agreement
___ EPA/Court Order
___ EPA Program Funding
___ EPA Program Regulation
___ EPA CIO 2105
X GRANTEE
CONTRACTOR
EPA
Other
Document Title
[Note: Title will be repeated in Header]
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside
Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment
Project
QAPP/FSP/SAP Preparer TRC Environmental Corp.
Period of Performance
(of QAPP/FSP/SAP)
2018 Date Submitted
for Review
Rev0: 06/21/18
EPA Project Officer
EPA Project Manager
Melisa Devincenzi PO Phone #
PM Phone #
303-312-6377
QA Program Reviewer or
Approving Official
Melisa Devincenzi Date of Review 06/21/18
Documents Submitted for QAPP Review (QA Reviewer must
complete):
1. QA Document(s) submitted for review:
QA
Document
Document
Date
Document
Stand-alone
Document with
QAPP
QAPP 04/18/18 No
FSP Yes / No
SAP 06/21/18 No
SOP(s)
2. WP/SOW/TO/PP/RP Date 10/1/15-9/30/18_____
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 2 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
on 5/3/2018.
- Need to add notation per earlier discussion that the best practice policies from COGCC as also recommended that development
should not occur within 200 feet of abandoned wells
- Please make sure that each line item below has the Page number populated in that column, this is particularly important because the
format for the SAP has different outline than the crosswalk, thanks!
- See other notes highlighted below in particular related to line items that state NA
Element
Acceptable
Yes/No/NA
Page/
Section
Comments
A. Project Management
A1. Title and Approval Sheet
a. Contains project title Yes Cover Page (SAP and QAPP)
b. Date and revision number line (for when needed) Yes Page ii (SAP and QAPP)
c. Indicates organization’s name Yes Cover Page (SAP and QAPP)
d. Date and signature line for organization’s project
manager
Yes Page ii (SAP and QAPP)
e. Date and signature line for organization’s QA
manager
Yes Page ii (SAP and QAPP)
f. Other date and signatures lines, as needed Yes Page ii (SAP and QAPP)
A2. Table of Contents
a. Lists QA Project Plan information sections Yes Page 1 (QAPP) Located in beginning of document
b. Document control information indicated Yes Page 12 QAPP
A3. Distribution List
Includes all individuals who are to receive a copy of the
QA Project Plan and identifies their organization
Yes Page 12 QAPP
A4. Project/Task Organization
a. Identifies key individuals involved in all major
aspects of the project, including contractors
Yes Table 3.1,
Page 2
SAP
b. Discusses their responsibilities Yes Page 6-11 QAPP
c. Project QA Manager position indicates independence
from unit generating data
Yes Page 7 QAPP
d. Identifies individual responsible for maintaining the
official, approved QA Project Plan
Yes Page 7 QAPP
e. Organizational chart shows lines of authority and
reporting responsibilities
Yes Page 5 QAPP
A5. Problem Definition/Background
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 3 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
a. States decision(s) to be made, actions to be taken, or
outcomes expected from the information to be obtained
Yes Page 14 QAPP
b. Clearly explains the reason (site background or
historical context) for initiating this project
Yes Section 3
Page 1
SAP
c. Identifies regulatory information, applicable criteria,
action limits, etc. necessary to the project
Yes Section 4 QAPP
A6. Project/Task Description
a. Summarizes work to be performed, for example,
measurements to be made, data files to be obtained, etc.,
that support the project’s goals
Yes Sections 2,
3 and 4
Pages 1-13
SAP
b. Provides work schedule indicating critical project
points, e.g., start and completion dates for activities
such as sampling, analysis, data or file reviews, and
assessments
Yes Section 2
Page 1 and
Attachment
A
SAP
c. Details geographical locations to be studied,
including maps where possible
Yes Section 4
Page 3 /
Figure 1
and 2
SAP
d. Discusses resource and time constraints, if applicable Yes Section 2.0
Page 1 and
Attachment
A
SAP
A7. Quality Objectives and Criteria
a. Identifies
- performance/measurement criteria for all information
to be collected and acceptance criteria for information
obtained from previous studies,
- including project action limits and laboratory detection
limits and
- range of anticipated concentrations of each parameter
of interest
Yes Section 3 QAPP
b. Discusses precision Yes Section 3 QAPP
c. Addresses bias Yes Section 3 QAPP
d. Discusses representativeness Yes Section 3 QAPP
e. Identifies the need for completeness Yes Section 3 QAPP
f. Describes the need for comparability Yes Section 3 QAPP
g. Discusses desired method sensitivity Yes Section 3 QAPP
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 4 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
A8. Special Training/Certifications
a. Identifies any project personnel specialized training
or certifications
Yes Table 3.1,
Page 2
Table 4.2
SAP
b. Discusses how this training will be provided Yes Section 1.4 QAPP
c. Indicates personnel responsible for assuring
training/certifications are satisfied
Yes Section 1.4 QAPP
d. identifies where this information is documented Yes Section 1.4 QAPP
A9. Documentation and Records
a. Identifies report format and summarizes all data
report package information
Yes Section
10.4
QAPP
b. Lists all other project documents, records, and
electronic files that will be produced
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
c. Identifies where project information should be kept
and for how long
Yes Section
10.6
QAPP
d. Discusses back up plans for records stored
electronically
Yes Section
10.5
(QAPP ) Data will be stored as hard copy and electronically
e. States how individuals identified in A3 will receive
the most current copy of the approved QA Project Plan,
identifying the individual responsible for this
Yes Section 1.5 QAPP
B. Data Generation/Acquisition
B1. Sampling Process Design (Experimental Design)
a. Describes and justifies design strategy, indicating size
of the area, volume, or time period to be represented by
a sample
Yes Section 4
Table 4.2
SAP
b. Details the type and total number of sample
types/matrix or test runs/trials expected and needed
Yes Section 4
Table 4.2
and Table
4.4
SAP
c. Indicates where samples should be taken, how sites
will be identified/located
Yes Section 4
Table 4.2
and Table
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 5 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
f. Specifies what information is critical and what is for
informational purposes only
Yes Section 4
Table 4.2
SAP
g. Identifies sources of variability and how this
variability should be reconciled with project
information
Yes Section 4
Table 4.2
and Table
4.3
SAP
B2. Sampling Methods
a. Identifies all sampling SOPs by number, date, and
regulatory citation, indicating sampling options or
modifications to be taken
Yes Page 2,
Table 3.2
SAP
b. Indicates how each sample/matrix type should be
collected
Yes Section 4 QAPP
c. If in situ monitoring, indicates how instruments
should be deployed and operated to avoid
contamination and ensure maintenance of proper data
NA NA – one-
time
sampling
event
SAP
d. If continuous monitoring, indicates averaging time
and how instruments should store and maintain raw
data, or data averages
NA NA – one-
time
sampling
event
SAP
e. Indicates how samples are to be homogenized,
composited, split, or filtered, if needed
Yes Section 4
Page 5 and
Page 6
SAP
f. Indicates what sample containers and sample volumes
should be used
Yes Table 4-2 QAPP
g. Identifies whether samples should be preserved and
indicates methods that should be followed
Yes Table 4-2 QAPP
h. Indicates whether sampling equipment and samplers
should be cleaned and/or decontaminated, identifying
how this should be done and by-products disposed of
Yes Table 9-1 QAPP
i. Identifies any equipment and support facilities needed Yes Table 9-1 QAPP
j. Addresses actions to be taken when problems occur,
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 6 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
b. Identifies how samples or information should be
physically handled, transported, and then received and
held in the laboratory or office (including temperature
upon receipt)
Yes Section 5.0 QAPP
c. Indicates how sample or information handling and
custody information should be documented, such as in
field notebooks and forms, identifying individual
responsible
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
d. Discusses system for identifying samples, for
example, numbering system, sample tags and labels,
and attaches forms to the plan
Yes Section 4
Table 4.1
SAP
e. Identifies chain-of-custody procedures and includes
form to track custody
Yes Section 5.0 QAPP
B4. Analytical Methods
a. Identifies all analytical SOPs (field, laboratory and/or
office) that should be followed by number, date, and
regulatory citation, indicating options or modifications
to be taken, such as sub-sampling and extraction
procedures
Yes Appendix
A&B; Page
2, Table
3.2
(QAPP ) Field and Laboratory SOPs located in Appendix A and B
(SAP) Table 3.2 in Section 3
b. Identifies equipment or instrumentation needed Yes Section 6.0 QAPP
c. Specifies any specific method performance criteria Yes Appendix
B
QAPP
d. Identifies procedures to follow when failures occur,
identifying individual responsible for corrective action
and appropriate documentation
Yes Appendix
B
QAPP
e. Identifies sample disposal procedures Yes Appendix
B
QAPP
f. Specifies laboratory turnaround times needed Yes Table 4.2 QAPP
g. Provides method validation information and SOPs for
nonstandard methods
Yes Appendix
B
QAPP
B5. Quality Control
a. For each type of sampling, analysis, or measurement
technique, identifies QC activities which should be
used, for example, blanks, spikes, duplicates, etc., and
at what frequency
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 7 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
c. Identifies procedures and formulas for calculating
applicable QC statistics, for example, for precision,
bias, outliers and missing data
Yes Section 7.0 QAPP
B6. Instrument/Equipment Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance
a. Identifies field and laboratory equipment needing
periodic maintenance, and the schedule for this
Yes Section
8.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
b. Identifies testing criteria Yes Section
8.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
c. Notes availability and location of spare parts Yes Section
8.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
d. Indicates procedures in place for inspecting
equipment before usage
Yes Section
8.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
e. Identifies individual(s) responsible for testing,
inspection and maintenance
Yes Section 8.0 QAPP
f. Indicates how deficiencies found should be resolved,
re-inspections performed, and effectiveness of
corrective action determined and documented
Yes Section
8.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
B7. Instrument/Equipment Calibration and Frequency
a. Identifies equipment, tools, and instruments that
should be calibrated and the frequency for this
calibration
Yes Section 9.0 QAPP
b. Describes how calibrations should be performed and
documented, indicating test criteria and standards or
certified equipment
Yes Section 9.0 QAPP
c. Identifies how deficiencies should be resolved and
documented
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
B8. Inspection/Acceptance for Supplies and Consumables
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 8 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
a. Identifies critical supplies and consumables for field
and laboratory, noting supply source, acceptance
criteria, and procedures for tracking, storing and
retrieving these materials
Yes Section
9.0/
Appendix
A
QAPP
b. Identifies the individual(s) responsible for this Yes Section
9.0/
Appendix
A
QAPP
B9. Use of Existing Data (Non-direct Measurements)
a. Identifies data sources, for example, computer
databases or literature files, or models that should be
accessed and used
Yes 10.5 QAPP
b. Describes the intended use of this information and
the rationale for their selection, i.e., its relevance to
project
Yes 10.5 QAPP
c. Indicates the acceptance criteria for these data
sources and/or models
Yes Section 16 QAPP
d. Identifies key resources/support facilities needed Yes Section 4
Pages 3,4
SAP
e. Describes how limits to validity and operating
conditions should be determined, for example, internal
checks of the program and Beta testing
Yes Section 15 QAPP
B10. Data Management
a. Describes data management scheme from field to
final use and storage
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
b. Discusses standard record-keeping and tracking
practices, and the document control system or cites
other written documentation such as SOPs
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
c. Identifies data handling equipment/procedures that
should be used to process, compile, analyze, and
transmit data reliably and accurately
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
d. Identifies individual(s) responsible for this Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
e. Describes the process for data archival and retrieval Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 9 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
g. Attaches checklists and forms that should be used Yes Appendix
A
QAPP
C. Assessment and Oversight
C1. Assessments and Response Actions
a. Lists the number, frequency, and type of assessment
activities that should be conducted, with the
approximate dates
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
b. Identifies individual(s) responsible for conducting
assessments, indicating their authority to issue stop
work orders, and any other possible participants in the
assessment process
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
c. Describes how and to whom assessment information
should be reported
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
d. Identifies how corrective actions should be addressed
and by whom, and how they should be verified and
documented
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
C2. Reports to Management
a. Identifies what project QA status reports are needed
and how frequently
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
b. Identifies who should write these reports and who
should receive this information
Yes Section
11.0
QAPP
D. Data Validation and Usability
D1. Data Review, Verification, and Validation
Describes criteria that should be used for accepting,
rejecting, or qualifying project data
Yes Section
14.0
QAPP
D2. Verification and Validation Methods
a. Describes process for data verification and validation,
providing SOPs and indicating what data validation
software should be used, if any
Yes Section
14.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
b. Identifies who is responsible for verifying and
EPA Region 8 QA Document Review Crosswalk Page 10 of 10
Sampling and Analysis Plan Montava Northside Revitalization Area-Wide Brownfield Assessment Project
Update # 5 1-2016 QAPP Crosswalk
d. Attaches checklists, forms, and calculations Yes Section
14.0/
Appendix
B
QAPP
D3. Reconciliation with User Requirements
a. Describes procedures to evaluate the uncertainty of
the validated data
Yes Section
15.0
QAPP
b. Describes how limitations on data use should be
reported to the data users
Yes Section
15.0
QAPP
Attachment C: Standard Operating Procedures
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 2 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope & Applicability ............................................................................ 3
1.2 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 3
2.1 Setup of Field Book and Logs .............................................................. 4
2.2 Documentation Requirements for Field Books or Daily Field Report
Logs ...................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Documentation Requirements for Daily Personnel Logs ...................... 6
2.4 Documentation Requirements for Photograph Logs ............................. 6
2.5 Documentation Requirements for Equipment Calibration Logs ............ 6
2.6 Documentation Requirements for Health and Safety Logs ................... 7
2.7 Documentation Requirements for Air Monitoring Logs ......................... 7
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................... 7
4.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................... 8
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ........................................ 8
6.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY .............................................................................. 8
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A: Example Page from Field Book
Attachment B: Example Daily Field Report Log
Attachment C: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 3 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope & Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) guides TRC personnel in the documentation of field
activities for environmental investigations.
Field activity documentation is one of the most important activities that occur during field work.
There is abundant information available for documenting the details of field work at the time the
field work is taking place. It is critical that sufficient detail be documented during field work as it
happens to allow others not present during the field activities to fully comprehend the field
procedures and conditions at the time of the field work.
The objective of documenting field activities is to ensure that a collection of facts is recorded, the
activities can be reconstructed from the documentation, and that the field activities are adequately
logged in a manner that will be acceptable if the record is required as evidence in legal
proceedings. An additional objective of adequately documenting field activities is to provide
complete information that is useful and understandable to someone other than the note taker.
Because the field books and field data forms provide the basis for future reports and analysis,
facts and observations must be accurately recorded. Some regulatory agencies require that a copy
of the field notes be included as part of the report submittal.
This SOP was not intended for use if computer tablets will be used. Consult with the
Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator for procedures when tablets will be used.
1.2 Equipment
The following list is an example of items that may be utilized for field activity documentation.
Project-specific conditions or requirements may warrant the use of additional items or deletion of
items from this list.
• Field book(s) – bound book with water-resistant pages
• Indelible marking pens
• Field data forms – generic or project-specific
• Digital camera
• Pocket ruler
• GPS device
2.0 PROCEDURES
All entries must be legible and must be made in blue or black permanent ink, signed or initialed,
and dated. No erasures or obliterations can be made. If an incorrect entry is made, the
information must be crossed out with a single strike mark which is signed or initialed and dated
by the person recording the information. The correction must be written adjacent to the error.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 4 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
The original entry should still be legible even though crossed out. Pages should never be
removed from a field book.
2.1 Setup of Field Book and Logs
When multiple field personnel are on site, the Field Team Leader should decide the appropriate
distribution of field books, field logs or project-specific forms necessary to document field
activities. It is not necessary for each participant to take field notes.
1. Each field book assigned to a project should have the following information on the title page
(the inside cover of the field book):
- Project name
- Site address
- Site contact, if available
- Project number(s)
- TRC’s name, address and phone number
- Start and end dates of field book entries
2. Each field book may have a designated number (i.e., Book #1, Book #2, etc.) listed on the
outside front cover.
3. Each field book will be a bound field survey book or notebook, water-resistant, and have
sequentially numbered pages.
4. Other field books may or may not be required, dependent on the project needs, at the
discretion of the Project Manager.
2.2 Documentation Requirements for Field Books or Daily Field Report Logs
Data collection activities performed during the field effort will be recorded in field books or on
Daily Field Report Logs. Entries will be of adequate detail so that others will be able to
comprehend a particular situation and it will be possible to reconstruct each activity without
reliance on memory.
Entries into the field book or Daily Field Report Log may contain a variety of information. The
terminology used in recording all field data should be objective, factual, and free of personal
interpretation that may prove inappropriate. At the beginning of each daily entry, the date, start
time, weather, and names of all field team members present will be entered. It is good practice to
record the date on every page. The start and end of each day’s entries in the field book or Daily
Field Report Log will be signed or initialed and dated by the person(s) making the entry.
In general, it is expected that field notes will be collected every 15 minutes, as appropriate.
Information included in the field book or Daily Field Report Log may include, but need not be
limited to, the following:
• Chronology of activities, including entry and exit times;
• Names of all people involved in field activities and organizational affiliations;
• Level of personal protection used (if different from site-specific protocol/plan);
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 5 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Any changes made to site-specific protocol/plan
• Names of visitors to the site during field work and reason for their visit (unless in Daily
Personnel Log)
• Sample location and identification
• Weather conditions, including temperature and any precipitation
• Day’s objectives/scope of work
• Vehicle used (personal, rental) with travel time to site and mileage
• Measurement equipment identification (model/manufacturer) and calibration information
• Summary of equipment brought by subcontractor
• Communications while on site impacting site-specific protocol/plan
• Field screening results
• Site observations
• Sample collection methods and equipment
• Sample collection date (month/day/year) and time (military)
• Sample depths
• Whether grab or composite sample collected
• How sample composited, if applicable
• Sample description (color, odor, texture, etc.)
• Tests or analyses to be performed
• Sample preservation and storage conditions
• Equipment decontamination procedures
• QC sample collection
• Sample shipping methods, including tracking numbers, if applicable
• Unusual events or observations
• Record of photographs (unless in Photograph Log)
• Volume and type of investigation derived waste generated
• Sketches or diagrams
• Signature or initials of person recording the information
Upon receipt of the field book or Daily Field Report Log for a particular activity, the designated
person recording the notes will begin recording notes on a new page. The person(s) recording the
notes will sign/initial the new page and indicate the date, time, and weather conditions, prior to
recording information about the field activity. The field book or Daily Field Report Log should
indicate whether any Field Data Forms are being used. When the designated person recording the
notes either relinquishes the field book or Daily Field Report Log to another team member or
turns the book or log in at the end of the day, the person relinquishing the field book or Daily
Field Report Log will affix a signature and date to the bottom of the last page used. If the page is
not full, a diagonal line should be struck across the blank portion of the page. An example field
book page is provided in Attachment A. An example Daily Field Report Log is provided in
Attachment B.
Field data forms may be used to document sampling information for routine activities that have
an associated form. A stockpile of blank forms will be kept in the field trailer/office or with the
Field Team Leader. The field book or Daily Field Report Log should reference the form used
during that event. Examples of TRC field data forms include:
• Sample log sheets (e.g., groundwater, sediment, soil gas, indoor air)
• Groundwater static water level data sheet
• Slug test data sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 6 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Monitoring well construction summary/well development
• Monitoring well decommissioning
• Photograph log
• Soil boring/Rock core log
• Equipment log
• Calibration log
2.3 Documentation Requirements for Daily Personnel Logs
If applicable, the Daily Personnel Log will be maintained in the field trailer/office or by the Field
Team Leader for the duration of the project to record the identities of all personnel who are on
site. The following information will be recorded on Daily Personnel Logs:
• Names of field personnel
• Names of subcontractor personnel
• Names of visitors
• Affiliation of each person on site
• Date/time of entry and exit
2.4 Documentation Requirements for Photograph Logs
A field book/Daily Field Report Log entry or Photograph Log will be used to record the date and
time of photographs taken at the project site. Digital cameras that imprint the date and time of the
photograph may also be used to document conditions; however, prior to taking any site
photographs with a digital camera, the photographer must verify the correct clock and calendar
settings in the camera. An appropriate site figure may be used to note the location and direction
of photographic documentation and should be referenced and attached to the log, if used.
Examples of items that warrant photographic documentation include:
• General site topography
• Sampling and/or drilling locations
• Existing monitoring well locations
• Pre-existing property conditions and conditions following restoration
• Physical appearance of environmental samples
• Evidence of possible contamination
• Well casing or pad damage
• Rock cores
2.5 Documentation Requirements for Equipment Calibration Logs
A field book/Daily Field Report Log entry or Equipment Calibration Log will be completed to
record appropriate information for the instruments calibrated each day. This information may
include:
• Equipment manufacturer, model number and serial number
• Dates and times of calibration
• Supplies used (e.g., calibration gas)
• Individual who performed the calibration
• Adjustments made to the instrument during calibration
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 7 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Notes regarding the maintenance of the instrument
2.6 Documentation Requirements for Health and Safety Logs
A field book/Daily Field Report Log entry or Health and Safety Log will be completed to record
Health and Safety issues during field activities. Entries may include:
• Daily health and safety meeting prior to performing work
• Any injuries, illnesses, near-misses, or the use of first aid supplies
• Activity under Level D conditions or the use of specific personal protective equipment (for
Levels A, B or C only, if needed)
• Occurrence of possible work-related symptoms
• The date, name(s) of affected individuals and a description of the issue or incident and
response
• A record of air monitoring results, any action level exceedances, and actions taken as the
result of any action level exceedances
2.7 Documentation Requirements for Air Monitoring Logs
A field book/Daily Field Report Log entry or Air Monitoring Log will be completed to record
monitoring results from real-time air monitoring instruments during field activities. The air
monitoring devices will be located and operated in accordance with the Air Monitoring Plan. For
hand-held instruments without data logging capabilities, readings will be recorded in the field
book/Daily Field Report Log or on the Air Monitoring Log. For instruments with data logging
capabilities, the instruments will be periodically checked, with results recorded in the field
book/Daily Field Report Log or on the Air Monitoring Log. Data will be downloaded at the end
of each workday and maintained in the project files.
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The Field Team Leader has the responsibility to maintain the various logs, forms, and books that
document daily field activities. Individual responsibilities may be delegated to other field staff,
as appropriate.
Quality control procedures will place emphasis on the completeness and accuracy of all
information recorded in the field and will be used to confirm that field notes contain statements
that are legible, accurate, and comprehensive documentation of project activities. Field
books/Daily Field Report Logs should be reviewed on a frequent basis by the Field Team Leader
to confirm that:
• Field books/Daily Field Report Logs and standardized forms have been filled out completely
and that the information recorded accurately reflects the activities that were performed.
• Records are legible and in accordance with good record-keeping procedures, i.e., entries are
signed or initialed and dated, data are not obliterated, and changes are initialed, dated, and
explained.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 8 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Sample collection, handling, preservation, and storage procedures were conducted in
accordance with the protocols described in the project plans, and that any deviations were
documented and approved by the appropriate personnel.
• Instruments were calibrated and operated in accordance with the procedures specified in the
project plans.
4.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation requirements for investigation-derived
waste disposal with the Project Manager.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
The Project Manager or Field Team Leader will maintain an inventory of all field books/Daily
Field Report Logs used during the program and will be responsible for ensuring that they are
archived in the project files following the completion of the field work.
Completed standardized forms will be maintained by the Project Manager or Field Team Leader
during the duration of the program and will be archived in the project files following completion
of the field effort.
It is good practice to scan field notes and logs at the conclusion of field activities and store the
resulting pdf files in the project directory.
6.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 JANUARY 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 9 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A: Example Page from Field Book
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 10 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 11 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment B: Example Daily Field Report Log
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 12 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 13 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment C: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 14 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Field Activity Documentation for Environmental Investigations Page 15 of 15
Procedure No: RMD 001 Revision: 0 Effective: 1/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 1 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Chain-of-Custody Procedures
RMD 002
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
March 2013
Authorization Signatures
03/01/2013
03/01/2013
Technical Review
James Peronto
Date Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 2 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope & Applicability ............................................................................ 3
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 4
2.1 Specific Chain-of-Custody Procedures ................................................. 4
2.1.1 Sample Labels .............................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Custody Seals ............................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Chain-of-Custody Form ................................................................. 5
2.1.4 Transfer of Custody ...................................................................... 5
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................... 6
4.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................... 6
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ........................................ 6
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................... 7
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY .............................................................................. 7
FIGURES
Figure 1: Example Sample Label and Custody Seal
Figure 2: Example Chain-of-Custody Form
Figure 3: Example Federal Express Air Bill
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 3 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope & Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) guides TRC personnel in proper Chain-of-Custody
practices.
This SOP was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the sample custody procedure requirements
associated with field sample collection. Other state or federal requirements may be above and
beyond the scope of this SOP and will be followed, if applicable. Sample custody procedures are
an important part of the field investigation program in order to maintain data quality and to be
able to document proof of proper handling. Sample custody begins at the collection of the
samples and continues until the samples have been analyzed. Sample custody is addressed in
three parts: field sample collection, laboratory analysis, and final evidence files.
Custody is one of several factors that are necessary for the admissibility of environmental data as
evidence in a court of law or other evidentiary venue. Custody procedures help to satisfy the two
major requirements for admissibility: relevance and authenticity. An overriding consideration
essential for the validation of environmental measurement data is the necessity to demonstrate
that samples have been obtained from the locations stated and that they have reached the
laboratory without alteration (i.e., representative of the identified sample media).
1.2 Summary of Method
Evidence of the sample tracking from collection to shipment, laboratory receipt, and laboratory
custody (until proper sample disposal and the introduction of field investigation results as
evidence in legal proceedings when pertinent) must be properly documented.
A sample or evidence file is considered to be in a person's custody if the item is:
• In a person's possession
• In the view of the person after being in a person's possession
• Secured and preserved so that no one can tamper with it after having been in a person’s
possession
• In a secured area, restricted to authorized personnel
The Field Team Leader or designee is responsible for overseeing and supervising the
implementation of proper sample custody procedures in the field. The Field Team Leader or
designee is also responsible for ensuring sample custody until the samples have been transferred
to a courier or directly to the laboratory. Once received by the laboratory, the samples proceed
through an orderly processing sequence specifically designed to ensure continuous integrity of
both the sample and its documentation.
1.3 Equipment
The following list is an example of items that may be utilized when implementing sample custody
procedures in the field. Project-specific conditions or requirements may warrant the use of
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 4 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
additional items or deletion of items from this list. Many of these items may be provided by the
selected analytical laboratory for a given project.
• Chain-of-Custody forms
• Sample labels
• Sample tags
• Custody seals
• Computer
• Indelible/waterproof ink
• Printer
2.0 PROCEDURES
Sample custody and transfer procedures are summarized below. These procedures are intended to
ensure that the samples will arrive at the laboratory with the Chain-of-Custody intact. The Chain-
of-Custody procedures are initiated in the field immediately following sample collection. The
procedures consist of four main components: (1) preparing and attaching a unique sample label to
each sample collected, (2) completing the Chain-of-Custody (COC) form, (3) reviewing the COC
form for accuracy and (4) preparing the samples for shipment and transfer of custody.
2.1 Specific Chain-of-Custody Procedures
2.1.1 Sample Labels
Field personnel are responsible for uniquely identifying and labeling all samples collected during
a field investigation program. All labeling must be completed in indelible/waterproof ink and
securely affixed to the sample container. Individual sample containers may be pre-labeled or
labeled in the field at the time of collection. Sufficient sample information should be cross-
referenced in the field documentation for tracking purposes.
Sample labels typically contain the following information:
• Unique sample identification
• Sample location and/or depth/description number, if different from above
• Sample matrix
• Type of analysis to be performed
• Type of chemical preservation used
• Grab or composite designation
• Filtered or unfiltered
• Sampling date and time
• Sampler's affiliation and initials
• Site and/or client name
An example of a sample label is provided in Figure 1.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 5 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.1.2 Custody Seals
Custody seals may be secured across the shipping container to ensure content integrity. The seals
contain both the date and the signature of the person affixing them and must be completed in
indelible/waterproof ink. Custody seals are attached to the cover seal of the cooler and can be
covered with clear plastic tape after being signed and dated by field personnel. An example of a
custody seal is shown in Figure 1. The use of custody seals will be determined on a project-
specific basis by the Project Manager.
2.1.3 Chain-of-Custody Form
For all analyses, COC forms must be completed for each sample set submitted. COC forms are
initiated by the samplers in the field and maintained until samples are analyzed by the laboratory.
If multiple laboratories are being used, a separate set of COC forms must be completed for each
laboratory receiving samples to ensure proper transfer of custody from the time of sample
collection to analysis. These forms serve as a record of sample collection, transfer, shipment, and
receipt by the laboratory. These forms typically contain the following pertinent information:
• Project/site name and/or project number
• Carrier name, if applicable
• Air bill numbers(s), if known and applicable
• Laboratory name and address
• Sample identifications
• Sample matrix (e.g., soil, water)
• Type of sample (i.e., grab or composite)
• Date/time sample collected
• Size, type, and number of containers
• Preservative used
• Required analysis or method
• Turnaround time
• Names of individuals responsible for custody of samples
• Date shipped or otherwise transferred
Figure 2 provides an example COC form. It should be noted that this is an example format only.
Laboratories typically provide their own laboratory-specific COC form. Other COC formats may
be used as long as all of the applicable information is included. COC forms will be initiated in
the field.
All entries on the COC form must be legible and must be made in blue or black permanent ink.
No erasures or obliterations can be made. If an incorrect entry is made, the information must be
crossed out with a single strike mark which is signed or initialed and dated by the person
recording the information. The correction must be written adjacent to the error. The original
entry should still be legible even though crossed out.
2.1.4 Transfer of Custody
Samples will be accompanied by a properly completed COC form during each step of custody
transfer and shipment. When physical possession of samples is transferred, both the individual
relinquishing the samples and the individual receiving them will sign, date, and record the time of
transfer on the COC form.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 6 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
All samples will be shipped directly to the laboratories by a TRC employee, an overnight
commercial carrier, or a laboratory-supplied courier service.
In the case of sample shipment by an overnight commercial carrier, a properly prepared air bill,
including the project number (Figure 3), will serve as an extension of the COC form while the
samples are in transit. The COC forms will be sealed inside the sample cooler within a clear
plastic bag and the custody seals, if used, will be completed on the outside of the cooler prior to
shipment. Commercial carriers are not required to sign off on the custody forms since the forms
are sealed inside the cooler prior to shipment so any custody seal remains intact. The original
COC form will accompany the samples at all times. A copy of all COC forms submitted to the
laboratory will be retained by the sampler along with field records/logbooks documenting sample
collection and will be placed in the project files.
If at the completion of sampling the samples are not shipped directly from the field or point of
collection to the analytical laboratory, the samples will be temporarily stored in an iced cooler at
a secure location (e.g., locked vehicle, residence, office) or in a locked refrigerator at the TRC
office. Access to the secure location and transfer of the sample containers for laboratory delivery
shall only be provided by a TRC employee and such sample transfer shall be recorded on the
COC form.
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
Following sample collection, all samples will be brought to a location for batching and paperwork
checks. At this location, labels and logbook information are cross-checked to ensure there is no
error in sample identification or sample collection time and that all samples are accounted for.
The sample information is transferred to the COC form. The samples are packaged to prevent
breakage and/or leakage, and the shipping containers are labeled for transport.
The Field Team Leader has the responsibility of maintaining the COC and air bill documentation.
Individual responsibilities may be delegated to other field staff, as appropriate. Quality control
procedures will place emphasis on ensuring that appropriate samples were collected and
submitted to the laboratory for the correct analyses. The COC forms will also be reviewed by the
Field Team Leader or designee to ensure that all required information is clearly presented.
Many laboratories will provide a sample receipt confirmation via electronic mail upon request.
COC forms should be cross-checked with laboratory sample receipt confirmations, if applicable,
to ensure that all samples were received and logged-in correctly by the laboratory.
4.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Not applicable.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
The Project Manager or Field Team Leader will maintain an inventory of all COC forms
completed during the program and will be responsible for ensuring that they are archived in the
project files following the completion of the field work.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 7 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
It is good practice to scan all completed COC forms at the conclusion of field activities and store
the resulting electronic PDF files in the project directory.
6.0 REFERENCES
A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Office of Enforcement and Compliance
Monitoring – National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC) requirements (NEIC, 1986)
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 MARCH 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 8 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Figure 1 Example Sample Label and Custody Seal
Example Custody Seal
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 9 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Figure 2 Example Chain-of-Custody Form
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 10 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Figure 3 Example Federal Express Air Bill
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 11 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Chain-of-Custody Procedures Page 12 of 12
Procedure No: RMD 002 Revision: 0 Effective: 3/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 2 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 4
1.1 Scope and Applicability ........................................................................ 4
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 4
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 4
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 5
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 6
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 6
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 6
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 7
2.1 Pre-Sampling Activities ......................................................................... 7
2.2 General Soil Sampling Procedures....................................................... 8
2.2.1 Surface Soil Sampling Methods .................................................. 10
2.2.2 Hand Auger Sampling Methods .................................................. 10
2.2.3 Direct-Push Sampling Methods ................................................... 12
2.2.4 Split-spoon Sampling Methods ................................................... 14
2.2.5 Shelby Tube/Thin-walled Sampling Methods .............................. 15
2.2.6 Sonic Drilling Sampling Methods ................................................ 16
2.2.7 Excavator Sampling Methods ..................................................... 17
2.2.8 Stockpile Soil Sampling Methods ................................................ 18
2.3 Post-sampling Activities ...................................................................... 19
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 19
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 19
4.1 Duplicate Soil Sample Collection ........................................................ 19
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 20
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 21
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 21
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 3 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Procedure for Collection of Samples for VOCs, VPH, or GRO
(SW-846 Method 5035A)
Attachment B Shipping Methanol-preserved Samples
Attachment C SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 4 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the logistics,
collection techniques, and documentation requirements for collecting representative soil samples.
These are standard (i.e., typically applicable) operating procedures that may be changed, as
required, dependent upon site conditions, equipment limitations, or limitations imposed by the
procedure. In addition, other state or federal requirements may be above and beyond the scope of
this SOP and will be followed, if applicable. In all instances, the actual procedures used should
be documented and described in the field notes. Portions of this SOP may be applicable to soil
sample collection for geotechnical analysis. However, specific instructions for collection of
geotechnical samples are not provided; these samples should be collected in accordance with
ASTM methods or other applicable standards.
1.2 Summary of Method
The objective of soil sampling is to obtain a representative sample of soil for laboratory analysis
of constituents of interest at a given site. This objective requires that the sample be of sufficient
quantity and quality for analysis by the selected analytical method. Soil samples may be
collected using a variety of methods and equipment depending on the depth of the desired sample,
the type of sample required (disturbed vs. undisturbed), and the soil type. Near-surface soils may
be sampled using a spade, trowel, and/or scoop. Sampling at greater depths typically is
performed using a hand auger, continuous flight auger, a split-spoon, direct-push methods (i.e.,
Geoprobe®), sonic drilling, a backhoe or an excavator. The following reference may be used as a
guide to aid in selecting an appropriate method or sampling device for the collection of
subsurface soil samples with a drill rig: ASTM D6169–98 Standard Guide for Selection of Soil
and Rock Sampling Devices Used With Drill Rigs for Environmental Investigation
1.3 Equipment
The following equipment may be utilized when collecting soil samples. Project-specific
conditions or laboratory requirements may warrant the addition or deletion of items from this list.
• Appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE), as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP).
• Sample containers
For non-volatile organic compound (VOC) parameters, glass containers with Teflon®-lined
caps are typically utilized. Typical containers used for VOC parameters are provided in
Attachment A. Brass liners, steel liners, or soil core acetate liners with Teflon® tape and
plastic end caps may also be used.
(may be supplied by the laboratory, depending upon the regulatory
program): The proper containers should be determined in conjunction with the analytical
laboratory in the planning stages of the project.
• En-Core® samplers.
• Disposable plastic syringes or Terra Core samplers.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 5 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Stainless steel mixing bowl.
• Stainless steel spoon or spatula.
• Hand auger, mud auger, sand auger, bucket auger and T-handle.
• Post hole auger.
• Extension rods.
• Stainless steel trowel.
• Shovel.
• Tape measure, folding ruler.
• Wooden stakes and spray paint, plastic flagging (highly visible), or steel pin flags.
• Field book and/or boring log.
• Sample container labels.
• Chain-of-custody (COC) forms (TRC or laboratory, as appropriate).
• Camera.
• Maps/site plan.
• Survey equipment and/or global positioning system (GPS) and/or other means of measuring
sample locations.
• Indelible marking pens or markers.
• Organic absorbent (e.g., Slickwick, ground corn cob, sawdust).
• Sample coolers.
• Bubble wrap.
• Ice (for sample storage/preservation).
• Zip-loc® plastic bags (for ice and COCs).
• Equipment decontamination supplies.
1.4 Definitions
Composite sample Composed of a number of grab samples collected over a period
of time or space during a single sampling event and mixed
together.
En-Core® sampler A disposable volumetric sampling device with an airtight sealing
cap.
Grab sample Individual discrete sample collected at a particular time.
High-level VOC analysis VOC soil analysis that yields high reporting limits
(approximately 50-200 µg/kg, depending on the laboratory).
Samples are typically preserved in methanol and cooled to 4°C.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 6 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
High-level VOC analyses are used for samples that are expected
to contain elevated concentrations of VOCs (>200 µg/kg).
Low-level VOC analysis VOC soil analysis that yields low reporting limits
(approximately 5 µg/kg, depending on the laboratory). Samples
are typically preserved in water, cooled to 4°C, and frozen within
48 hours of collection. Low-level VOC analyses are used for
samples that are expected to contain lower concentrations of
VOCs (≤200 µg/kg).
Terra Core™ sampler A disposable volumetric sampling device used to transfer soil
samples to the appropriate sample containers.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE, as defined
in the HASP.
Soil samples containing chemical contaminants may be handled during implementation of this
SOP. Additionally, sample preservatives including caustics and/or acids may be considered
hazardous materials and TRC employees will appropriately handle and store them at all times
Address chemicals that pose specific toxicity or safety concerns and follow any other relevant
requirements, as appropriate. Hazardous substances may be incompatible or may react to
produce heat, chemical reactions, or toxic products. Hazardous substances may be incompatible
with clothing or equipment; some substances can permeate or degrade protective clothing or
equipment. Also, hazardous substances may pose a direct health hazard to workers through
inhalation or skin contact or if exposed to heat/flame and they combust. Material safety data
sheets for chemicals handled by TRC should be maintained in the field.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
• Cross contamination:
•
Cross contamination problems can be eliminated or minimized through
the use of dedicated sampling equipment. If this is not possible or practical, then
decontamination of sampling equipment is necessary.
Improper sample collection:
• Special considerations for the different soil sampling techniques are provided below in the
applicable sections. Cautions and potential problems associated with soil sampling for VOCs
are provided in Attachment A.
Improper sample collection can involve using contaminated
equipment, disturbance of the matrix resulting in compaction of the sample, or inadequate
homogenization of the samples where required, resulting in variable, non-representative
results.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 7 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Project and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
Always review the site-specific work plan and/or scope of work for any site-specific sampling
procedures.
2.1 Pre-Sampling Activities
Pre-sampling activities that the sampling team should consider include the following: preparing a
sampling strategy; reviewing the work plan approved by the regulatory agency; selecting a
laboratory, and determining laboratory-specific procedures related to bottle orders, holding times,
work orders, methods of analysis, COC procedures, data deliverables, schedule, and cost.
Additional activities include determining shipping logistics, utility clearance, and handling of
investigation-derived waste disposal. Pre-labeling bottles can help to reduce sampling and
labeling errors.
The following steps should also be employed.
1. Determine the extent of the sampling effort, the sampling methods to be employed, and the
types and amounts of equipment and supplies required.
2. Obtain necessary sampling and monitoring equipment.
3. Decontaminate or clean equipment, and ensure that it is in working order.
4. Prepare schedules and coordinate with staff, client, and regulatory agencies, if appropriate.
5. Perform a general site survey prior to site entry in accordance with the site-specific HASP.
6. Use stakes, flagging, or buoys to identify and mark all sampling locations. Specific site
factors, including extent and nature of contaminants, should be considered when selecting
sample locations. If required, the proposed locations may be adjusted based on site access,
property boundaries, and surface obstructions.
NOTE: If spray paint is used to mark stakes, the spray paint should be carefully isolated from
the space used to hold sample bottles, sampling equipment, etc.
7. Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, especially that completed with a drill rig or backhoe, it
is important to ensure that all sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried utilities by
conducting a utility survey/markout.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 8 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.2 General Soil Sampling Procedures
1. Refer to other TRC SOPs for the proper procedures for classifying soil samples and for
screening of samples for VOCs.
2. For sampling in the state of California only:
When the sampling interval is predetermined
and soil samples are collected by direct-push methods into an acetate liner, the section of the
liner corresponding to the predetermined depth interval may be cut off and submitted to the
laboratory for analysis with the exception of samples for VOC, volatile petroleum
hydrocarbon (VPH), or gasoline-range organics (GRO) analysis. If VOC, VPH, or GRO
analysis is required, then these samples can be collected from either open end of the acetate
liner section according to the procedures outlined in Attachment A prior to packaging and
submitting it to the laboratory. The laboratory should be consulted for the required length of
liner tube (i.e., sample volume) depending on the analytical suite and to ensure that the use of
acetate liners is appropriate for the analytical method(s). After collecting material for the
VOC, VPH, or GRO analysis samples (if required), seal each end of the acetate liner section
with Teflon tape and plastic end caps. Wrap the ends with non-volatile tape and label the
acetate liner with the sample identification (ID) and date and time of collection. Ensure that
the laboratory will perform homogenization of the soil sample within the acetate liner and
proceed to Step #9.
3. Prior to the collection of soil samples from a particular location or depth, the soil is typically
screened for organic vapors with a portable meter equipped with a flame ionization detector
(FID) and/or photoionization detector (PID) depending upon the suspected contaminants of
concern and site-specific work plan requirements. Such organic vapor screening may be used
to determine appropriate soil sample locations or depths for laboratory VOC analysis
depending upon established site-specific work plan requirements. Soil should be screened in
situ or immediately upon retrieval of the soil sample from the subsurface.
4. Samples for VOC, VPH or GRO analysis are then collected as soon as possible after the soil
has been exposed to the atmosphere and prior to sample collection for other analyses.
o These samples are NOT homogenized.
o These samples are generally collected using an open-barrel disposable syringe, a
Terra Core™ sampler, or an En-Core® sampler, or equivalent. Note that En-Core®
samplers are not recommended for non-cohesive soils (see Attachment A).
o Refer to the site-specific work plan or governing regulatory authority for
preservation requirements for VOC, VPH or GRO analysis. Attachment A of this
SOP includes typical procedures on the collection and preservation of soil samples
for VOC, VPH and GRO analysis.
5. After collecting the sample for VOC analysis, the sample portion for the remaining analysis
should be well homogenized, in situ (if possible, such as with surface soil sampling), or in a
decontaminated stainless steel bowl or disposable new aluminum pie pan. These soil samples
must be thoroughly mixed to ensure that the sample is as representative as possible of the
sample media. Soil can be homogenized and transferred to sample containers using soil
sampling devices that have been decontaminated prior to use or individually wrapped, sterile,
new polystyrene devices. Such sterile, polystyrene devices are generally for one-time use.
Stainless steel devices may be decontaminated and individually foil wrapped, plastic bagged,
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 9 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
or field decontaminated and foil wrapped between uses. Decontamination of sampling
equipment shall be conducted in accordance with TRC’s SOP on equipment decontamination.
6. Stones, gravel, or vegetation should be removed from the soil sample as much as practical
prior to placement in sample containers, since these materials will not be analyzed. Visible
asphalt, concrete, ash, slag, and coal debris should also be removed from the sample as much
as possible to ensure sufficient soil quantity for laboratory analyses, unless these matrices are
part of the overall characterization program. The soil sample must be representative of what
the end user is trying to characterize. In addition, if such debris is to be tested, further sample
preparation (e.g., pulverizing) will likely be necessary in the field or laboratory. In any case,
the presence of any such materials in the soil at the sample location must be documented in
the field book.
7. Filling of the sample bottles should be completed immediately after sample collection to
minimize losses due to volatilization and biodegradation. Soil classification can be
completed following sample collection.
8. Place the sample into an appropriate, labeled container(s) by using the alternate shoveling
method and secure the cap(s) tightly. The alternate shoveling method involves placing a
spoonful of soil in each container in sequence and repeating until the containers are full or the
sample volume has been exhausted. Threads on the container and lid should be cleaned to
ensure a tight seal when closed.
9. Restore the sampling location to grade in accordance with applicable state or federal
guidelines and/or the site-specific work plan. Options include backfilling the sample location
with the remaining removed soil, bentonite pellets or, cement/bentonite grout depending on
site conditions and patching the surface to match the surrounding area (e.g., topsoil with grass
seed, asphalt or concrete patch), as necessary. Boreholes must be abandoned or backfilled
after the completion of sampling. In general, shallow boreholes (e.g., less than 10 feet deep)
that remain open and do not approach the water table may be abandoned by pouring a
cement/bentonite grout mixture from the surface or pouring bentonite pellets from the surface
and hydrating the pellets in lifts. The grout mixture should be based on site-specific
conditions (e.g., boring depth, groundwater depth, and formation permeability), site-specific
work plan procedures, and local regulatory requirements. Boreholes where bridging of the
bentonite may be an issue, such as boreholes that intercept groundwater or are greater than
approximately 10 feet in depth, should be backfilled by pressure grouting with a
cement/bentonite grout mixture, either through a re-entry tool string or through a tremie pipe
introduced to within several feet of the borehole bottom.
10. Record locations of soil borings/samples in the field book by sketching a map and/or
providing a description of the location. Always measure and record distances to fixed
landmarks, such as buildings, fences, curbs, existing surveyed wells, etc. Additionally, a
GPS unit with real-time sub-meter accuracy (not applicable for interior samples or other site
conditions such as heavy tree/brush cover and thick cloud cover that limit unit connection
with satellites) could be used to document sample locations. Note observations about
elevation changes between sample locations.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 10 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.2.1 Surface Soil Sampling Methods
The depth of surface soil samples will be determined on a site-specific basis and may be
influenced by site-specific conditions and/or applicable local, state, or federal regulatory
programs and potential exposure pathways. Surface soils are generally classified as soils between
the ground surface and 6 to 12 inches below ground surface (bgs). The most common interval is
0 to 6 inches; however, the data quality objectives of the investigation may dictate another
interval, such as 0 to 3 inches for risk assessment purposes.
The following procedure should be used for surface soil sampling:
1. If a thick, matted root zone, leaf layer, gravel, surface debris, concrete, etc. is present at or
near the surface, it should be carefully removed using clean decontaminated tools or clean
nitrile gloves before the soil sample is collected. The presence and thickness of any such
material should be recorded in the field book for each location. The depth measurement for
the soil sample begins at the top of the soil horizon, immediately following any such removed
materials.
2. A decontaminated stainless steel spoon, scoop or trowel is typically used for surface soil
sampling depths from 0 to 12 inches bgs where conditions are generally soft, and there is no
problematic vegetative layer to penetrate. A hand auger or shovel may also be used to dig
down to the desired depth and then after careful removal of the dug soils from the hole, a
decontaminated stainless steel spoon, scoop or trowel is used to collect the soil sample from
the bottom of the hole for laboratory chemical analysis. Plated trowels typically available
from garden supply centers should not be used due to potential heavy metal impacts from the
trowel plating.
3. When using stainless steel spoons or trowels, consideration must be given to the procedure
used to collect a soil sample for VOC analysis. Samples for VOC, VPH or GRO analysis
must be collected first and never homogenized or composited. These samples are collected
using an open-barrel disposable syringe, a Terra Core™ sampler, or an En-Core® sampler, or
equivalent. If the soil being sampled is cohesive and holds its in situ texture in the spoon or
trowel, the En-Core® sampler or disposable syringe used to collect the sub-sample should be
plugged directly from the spoon or trowel. However, if the soil is not cohesive and crumbles
when removed from the ground surface for sampling, the sub-sample should be plugged
directly from the surface of the appropriate sample depth. Additionally, note that En-Core®
samplers are not recommended for non-cohesive soils (see Attachment A). Generally, the
sample portion for VOC analysis is collected from several inches below grade to minimize
volatilization from the in situ soil.
4. Continue by following the General Soil Sampling Procedures in Section 2.2.
2.2.2 Hand Auger Sampling Methods
The shallow subsurface interval may be considered to extend from approximately 12 inches bgs
to a site-specific depth at which sample collection using manual collection with a spoon or trowel
becomes difficult or impractical. Hand augers may be used to advance boreholes and collect soil
samples in shallow subsurface intervals. Often, 4-inch diameter stainless steel auger buckets with
cutting heads are used. The auger is advanced by simultaneously pushing and turning using an
attached T-handle with extensions (if needed).
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 11 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Auger holes are advanced one bucket at a time until the appropriate sample depth is achieved.
When the sample depth is reached, the bucket used to advance the hole is removed and
decontaminated or a clean bucket is attached. The clean auger bucket is then placed in the hole
and filled with soil to make up the sample and then carefully removed. The practical depth of
investigation using a hand auger largely depends upon the soil properties and depth of
investigation. In sand, augering is typically easy to perform, but the depth of collection is limited
to the depth at which the sand begins to flow or collapse. The use of hand augers may be of
limited use in soils containing large amounts of unnatural fill (e.g., brick, slag, concrete), coarse
gravel and cobbles (or larger grain size), and in tight clays or cemented sands. In these soil types,
it becomes more difficult to recover a sample due to increased friction and torqueing of the hand
auger extensions as the depth increases. At some point, these problems become so severe that
alternate methods (i.e., power equipment) must be used.
The following procedure is used for collecting soil samples with the hand auger:
1. Attach the auger head to a drill rod extension and attach the T-handle to the rod.
2. Clear the area to be sampled of any surface debris (e.g., twigs, rocks, litter). It may be
advisable to remove the first several inches of surface soil and any root layer for an area
approximately 6 inches in radius around the borehole location.
3. Begin augering, periodically removing and depositing accumulated soils onto a plastic sheet
spread near the borehole. This prevents accidental brushing of loose material back down the
borehole when removing the auger or adding rod extensions. It also facilitates refilling the
borehole and avoids possible contamination of the surrounding area.
4. When the sample depth is reached, remove the bucket used to advance the borehole and
attach a decontaminated or clean bucket. Place the clean auger bucket in the borehole,
advance the clean auger bucket to fill it with the soil sample and then carefully remove the
clean auger bucket.
5. If VOC analysis is to be performed, collect a sample directly at the bottom of the boring, if
within reach, and not from the auger bucket. If not within reach, collect the sample directly
from the auger bucket or from minimally disturbed material immediately after the auger
bucket is emptied. Use an En-Core® sampler or other coring device (i.e., syringe, Terra
Core™) to collect the sub-sample as described in Attachment A. Note: some regulatory
agencies do not allow for subsurface VOC sample collection directly with a hand auger; refer
to the site-specific work plan and regulatory requirements to ensure the collection of VOC
samples with a hand auger is appropriate.
6. Continue by following the General Soil Sampling Procedures in Section 2.2. Note that if
another sample is to be collected in the same borehole, but at a greater depth, reattach the
auger bucket to the rod assembly, and follow steps 1 through 5 above, making sure to
decontaminate the sampling device between samples.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 12 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Special Considerations for Hand Auger Sampling
• Utility Clearance - Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, it is important to ensure that all
sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried utilities through the conduct of a utility
survey/markout. Locations on private properties should also be reviewed with the owner
prior to installation.
• Slough - Because of the tendency for the auger bucket to scrape material from the sides of the
auger hole while being extracted, the top several inches of soil in the auger bucket should be
discarded prior to placing the bucket contents in the homogenization container for processing.
• VOC Sample Collection - Observe precautions for VOC sample collection found in
Attachment A and/or the site-specific work plan.
• Decontamination - If sampling equipment is to be reused at a new sampling location or at a
deeper depth in the same location, proper decontamination of sampling equipment is
required.
2.2.3 Direct-Push Sampling Methods
Direct-push sampling methods are used primarily to collect shallow and deep subsurface soil
samples. Soil sampling probes may range from simple hand tools to truck-mounted or track-
mounted hydraulically operated rigs. The basic concept is the same for all of these samplers: the
tool is hydraulically driven into the soil, filling the tube, and then the tool is withdrawn. All of
the sampling tools involve the collection and retrieval of the soil sample within a thin-walled
liner. The following sections describe two specific sampling methods using direct-push
techniques, along with details specific to each method.
• Macro-Core® Sampler (Direct-push)
- The Macro-Core® (MC®) sampler is a solid barrel,
direct-push sampler equipped with a piston-rod point assembly used primarily for collection
of either continuous or depth-discrete subsurface soil samples. Although other lengths are
available, the standard MC® sampler has an assembled length of approximately 52 inches
(1321 mm) with an outside diameter (OD) of 2.2 inches (56 mm). The MC® sampler is
capable of recovering a discrete sample core 45 inches x 1.5 inches (1143 mm x 38 mm)
contained inside a removable liner. The resultant sample volume is a maximum of 1300 mL.
The MC® sampler may be used in either an open-tube or closed-point configuration.
• Dual-tube Soil Sampling System (Direct-push)
- The Dual-tube 21 soil sampling system is a
direct-push system for collecting continuous core samples of unconsolidated materials from
within a sealed outer casing of 2.125-inch (54 mm) OD probe rod. The samples are collected
within a liner that is threaded onto the leading end of a string of 1.0-inch diameter probe rod.
Collected samples have a volume of up to 800 mL in the form of a 1.125-inch x 48-inch (29
mm x 1219 mm) core. Use of this method allows for collection of a continuous core inside a
cased hole, minimizing or preventing cross contamination between different intervals during
sample collection. The outer casing is advanced, one core length at a time, with only the inner
probe rod and core being removed and replaced between samples. If the sampling zone of
interest begins at some depth below ground surface, a solid drive tip must be used to drive the
dual-tube assembly and core to its initial sample depth.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 13 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
The following procedure is used for collecting soil samples from direct-push soil cores:
1. The driller will advance and extract the soil sampler liner which will then be given to the field
sampler - confirm with the driller which end is top and which end is bottom. Record the time
of core collection (military time), the soil boring ID and the depth interval in feet bgs in the
field book.
2. Measurement of vertical depth should start from the top of soil; surface asphalt, surficial
concrete slabs, or gravel sub-base should be excluded from the depth measurement unless
otherwise specified in the site-specific work plan. However, the presence and thickness of
these items should be noted in the field book.
3. Measure the length of recovered soil in inches and record in the field book.
4. Continue by following the General Soil Sampling Procedures in Section 2.2.
If a specific depth interval is targeted for sampling, be sure to give consideration to the
percent recovery of soil when selecting the sample interval. For example, if the targeted
sample interval was from 2.0 to 2.5-ft, and the core barrel was advanced from 0 to 4 ft bgs,
and 30 inches (2.5 ft) of soil was recovered, the sample should be collected immediately
below the mid-point of the recovered soil, or 15- inches below the top of the recovered soil
(not including slough). The sample designation will indicate that the depth was 2.0 to 2.5 ft
bgs.
Special Considerations for Direct-push Sampling
• Utility Clearance - Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, especially that completed with a
drill rig, it is important to ensure that all sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried
utilities through the conduct of a utility survey/markout. Locations on private properties
should also be reviewed with the owner prior to installation.
• Liner Use and Material Selection - Direct-push soil samples are collected within a dedicated
new or decontaminated liner to facilitate removal of sample material from the sample barrel.
The liners may only be available in a limited number of materials for a given sample tool,
although overall, liners are available in brass, stainless steel, cellulose acetate butyrate
(CAB), polyethylene terephthalate glycol (PETG), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and Teflon®.
For most investigations, the standard disposable new polymer liner material for a sampling
tool will be acceptable. When the study objectives require very low reporting levels or
unusual contaminants of concern, the use of more inert liner materials such as Teflon® or
stainless steel may be necessary. However, such costly liner materials typically are not
disposable and therefore require decontamination between each use.
• Sample Orientation - When the liners and associated sample are removed from the sample
tubes, it is important to confirm and maintain the proper orientation of the sample. This is
particularly important when multiple sample depths are collected from the same push. It is
also important to maintain proper orientation to define precisely the depth at which an aliquot
was collected. Maintaining proper orientation is typically accomplished using vinyl end caps.
Convention is to place red caps on the top of the liner and black caps on the bottom to
maintain proper sample orientation. Orientation can also be indicated by marking on the
exterior of the liner with a permanent marker.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 14 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Core Catchers - Occasionally the material being sampled lacks cohesiveness and is subject to
crumbling and falling out of the sample liner. In such cases, the use of core catchers on the
leading end of the sampler may help retain the soil until it is retrieved to the surface. Core
catchers may only be available in specific materials and should be evaluated for suitability.
However, given the limited sample contact that core catchers have with the sample material,
most standard core catchers available for a tool system will be acceptable.
• VOC Sample Collection - Observe precautions for VOC sample collection found in
Attachment A and/or the site-specific work plan.
• Decontamination - The cutting shoe and piston rod point are to be decontaminated between
each sample. Within a borehole, the sample barrel, rods, and drive head may be subjected to
an abbreviated cleaning to remove obvious and loose material, but must be cleaned between
boreholes, such as with high-pressure water or steam.
2.2.4 Split-spoon Sampling Methods
All split-spoon samplers, regardless of size, are basically split cylindrical barrels that are threaded
on each end. The leading end is held together with a beveled threaded collar that functions as a
cutting shoe. The other end is held together with a threaded collar that serves as the stub used to
attach the spoon to a string of drill rod.
• Standard Split Spoon
- A drill rig auger is used to advance a borehole to the target depth. The
drill auger string is then removed and a standard split spoon is attached to a string of drill rod.
Split spoons used for soil sampling must be constructed of stainless steel and are typically
2.0- inches OD (1.5-inches inside diameter) and 18- inches to 24- inches in length. Other
diameters and lengths are common and may be used if constructed of the proper material.
After the spoon is attached to the string of drill rod, it is lowered into the borehole. The
safety hammer is then used to drive the split spoon into the soil at the bottom of the borehole.
After the split spoon has been driven into the soil, filling the spoon, it is retrieved to the
surface, where it is removed from the drill rod string and opened for sample acquisition.
Split-spoon soil sampling for geotechnical purposes should be conducted in accordance with
ASTM Method D1586 Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Split-
Barrel Sampling of Soil.
The following procedure is used for collecting soil samples from split-spoon soil cores:
1. Record the blow count per 6-inch interval when advancing split-spoon samplers with the
hollow stem auger rig. Record the hammer weight (e.g., 140 pounds [lb] is standard, but 300
lb may also be used to advance the spoon). Blow counts are an indication of soil density and
are a measure of the number of blows it takes for a 140 lb slide hammer falling over a
distance of 30- inches to penetrate 6- inches of soil. The drillers will keep the count and will
repeat them to the field sampler (e.g., 11, 13, 16 – means the number of blows the hammer
advanced the spoon every 6 inches over a total depth interval of the split-spoon sampler, in
this case over 18 inches). If refusal is encountered, the count is recorded in the book as “# of
hammer blows / depth in inches the spoon is driven” (e.g., 50/3 – means 50 blows of the
hammer advanced the spoon 3 inches).
2. The driller will advance, extract, and open the split spoon, which will then be given to the
field sampler - confirm with the driller which end is top and which end is bottom, if a soil
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 15 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
sampler liner is used and removed from the spoon. Record the time of core collection
(military time), the soil boring ID and the depth interval in feet bgs in the field book.
3. Measurement of vertical depth should start from the top of soil; surface asphalt, surficial
concrete slabs or gravel sub-base should be excluded from the depth measurement unless
otherwise specified in the site-specific work plan. However, the presence and thickness of
these items should be noted in the field book.
4. Measure the length of recovered soil in inches and record in the field book.
5. Continue by following the General Soil Sampling Procedures in Section 2.2.
Special Considerations for Split-spoon Sampling
• Utility Clearance - Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, especially that completed with a
drill rig, it is important to ensure that all sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried
utilities through the conduct of a utility survey/markout. Locations on private properties
should also be reviewed with the owner prior to installation.
• Slough - Generally discard the top several inches of material in the spoon before removing
any portion for sampling. This material normally consists of borehole wall material that has
sloughed off of the borehole wall after removal of the drill string prior to and during insertion
of the split spoon.
• VOC Sample Collection - Observe precautions for VOC sample collection found in
Attachment A and/or the site-specific work plan.
• Decontamination - The split-spoon sampler(s) is to be decontaminated between each sample.
Within a borehole, the split spoon sample barrels must be cleaned between each sample - the
driller typically has multiple barrels and can alternate between clean and dirty barrels so
drilling progress is not affected by decontamination of the barrels. The augers should be
decontaminated between boreholes (such as with high-pressure steam).
2.2.5 Shelby Tube/Thin-walled Sampling Methods
Shelby tubes, also referred to generically as thin-walled push tubes or Acker thin-walled
samplers, are used to collect subsurface soil samples in cohesive soils and clays during drilling
activities. In addition to samples for chemical analyses, Shelby tubes are also used to collect
relatively undisturbed soil samples for geotechnical analyses of physical properties such as shear
strength, grain size distribution, density, hydraulic conductivity and permeability, to support
engineering design, construction, and hydrogeologic characterizations at hazardous waste and
other sites.
A typical Shelby tube is 30 inches in length, has a 3.0-inch OD (2.875-inch inside diameter) and
may be constructed of steel, stainless steel, galvanized steel, or brass. They are typically attached
to push heads constructed with a ball check to aid in holding the sample in the tube during
retrieval. If used for collecting samples for chemical analyses, it must be constructed of stainless
steel. If used for collecting samples for standard geotechnical parameters, any material is
acceptable. To collect a sample, the tube is attached to a string of drill rod and is lowered into the
borehole, where the sampler is then pressed into the undisturbed material by hydraulic force from
the drill rig. Shelby tube or thin-walled soil sampling should be conducted in accordance with
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 16 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ASTM Method D1587 Practice for Thin-walled Tube Sampling of Soils for Geotechnical
Purposes.
After retrieval to the surface, the tube containing the sample is then removed from the sampler
head. If samples for chemical analyses are needed, the soil contained inside the tube is then
removed for sample acquisition by following the direct-push sampling procedures in Section
2.2.3. If the sample is collected for geotechnical parameters, the tube is typically sealed, to
maintain the sample in its relatively undisturbed state, capped, labeled appropriately (including
sample ID, top end of sample, inches of recovery, etc.), and shipped to the appropriate
geotechnical laboratory. The tube is typically stored in an upright position to maintain the
integrity of the undisturbed sample. For geotechnical use, check with the laboratory prior to
sampling to understand sample volume recoveries needed to perform the actual tests.
2.2.6 Sonic Drilling Sampling Methods
Sonic drilling/rotary vibratory drilling employs the use of high-frequency, resonant energy to
advance a core barrel or casing into subsurface formations. Although sonic drilling is not
technically a direct-push method of soil sampling, it is similar because soil sample collection
from cores of recovered unconsolidated soil would follow the same procedures as described for
direct-push methodologies. The soil core is extruded from the core barrel or casing into a plastic
sleeve.
Sonic drilling is different than conventional drilling, as sonic drilling minimizes the friction
between the borehole wall and the drilling tool by maintaining the resonance of the drill string
with a sonic drill head. Typically the drilling method utilizes dual casings that independently
resonate into the subsurface with an inner core barrel that is overrun by an outer casing.
Typically core runs are 10- feet. The core barrel is removed from the borehole and the core is
extruded into a plastic sleeve. The plastic sleeve is placed on dedicated plastic sheeting. The
plastic sleeve is then slit with a razor knife (or similar) vertically along the core run, exposing the
soil inside.
The procedures for collecting soil samples from sonic cores are the same as the procedures
presented for collecting soil samples from direct-push sampling methods in Section 2.2.3.
Special Considerations for Sonic Drilling Sampling
• Utility Clearance - Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, especially that completed with a
drill rig, it is important to ensure that all sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried
utilities through the conduct of a utility survey/markout. Locations on private properties
should also be reviewed with the owner prior to installation.
• Sonic-generated soils are not undisturbed. The resonation of the core barrel during
advancement energizes the skin of the sample immediately adjacent to the barrel,
approximately ⅛ to ¼ inch around the OD of the sample. Heating of the soils is possible.
• Coring is always accomplished without air or fluids. Depending on site conditions, the outer
casing may require adding some water to the borehole if heaving or flowing sands/sand and
gravel are present.
• Resistance is not measured during core barrel advancement, as in split-spoon sampling where
blow counts are measured. To collect conventional split-spoon samples and obtain blow
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 17 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
counts, the sonic drill rigs can be outfitted with automatic hammers to advance split spoons or
thin-walled push tubes, although the advantage of drilling speed with the sonic drilling
technique is diminished.
2.2.7 Excavator Sampling Methods
A backhoe or excavator can be used to assist with soil sampling. This method is typically used
during remedial excavation activities (to collect floor and sidewall samples within the
excavation), test pit installation, or trenching operations. Test pit excavations are commonly
completed to allow for greater observation of physical soil characteristics (e.g., stockpiles) and/or
to further investigate buried suspect areas of concern (e.g., petroleum tanks, drums, waste, fill).
The following procedures are used for collecting soil samples excavated with a backhoe or
excavator:
1. Prior to any excavation, it is important to ensure that all sampling locations are clear of
overhead and buried utilities through the conduct of a utility survey/markout.
2. For test pits or trench excavation, excavate in accordance with the site-specific work plan.
Typically, this will be approximately 3 feet wide and approximately 1 foot deep below the
cleared sampling location with the backhoe. Remedial excavations may be much wider and
deeper. The work plan may also require that excavated soils be placed on plastic sheets or
another impervious surface and protected from rain.
3. Refer to the site-specific work plan for the number of floor and/or sidewall samples, which is
typically driven by the surface area and can vary depending on the governing regulatory
agency.
4. Samples can be collected using a trowel, spoon, or coring device at the desired intervals. A
clean shovel may be used to remove a 1 to 2- inch layer of soil from the vertical face of the
pit that contacted the backhoe bucket and where soil sampling is planned. Scrape the vertical
face at the point of sampling to remove any soil that may have fallen from above and to
expose fresh soil for sampling. In many instances, soil sample locations within the
excavation area are inaccessible (do not physically enter backhoe excavations to collect a
sample). In these cases, soil samples can be collected directly from the backhoe bucket – use
caution not to collect a soil sample from edges that may have come into contact with the
backhoe bucket.
5. If VOC analyses are required, collect the sample in accordance with the procedures in
Attachment A and/or the site-specific work plan. With a dedicated decontaminated spoon, or
equivalent, place the remainder of the sample into a stainless steel, plastic, or other
appropriate homogenization container, and mix thoroughly to obtain a homogenous sample
representative of the entire sampling interval. Then, either place the sample into appropriate,
labeled containers and secure the caps tightly; or, if composite samples are to be collected,
place a sample from another sampling interval into the homogenization container and mix
thoroughly. When compositing is complete, place the sample into appropriate, labeled
containers and secure the caps tightly.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 18 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
6. Abandon the pit or excavation according to applicable state regulations and the site-specific
work plan. Generally, shallow excavations can simply be backfilled with the removed soil
material.
Special Considerations for Excavator Sampling
• Utility Clearance - Prior to any subsurface soil sampling, it is important to ensure that all
sampling locations are clear of overhead and buried utilities through the conduct of a utility
survey/markout. Locations on private properties should also be reviewed with the owner
prior to installation.
• VOC Sample Collection - Observe precautions for VOC sample collection found in
Attachment A and/or the site-specific work plan.
• Do not physically enter backhoe excavations to collect a sample if the excavations are
unstable or not sloped and protected with shoring. A trench with non-cohesive soils (i.e.,
sand, saturated/wet muds, or flowing water at the base) is particularly susceptible to
collapsing suddenly. Never enter a trench without a confined space entry permit, as required
by OSHA regulations.
• Smearing is an important issue when sampling with a backhoe or excavator. Any time a
vertical or near vertical surface is sampled, such as achieved when shovels or similar devices
are used for subsurface sampling, the surface should be dressed (scraped) to remove smeared
soil. This is necessary to minimize the effects of contaminant migration interferences due to
smearing of material from other levels.
• Loose paint, grease and rust should be removed and the backhoe bucket decontaminated prior
to use for sample collection if the bucket will come in direct contact with the material to be
sampled. Care should be taken to collect the soil sample from the center of the excavated
material within the bucket (i.e., material that has not touched the bucket walls).
2.2.8 Stockpile Soil Sampling Methods
Stockpiled soils are typically sampled to characterize the soils for reuse or disposal. The
stockpile sampling strategy used must consider the source of the soil and all available data, field
observations, shape/dimensions and volume of the pile, and sampling frequency requirements
established by oversight regulatory agencies or potential soil disposal facilities.
If the stockpile is known to be a representative mixture of soil with no known or suspected
significant variability of contamination with depth in the pile, the stockpile sampling may be
conducted according to the surface soil sampling method described in Section 2.2.1. However, if
the soil characteristics are not known or are known or suspected to vary with depth in the pile,
both surface soil and deeper subsurface soil samples will be required to properly characterize the
soil pile.
A backhoe or excavator equipped with a bucket can be used to collect subsurface soil samples
from stockpiles. This method is often preferred for collecting subsurface soil samples from a
stockpile, since it allows the sampler greater opportunity to inspect the physical characteristics of
the pile for any potential signs of variability for determining appropriate sample depths and
locations.
Typically, based on the minimum required number of samples for the estimated stockpile volume,
the stockpile is divided into the appropriate number of estimated volumes equal to that sample
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 19 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
number. For example, if the specified sample frequency is 1 sample per 1,000 cubic yards (cy)
and the estimated stockpile size is 4,000 cy, the stockpile would be broken down into
approximately four equal volumes or quadrants. Grab VOC samples and composite non-VOC
samples, as required, would then be collected from each of the areas for characterization of the
stockpile.
2.3 Post-sampling Activities
1. After the samples have been collected, the sampling location may be marked with wooden
stakes colored with highly visible spray paint and/or flagging in order to identify the sample
location for surveying purposes. The sample and/or location identification should be written
on the stake in indelible ink or marking pen. The sample location should be surveyed in the
field with a GPS unit if not surveyed later by some other means. A sketch of the sampling
locations should also be included in the field book.
2. Package the samples with bubble wrap and/or organic absorbent, as necessary.
3. Place the samples into a shipping container and cool to 4ºC. If wet ice is used to cool the
samples, place the ice in double-bags to prevent water from the melting ice from damaging
the samples during shipment.
4. Complete the COC form.
5. Decontaminate non-disposable sampling equipment.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the
materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The collection of specific field quality control (QC) samples will be specified in the project-
specific planning documents and may include one or more of the following: field blank,
equipment blank, trip blank, field duplicate, and matrix spike/matrix spike duplicates.
4.1 Duplicate Soil Sample Collection
The following procedures should be used for collecting duplicate soil samples:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 20 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1. For QC purposes, each duplicate sample will be submitted to the laboratory as a “blind”
duplicate sample, in that a unique sample identification not tied to the primary sample
identification will be assigned to the duplicate (e.g., DUP-01). Standard labeling procedures
used for soil sampling will be employed. However, a sample collection time will not be
included on the sample label or the COC form. The actual source of the duplicate sample
will be recorded in the field book.
2. Each duplicate sample will be collected simultaneously with the actual sample. At the
coincident step in the sampling procedures that the VOC, VPH and/or GRO containers are
filled and sealed, the duplicate sample VOC, VPH and/or GRO containers will also be filled
and sealed. Duplicates for all parameters other than VOCs, VPH and GRO should be filled
from the homogenized sample to ensure consistency between the sample and the duplicate.
Following the order of collection specified for each set of containers (i.e., VOCs, VPH, GRO,
semivolatile organic compounds [SVOCs], other organics and then inorganic compounds),
the duplicate sample containers will be filled simultaneously with each parameter.
3. All collection and preservation procedures outlined for soil sampling will be followed for
each duplicate sample.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Record the general sample collection information such as location, identification, and date/time in
the field book or on a field data sheet. Typical field documentation recorded in a field book
includes the following information:
• Sample identification number
• Sample location (description or sketch of the sample point)
• Sample depth interval
• GPS coordinates and coordinate system
• Time and date sample was collected
• Personnel performing the task
• Visual or sensory description of the sample (e.g., odors, staining)
• Brief soil descriptions (e.g., color, texture, appearance)
• Presence of any fill materials (e.g., concrete, asphalt, ash)
• Readings from field screening equipment (e.g., PID)
• Weather conditions during sampling
• Other pertinent observations including whether photographs were taken
• Sample collection equipment used
• Decontamination procedure
• Analytical parameters
Affix a properly completed label to each sample container.
All sample numbers must be documented on the COC form that accompanies the samples during
shipment. Any deviations from the record management procedures specified in the site-specific
work plan must be approved by the Project Manager and documented in the field book.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 21 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
6.0 REFERENCES
ASTM Methods D1586 Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Split-
Barrel Sampling of Soil, D1587 Practice for Thin-walled Tube Sampling of Soils for
Geotechnical Purposes, ASTM D6169 Standard Guide for Selection of Soil and Rock Sampling
Devices Used With Drill Rigs for Environmental Investigation, ASTM International, Most
Current Version.
MassDEP, Method for the Determination of Volatile Petroleum Hydrocarbons (VPH), May 2004.
U.S, EPA, SW-846 Method 5035A, Closed System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for Volatile
Organics in Soil and Waste Samples, Draft Revision 1, July 2002.
U.S. EPA Environmental Response Team, Soil Sampling SOP #2012, February 18, 2000.
U.S. EPA Science and Ecosystem Support Division, Soil Sampling Operating Procedure
(SESDPROC-300-R2), December 20, 2011.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 SEPTEMBER 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 22 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A:
Procedure for Collection of Samples for VOCs, VPH or
GRO (SW-846 Method 5035A)
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 23 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 SAMPLING FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN SOIL BY EPA METHOD
5035/5035A
The following sampling protocol is recommended for site investigations assessing the extent of
VOCs (including VPH and GRO) in soils at a project site. Because of the large number of
options available, careful coordination between field and laboratory personnel is needed. The
specific sampling containers and sampling tools required will depend upon the required detection
levels and intended data use. Once this information has been established, selection of the
appropriate sampling procedure and preservation method best applicable to the investigation can
be made.
SW-846 Method 5035 provides instructions and options on the preservation of soil samples for
low-level and high-level VOC analyses:
• Low-level (≤ 200 µg/kg) and
• High-level (> 200 µg/kg).
The choice of low-level or high-level analysis is determined by the requirements of the project.
However, since the low-level method is only valid for a certain concentration range, a sample for
analysis by the high-level method must also be collected to ensure quantification of all target
analytes is possible, if needed.
The low-level method uses one or more of the following options for the sampling/preservation of
soils:
• Soil sampled into a vial with a sodium bisulfate (NaHSO4) solution.
• Soil collected in an En-Core® sampler and immediately shipped to the laboratory for
further preservation (within 48 hours).
• Soil collected in a vial with organic-free water, sealed in the field, and shipped to the
laboratory immediately in order to meet the method preservation requirement to freeze
within 48 hours of collection.
Based on project-specific requirements, trip blanks may be recommended. Refer to the site-
specific work plan for quality assurance (QA)/QC requirements.
1.1 Low-level Method (VOCs)
Option A - Direct sampling into En-Core® samplers
• Three 5 gram size En-Core® samplers for each sample.
• One nonpreserved container for moisture determination.
Option B - Direct sampling into vial with chemical preservative
• Two 5 gram size cores are added to volatile organic analysis (VOA) vials (one soil core is
added to each of two VOA vials with sodium bisulfate solution) for each sample using a
Terra Core™ or other coring sampler (e.g., disposable syringe). Once the vials are sealed
in the field, these are not opened again.
• One nonpreserved container for moisture determination.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 24 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Option C - Direct sampling into vial with water (to be frozen at the laboratory)
• Two 5 gram size cores are added to VOA vials (one soil core is added to each of two
VOA vials with water) for each sample using a Terra Core™ or other coring sampler
(e.g., disposable syringe). Once the vials are sealed in the field, these are not opened
again.
• One nonpreserved container for moisture determination.
1.2 High-level Method (VOC, VPH, GRO)
Option D - Direct sampling into En-Core® samplers
• One 5 gram size En-Core® sampler for each sample.
• One nonpreserved container for moisture determination.
Option E - Direct sampling into a methanol-preserved vial
• For VOCs: 5 or 10 grams of soil is added to a VOA vial (with 5 or 10 grams of methanol,
respectively) for each sample using a Terra Core™ or other coring sampler (e.g.,
disposable syringe). This may also depend upon the regulatory agency (e.g., New Jersey
Department of Environmental Protection requires 8 to 12 grams in 25 mL methanol or 5
grams in 10 mL methanol).
• For VPH or GRO: The coring device will be filled with 25 grams of undisturbed soil if
60-ml vials with 25 ml of methanol are used, or 15 grams of undisturbed soil if 40-ml
vials with 15 ml of methanol are used. The goal is to have a 1:1 ratio of soil- to-
methanol.
• One nonpreserved container for moisture determination.
1.3 Cautions and Potential Problems
1.
Potential leaking sample containers for VOC, VPH and GRO analyses:
Options for evaluating containers for leaking preservatives:
a. When ordering pre-preserved sample containers, laboratories should be encouraged to
mark the meniscus of the preservative on all sample containers. The preservative level
should be checked before sampling as a quick check that there has not been any loss of
liquid.
b. Compare preservative level in multiple bottles and select one for comparison purposes to
subsequent sample bottles.
c. Weigh methanol-preserved sample containers prior to sampling. Sample containers
found to have lost greater than 0.2 grams of methanol compared to their initial weight
should not be used. In order to perform this option, initial container weights must be
provided by the laboratory.
2.
Soil may be encountered that absorbs all of the methanol preservative (e.g., organic-rich soil,
fine-grain soil). These soils can absorb the methanol leaving no methanol extract for the
laboratory to analyze. In these instances, the use of additional methanol is required. The
laboratory must be contacted for sample containers with an increased volume of methanol.
Potential methanol absorption:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 25 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Using a 1:2 ratio of soil to methanol will help to ensure that there will be adequate volume of
methanol remaining for analysis. NOTE: Additional methanol should not
3.
be added to the
sample container by the sampler in the field. Containers with additional methanol must
be obtained from the laboratory.
Soil samples with high (>50%) moisture content (e.g., sediments, soil samples below the
water table) may prevent the attainment of the ideal 1:1 soil-to-preservative ratio. In these
instances, depending on the data quality objectives, it may be necessary to evaluate the soil to
determine what level in the disposable syringe corresponds to the required weight (typically 5
grams for VOCs and 15 or 25 grams for VPH). This can be performed by collecting several
trial samples with disposable syringes. Weigh each trial sample and note the length of the
soil in the syringe. These measurements would be used to determine how much soil in the
syringe corresponds to 5 + 0.5 grams (or the desired weight + 0.5). All trial samples should
be discarded and not used for analysis.
Collection of samples with high moisture content:
4.
a. En-Core® samplers, or equivalent, should only be used on fine-grain or cohesive soils
(soils that stay together in the En-Core® sampler and do not fall apart). En-Core®
samplers should not be used to collect soil samples that consist of dry sand, gravel, or a
mixture of gravel and fines, or samples with high moisture (e.g., sediments and soil
samples below the water table). In the case of soil samples that consist of dry sand,
gravel, or a mixture of gravel and fines, or samples with high moisture (e.g., sediments
and soil samples below the water table), a stainless steel spatula or scoop should be
used with field preservation techniques.
En-Core® sampler cautions:
b. The En-Core® sampler is a single-use device and cannot be decontaminated and reused.
c. The volume of material collected in an En-Core® sampler should not cause excessive
stress on the coring tool.
d. The volume of material collected should not be so large that the sample easily falls
apart during extrusion.
e. The En-Core® sampler should not be used if any of the components are damaged as the
seals may be compromised. Under no circumstances should any components be
removed or disturbed.
f. It is important to make sure air is not trapped behind the sample, as this could cause air
to pass through the sample, resulting in a loss of VOCs, or it could cause the sample to
be pushed prematurely from the coring tool.
5.
This method of preservation is not preferred and, therefore, is not outlined below. If it is
used, the following cautions exist:
Potential effervescence with use of sodium bisulfate as a preservative for low-level VOC
analysis of soils:
a. Carbonaceous or strongly alkaline soils may cause potential effervescence when
reacting with the sodium bisulfate and may result in a loss of VOCs and a shattered
vial. If effervescence occurs, sodium bisulfate should not be used. The laboratory
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 26 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
must be contacted and low-level preservation techniques, using water only, should be
followed.
b. Loamy materials or materials containing decayed material may result in false positive
results for acetone due to the interaction with the sodium bisulfate.
c. Some VOCs may be lost due to the resulting acidification when sodium bisulfate is
used (e.g., styrene, 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether, acrylonitrile).
d. Some VOCs may be lost if the laboratory is using a heated purge in combination with
the sodium bisulfate preservative (e.g., methyl tert butyl ether [MTBE] and other fuel
oxygenates).
1.4 Sample Containers and VOC Sampling Equipment
• Method 5035A-compatible containers or kits (for VOCs, VPH and GRO). Preservatives may
be required for some samples with certain variations of SW-846 method 5035A – consult the
governing regulatory agency or principal analytical chemist to determine which preservatives
are necessary.
- Low-level VOCs:
-
two 40-mL VOA vials pre-preserved with 5 mL organic-free water
and also containing a magnetic stir bar.
High-level (or medium-level) VOCs:
-
one 40-mL VOA vial pre-preserved with 5 or
10 mL of purge-and-trap-grade methanol. Volume will be dependent upon
laboratory’s preference or regulatory agency requirements (e.g., New Jersey
Department of Environmental Protection prefers vials with 10 or 25 mL of purge-and-
trap-grade methanol).
VPH and GRO
and
: One 60-mL vial pre-preserved with 25 mL of purge-and-trap-grade
methanol or One 40-mL VOA vial pre-preserved with 15 mL of purge-and-trap-grade
methanol
- One glass container (or other appropriate container) with no preservative to allow the
laboratory to perform the percent solids measurement. NOTE: The laboratory
typically requires a minimum of 20 grams to perform this test. Therefore, submitting
a sample size less than 4 ounces may be acceptable. This additional container will not
be required if the sample is also being submitted for other non-VOC parameters.
• En-Core® samplers, or equivalent, for VOC, VPH and/or GRO analysis:
- High-level VOC or GRO analysis: one 5-gram En-Core® sampler.
- Low-level VOC analysis: two 5-gram En-Core® samplers.
- VPH, GRO or toxicity characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP) VOC analysis: one
25-gram En-Core® sampler.
• Disposable plastic syringes or Terra Core™ samplers.
• Foam VOC vial holders.
• Portable digital scale (accurate to ± 0.01 grams) with calibration weights.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 27 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.0 COLLECTION OF SAMPLES USING EN-CORE
®
SAMPLERS, OR EQUIVALENT
• The sample will be collected using an En-Core® sampler, or equivalent, as soon as possible
after the soil has been exposed to the atmosphere.
• Check that the En-Core® sampler, or equivalent, is full using both of the following
procedures:
a. Be sure that the back o-ring on the plunger can be seen when looking through the
viewing hole on the handle. This will mean that the soil has pushed the plunger fully
to the back.
b. The plunger can only be rotated when it is fully pushed to the back of the body.
Therefore, it is important to twist the plunger to guarantee that the soil has filled the
sampler and the back o-rings have sealed.
• Immediately seal the En-Core® sampler, or equivalent. Be sure to twist the cap as it is pushed
on. The cap is properly sealed when the two locking arms are completely and symmetrically
over the body ridge.
• The samples must be shipped to a laboratory within 24 hours of sampling to ensure the
48-hour hold time for preservation will be met.
• In the event that a field screening technique (instrument reading or visual staining of the soil)
indicates the possible presence of VOCs or hydrocarbons, note the observations or instrument
readings in the field book. If the field screening technique does not indicate the presence of
VOCs, this should also be noted.
• If samples are collected for only VOC and VPH analyses, a separate aliquot must be collected
in an unpreserved container in order for the laboratory to perform a dry weight determination.
3.0 COLLECTION OF SAMPLES USING FIELD PRESERVATION
• Samples for VOCs will be collected as soon as possible after the soil has been exposed to the
atmosphere.
• Samples for VOCs will be collected first (prior to collection of samples for other parameters)
using an open-barrel disposable syringe, Terra Core™ sampler, or equivalent. In the case of
soil samples that consist of dry sand, gravel, or a mixture of gravel and fines, or samples with
high moisture (e.g., sediments and soil samples below the water table), an open-barrel
disposable syringe may not be practical; a stainless steel spatula or scoop can be used with
field preservation techniques.
• Soil samples for VOC analyses should never be homogenized.
• Each pre-preserved sample container will be weighed prior to sample collection, and the
container/preservative weight will be recorded. This procedure will generally be performed
by the laboratory prior to shipping the containers to the field.
• Depending upon project requirements, samples for VOC analysis will be collected as low-
level, high-level, or both.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 28 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
A.
1. The syringe will be filled with undisturbed soil of the following volume: 5 grams of soil.
Low-level VOCs
As an option to the syringes, 5-gram Terra Core™ samplers, or equivalent, can be used.
The goal is to have a 1:1 ratio of soil- to- preservative.
2. The soil will be extruded into a pre-preserved VOA vial containing a magnetic stir bar
and 5 mL organic-free water. This will be done in replicate.
3. Any sand grains present on the container rim or cap must be removed to ensure an air-
tight seal of the vial. The VOA vial will be capped quickly and labeled with the sample
ID, date, and time of collection. Labels should not be written on the cap of the vial.
4. Gently swirl sample to break up the soil aggregate, if necessary, until the soil is covered
with preservative. It is imperative that the soil sample be completely immersed in the
preservative solution.
5. In the event that a field screening technique (instrument reading or visual staining of the
soil) indicates the possible presence of VOCs or hydrocarbons, note the observations or
instrument readings in the field book. If the field screening technique does not indicate
the presence of VOCs, this should also be noted.
6. If samples are collected for only VOC analysis, a separate aliquot must be collected in an
unpreserved container in order for the laboratory to perform a dry weight determination.
B.
1. High-level VOCs: The syringe will be filled with undisturbed soil of the following
volume: 5 or 10 grams of soil for high-level analysis (added to the 5 or 10 ml of
methanol, respectively). This may also depend upon the regulatory agency (e.g., New
Jersey Department of Environmental Protection requires 8 to 12 grams in 25 mL
methanol or 5 grams in 10 mL methanol).
High-level VOCs, VPH, or GRO
VPH or GRO: The syringe will be filled with 25 grams of undisturbed soil if 60-ml vials
with 25 ml of methanol are used, or 15 grams of undisturbed soil if 40-ml vials with 15
ml of methanol are used. The goal is to have a 1:1 ratio of soil- to- methanol.
As an option to the syringes, 5-gram Terra Core™ samplers, or equivalent, can be used.
Typically, the goal is to have a 1:1 ratio of soil- to- preservative.
2. The sample will be extruded into a VOA vial containing purge-and-trap grade methanol
3. Any sand grains present on the container rim or cap must be removed to ensure an air-
tight seal of the vial. The VOA vial will be capped quickly and labeled with the sample
ID, date, and time of collection. Labels should not be written on the cap of the vial.
4. Gently swirl sample to break up the soil aggregate, if necessary, until the soil is covered
with preservative. It is imperative that the soil sample be completely immersed in the
preservative solution.
5. In the event that a field screening technique (instrument reading or visual staining of the
soil) indicates the possible presence of VOCs or hydrocarbons, note the observations or
instrument readings in the field book. If the field screening technique does not indicate
the presence of VOCs, this should also be noted.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 29 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
6. Methanol is considered to be a hazardous material by the US Department of
Transportation (DOT) and the International Air Transportation Association (IATA).
Shipments containing methanol between the field and the laboratory must conform to the
rules established in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations (49 CFR parts 171 to
179) and the most current edition of the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations. The
volumes of methanol recommended in the VOC method fall under the small quantity
exemption of 49 CFR section 173.4. Refer to Attachment B for further details.
7. If samples are collected for only VOC analysis, a separate aliquot must be collected in an
unpreserved container in order for the laboratory to perform a dry weight determination.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 30 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment B:
Shipping Methanol-preserved Samples
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 31 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Shipping of Hazardous Materials
Methanol is considered a hazardous material by the US Department of Transportation (DOT) and the International
Air Transport Association (IATA). Shipments of methanol between the field and the laboratory must conform to
the rules established in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations (49 CFR parts 171 to 179) and the most current
edition of the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations. Consult these documents or your shipping company for
complete details.
Small Quantity Exemption
The volumes of methanol recommended in the high-level VOC, VPH and GRO methods fall under the small
quantity exemption of 49 CFR section 173.4. To qualify for this exemption, all of the following conditions must be
met:
◊ the maximum volume of methanol in each sample container must not exceed 30 mL
◊ the sample container must not be full of methanol
◊ the sample container must be securely packed and cushioned in an upright position and be surrounded by a
sorbent material capable of absorbing spills from leaks or breakage of sample containers
◊ the package weight must not exceed 64 pounds
◊ the volume of methanol per shipping container must not exceed 500 mL
◊ the packaging and shipping container must be strong enough to hold up to the intended use
◊ the package must not be opened or altered while in transit
◊ the shipper must mark the shipping container as follows:
“This package conforms to 49 CFR 173.4”
When shipping domestically by Federal Express via ground or air, the following rules apply:
◊ follow the inner packaging requirements of 49 CFR 173.4
◊ no labels, placards, up arrows, or dangerous goods shipping papers are required
◊ if the Federal Express airbill has a shipper’s declaration for hazardous goods on it, check the Yes box under
Shipper’s Declaration not Required
When shipping internationally by Federal Express, the following rules apply:
◊ follow the inner packaging requirements of 49 CFR 173.4
◊ use dangerous goods shipping papers
◊ apply orientation arrows on opposite vertical sides on the exterior of the package
Shipping Papers for International Shipments
International shipments must be accompanied by dangerous goods shipping papers that include the following:
Proper Shipping Name: Methyl Alcohol
Hazardous Class: Flammable Liquid
Identification Number: UN1230
Total Quantity: (mL methanol/container x the number of containers)
Emergency Response Info: Methanol MSDS attached
Emergency Response Phone: 1-800-424-9300
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 32 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment C:
SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 33 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 34 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 35 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Soil Sampling Page 36 of 36
Procedure No: RMD 003 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 2 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope and Applicability ........................................................................ 3
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 4
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 5
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 5
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 7
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 7
2.1 Calibration and Operational Checks ..................................................... 8
2.1.1 Operational Check of Water Level Meters .................................... 8
2.1.2 Calibration of Water Level Meters ................................................. 8
2.1.3 Calibration and Operational Check of Oil/Water Interface Meters . 8
2.2 Procedures for Measuring Depth to Water When Separate-phase
Product is Not Suspected ..................................................................... 9
2.3 Procedure for Measuring Depth to Water and Product Levels When
Separate-phase Product is Suspected ............................................... 10
2.4 Procedure for Measuring Total Well Depth ......................................... 11
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 12
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 12
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 12
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 13
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 13
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Example Water and Product Level Monitoring Form
Attachment B Example Field Book Documentation for Water Levels
Attachment C SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 3 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the methods
for conducting water level, separate-phase product, and/or total well depth measurements in
monitoring wells, piezometers, and boreholes during field investigations.
1.2 Summary of Method
Depth-to-water (DTW) measurements are used to evaluate pressure and/or elevation changes
within the aquifer. The procedure involves using a water level indicator capable of an accuracy
of ±0.01 feet, or a similar piece of equipment, to measure the DTW in a monitoring well,
piezometer, or borehole from a set reference point. When used in conjunction with an accurate
site elevation survey, DTW data can be converted to potentiometric surface elevations to support
groundwater flow direction analysis, as well as other aquifer characteristics. In addition, pressure
changes recorded in a well during a slug, pumping, or packer test can be used to determine
aquifer characteristics, such as hydraulic conductivity and storage parameters.
It is also a good practice to gauge the total depth of a monitoring well while taking water levels.
This practice can help confirm: 1) the correct well in a cluster of wells screened at different
depths; 2) that the well is clear of obstructions; 3) whether the well may be silting up and need
further development; and 4) the correct purge volume for a well when sampling. Total depth
measurements in a well may be necessary when TRC is taking over project work at a site with
existing monitoring wells or the site wells have not been accessed for a significant amount of
time.
The objective of separate-phase product measurements is to obtain measurements of the thickness
of separate-phase product in the water column. The thickness of both dense non-aqueous phase
liquid (DNAPL) and light non-aqueous phase liquid (LNAPL) can be determined using an
oil/water interface probe. It should be noted that the thickness of LNAPL or DNAPL in a well
(“apparent thickness”) most likely differs from the thickness in the formation (“actual
thickness”).
• For LNAPL, the procedure involves measuring the depth to the separate-phase product
and the depth to the underlying groundwater from a set reference point. The difference
between these two measurements is the thickness of the LNAPL in the well.
• For DNAPL, the procedure involves measuring the depth to the separate-phase product
and the depth to the bottom of the well, borehole, etc. The difference between these two
measurements is the thickness of the DNAPL in the well.
1.3 Equipment
The following list of equipment may be utilized when conducting water level and separate-phase
product measurements. Site-specific conditions may warrant the use of additional items or
deletion of items from this list.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 4 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Appropriate level of personal protection
• Electronic water level indicator
• Oil/water interface probe
• Extra batteries for water level/interface probe
• Field book and monitoring form
• Well keys
• Socket-wrench
• Containers to hold water and isopropanol for calibration
• Tap water
• Isopropanol
• Previous measurement data (if available)
• Precision ruler or measuring tape
• Permanent marker (e.g., Sharpie®)
• Decontamination supplies
1.4 Definitions
Borehole A hole drilled into the soil or bedrock using a drill rig or similar
equipment.
Dense Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (DNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is denser than water and, therefore,
sinks to the bottom of the water column.
Depth To Water (DTW) The distance to the groundwater surface from an established
measuring point.
Light Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (LNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is less dense than water and, therefore,
floats on the surface of the water.
Monitoring Well A well made from a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, or other
appropriate material, with slotted screen installed across or within a
saturated zone. A monitoring well is typically constructed with a
PVC or stainless steel pipe in unconsolidated deposits and with steel
casing in bedrock.
Non-aqueous Phase
Liquid (NAPL)
Petroleum or other fluid that is immiscible in water and tends to
remain as a separate liquid in the subsurface.
Piezometer A well made from PVC or metal with a slotted screen installed
across or within a saturated zone. Piezometers are primarily
installed to monitor changes in the potentiometric surface elevation.
Potentiometric Surface A surface representing the hydraulic head of groundwater.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 5 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Separate-phase Product A liquid that does not easily dissolve in water. Separate-phase
product can be more dense (i.e., DNAPL) or less dense (i.e.,
LNAPL) than water and, therefore, can be found at different depths
in the water column.
Low-permeability
Formation
A geologic formation that has very slow recharge and discharge
rates due to small pore spaces in the formation material. A clay
formation is considered to have low permeability and has a very
slow recharge rate compared to a more permeable formation, such
as sand or gravel.
Total Depth of Well Distance from the measuring point to the bottom of the well.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific health and safety plan (HASP). TRC personnel will use the appropriate
level of personal protective equipment (PPE) as defined in the HASP.
When present, special care should be taken to avoid contact with LNAPL or DNAPL. The use of
an air monitoring program, as well as the proper PPE designated by the site-specific HASP, can
identify and/or mitigate potential health hazards.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
• DTW measurements of all wells in a water level survey should be collected within the
shortest amount of time possible but, at a minimum, within a 24-hour period to ensure near
contemporaneous data collection during a groundwater elevation recording event. However,
note that certain conditions may produce relatively rapid changes in groundwater elevations,
which might necessitate collecting readings over a shorter time period. Such conditions
should be noted in the field book. Rapid groundwater elevation changes may occur due to:
- Rapid changes in atmospheric pressure
- Variable pumping of nearby wells
- Precipitation events
- Tidal influences
- Rapid changes in nearby surface water levels (e.g., dam release, upstream
thunderstorm)
• Allow water levels in newly installed wells to stabilize for approximately 24 hours before
taking measurements for the purpose of a water level survey. Recovery might take longer in
wells installed in low permeability formations.
• Because the tops of monitoring wells and piezometers are often cut unevenly, be sure to take
DTW measurements from a pre-marked or notched spot on the well to ensure consistent data
collection over time. Since land survey vertical elevation measurements are generally taken
from the highest point on the well casing (i.e., where survey rod rests), this point should also
be marked and used for water level measurements. If the tops of the monitoring wells and
piezometers are not marked, the DTW measurement should be taken from the north side of
the riser and the location marked on the casing top edge.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 6 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• To limit the possibility of cross contamination, DTW measurements should be collected in
order from the least to the most contaminated wells and piezometers when contamination is
known or suspected. Be sure to decontaminate the entire length of the submerged tape
between well measurements to reduce the potential for cross contamination. Some wells with
NAPL or excessive condensation may have residues on the side of the riser that may also
contaminate the tape.
• If the presence of NAPL is suspected at a site, an oil/water interface probe should be used to
conduct water level measurements. When DNAPL is a suspected contaminant characteristic
at a site, the interface probe should be lowered to the bottom of the well until DNAPL is
encountered, if present.
• NAPL may foul the probe and could cause a delayed response when going from NAPL to
water. Resolution may require taking repeated measurements by raising and/or lowering the
probe through the interface.
• Most water level meters have a “sensitivity” setting, which is often located on the on/off dial.
The sensitivity setting may need adjustment depending on the site water chemistry.
• Excessive condensation on the inside well materials may cause the tape to stick on the well
casing and/or cause a false reading above the water level. This is especially true of deeper
wells. Previous elevation data should be consulted to determine if a reading is consistent and
plausible for that well. The above mentioned sensitivity adjustment can be used to
compensate. In some cases, the line may have to be weighted to remedy the line sticking to
the casing.
• Tight well caps and low permeability formations may not have allowed the potentiometric
surface to equilibrate in the well after seasonal, tidal or other area groundwater level
fluctuations. If this is the case, allow the wells to equilibrate before collecting measurements
by taking readings several minutes after removing the well plug; in addition, re-measure the
first well after the last well to verify that the water level is not fluctuating. Another round of
water levels may need to be collected if a significant discrepancy from the first set of
measurements is observed; this should be discussed with the Project Manager. If this is a
concern, vented well caps or plugs may need to be used.
• In some instances, artesian well conditions may exist, where the potentiometric surface is
higher in elevation than the top of the well casing (TOC). In these situations, it is pertinent to
note the water level elevation as above the TOC or add a known length of riser pipe in order
to measure an actual elevation. Once the water level has equilibrated in the riser pipe, the
same procedures can be followed for measuring water level when separate-phase product is
not suspected. Note that when converting the DTW measurement to an elevation, the riser
pipe length needs to be added to the surveyed TOC.
• Groundwater gradients at some sites can be very shallow and if gradient and groundwater
flow pattern (gradient direction) determination are part of the project objectives, it is critical
that groundwater level measurements obtained from wells are as accurate as possible.
Special care should be taken to allow the water level to equilibrate after removing sealing
caps, and the same water level indicator should be used for all measurements if possible. All
wells should be measured within the minimum possible time. This is particularly important
in areas with potential tidal influences.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 7 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• If more than one measuring device must be used for multiple wells across an area with a
shallow groundwater gradient, the “zero calibration check” (see Section 2.1.1) becomes
especially important.
• If the monitoring well or piezometer is secured with an air- and water-tight lockable cap,
caution should be taken when removing the cap due to the possible buildup of pressure in the
well casing. Try to ease the cap off and relieve the pressure slowly in order to prevent injury.
Do not stand or lean over top of well when releasing cap.
• Flush-mounted wells may be subject to water collection in the well can around the top of the
riser pipe. In such instances, sufficient water should be evacuated from the well can prior to
removing the well cap to ensure that ambient water does not enter the riser. The condition
should be documented and the potential need for repair discussed with the Project Manager.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Workers
(HAZWOPER)
- 8-hour annual refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
To be useful for establishing groundwater gradient, the reference point should be tied with a
known vertical datum, such as the National Geodetic Vertical Datum (NGVD), or a local datum
(e.g., site-specific arbitrary datum).
Water levels should be allowed to equilibrate prior to measurement after removing sealing well
caps. There are no set guidelines, and appropriate equilibration times can range from minutes to
hours depending on well recharge, local geology, and project objectives.
If available, prior site water and product level measurement data should be reviewed and
available to field personnel during the collection of new data for direct comparison to aid in
identifying and resolving potential measurement errors while in the field.
When measuring well depths with an electronic water level indicator, measure and add the length
of the probe beneath the circuit closing electrodes to the depth measured to obtain the true depth.
The following procedures must be followed during the collection of water level and product
measurements. Procedures may vary depending on the equipment used and contaminants present
at the site.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 8 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.1 Calibration and Operational Checks
Refer to the project’s Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP) for calibration frequency and any
site-specific calibration procedures for water and separate-phase product level meters.
Calibration of the meters is optional; the need for calibration and the frequency of calibration will
be dependent upon the meter used and project-specific data quality objectives. Operational
checks of meters will be performed prior to use in the field at the start of each day and several
times throughout the day, as appropriate.
2.1.1 Operational Check of Water Level Meters
1. Push the Start or Test button (typically provided) on the meter to test the battery and circuitry
on the water level indicator. The meter audible indicator should sound and test light
illuminate (if equipped).
2. Release the start/test button and lower the water level probe into a container filled with tap
water until the meter audible indicator sounds or visual indicator light turns on. During this
check, set sensitivity adjustment (if provided) to highest setting, then decrease if necessary
(e.g., saline water).
Inspect the measuring tape and water level probe connection for any signs of visible damage (e.g.,
cuts, kinks, separating splices). If the tape appears damaged at the connection to the probe, while
the meter is sounding, perform the procedure in Section 2.1.2.
2.1.2 Calibration of Water Level Meters
1. While the meter is sounding from the procedure used in Section 2.1.1, use a ruler or
measuring tape to measure the distance between the water surface and the 1-foot increment
mark on the water level tape.
2. Check that the 1-foot increment is actually 1 foot from the water surface. Note any
discrepancy in the field book and discuss with the Project Manager. If necessary, repair
and/or replace the water level meter.
2.1.3 Calibration and Operational Check of Oil/Water Interface Meters
1. Oil/water interface meters will have one distinguishing sound and/or colored light to
represent detection of water and a separate distinguishing sound to represent detection of
separate-phase product. Read the instrument manufacturer’s operations manual to determine
the instrument’s audible sound or light differentiation for water and separate-phase product
(e.g., continuous beep for product and intermittent beep for water).
2. Push the Start or Test button (typically provided) on the meter to test the battery and circuitry
on the water level indicator. The meter audible indicator should sound and test light
illuminate (if equipped).
3. Water Level Sensor Operational and Calibration Checks
a. Lower the water level probe into a container filled with tap water until the appropriate
sound for water is heard as determined in Step 1.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 9 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
b. While the meter is sounding, use a ruler or measuring tape to measure the distance
between the water surface and the 1-foot increment mark on the water level tape.
c. Check that the 1-foot increment is actually 1 foot from the water surface. Note any
discrepancy in the field book and discuss with the Project Manager.
4. Oil Level Sensor Operational and Calibration Checks
a. If the operation or calibration of the oil level probe is suspected to be faulty, consult with
the meter manufacturer for additional troubleshooting.
2.2 Procedures for Measuring Depth to Water When Separate-phase Product is
Not Suspected
If possible, and when applicable, start at wells that are least contaminated and proceed to those
wells that are most contaminated. Additionally, allow sufficient time for each monitoring well or
piezometer to equilibrate after removing the protective cap prior to taking readings.
1. Record the condition of the well (e.g., protective casing, concrete collar, lock in place, etc.),
equipment being used, and the current weather conditions in the field book or on the water
level monitoring form or well inspection report.
2. Use HASP-specified gloves. Stand upwind of the well and remove the well lid. Unlock and
remove the well cap slowly to relieve pressure build up that may have occurred in the well
casing. Follow HASP requirements for well head and breathing zone air monitoring.
3. Identify the previous measuring point marking or notch on the riser or casing (if present). If
no previous measuring point exists, use a permanent marker to mark a location on the rim of
the riser or casing (typically the highest point). Record this location in the field book or on
the water level monitoring form (e.g., top of riser or top of casing).
4. Using a previously decontaminated water level meter, turn on the meter, check the
audible/visual indicator (push the “Test” button), reel the electronic probe into the well riser
(with the increments visible) slowly until the meter sounds.
5. Grasp the tape with hand, withdraw the tape, and lower it again slowly until the sound is
again audible. Check the DTW on the tape and make a mental note of the depth to within
0.01 feet.
6. Lower the probe again slowly and repeat the measurement for precision. In the field book or
on the water level monitoring form, record the DTW from the measuring point noted in
Step #3 to the nearest 0.01 feet. If measuring the total depth of the well, proceed to Section
2.4).
7. Decontaminate the probe and the entire length of the submerged tape in accordance with the
manufacturer specifications.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 10 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.3 Procedure for Measuring Depth to Water and Product Levels When
Separate-phase Product is Suspected
If possible, and when applicable, start at wells that are least contaminated and proceed to those
wells that are most contaminated. Additionally, allow sufficient time for each monitoring well or
piezometer to equilibrate after removing the protective cap prior to taking readings.
1. Record the condition of the well (e.g., protective casing, concrete collar, lock in place, etc.),
equipment being used, and the current weather conditions in the field book, water level
monitoring form, or well inspection report.
2. Use HASP-specified gloves. Stand upwind of the well and remove the well lid. Unlock and
remove the well cap slowly to relieve pressure build up that may have occurred in the well
casing. Follow HASP requirements for well head and breathing zone air monitoring.
3. Identify the previous measuring point marking or notch on the riser or casing (if present). If
no previous measuring point exists, use a permanent marker to mark a location on the rim of
the riser or casing (typically the highest point). Record this location in the field book or on
the water level monitoring form (e.g., top of riser or top of casing).
4. Using a previously decontaminated oil/water interface probe, turn on the meter, check the
audible indicator, and slowly reel the electronic probe into the well riser (with the
increments visible) until the appropriate sound for water or separate-phase product is heard
as determined in Section 2.1.3.
5. If water is encountered first (as determined by the audible sound on the meter, which
represents water), follow steps 5 and 6 from Section 2.2. In the field book or on the water
level monitoring form, record the DTW from the measuring point noted in Step 3 to the
nearest 0.01 feet.
6. If water is encountered first and DNAPL is suspected, continue lowering the probe until
product is encountered (as determined by the audible sound on the meter, which represents
product). In the field book or on the water level monitoring form, record the depth to
product from the measuring point noted in Step #3.
7. Calculate the thickness of the DNAPL in the well using the following equation:
(Total depth of well) - (Depth to product) = DNAPL thickness
8. If LNAPL is encountered before water, record the depth to product from the measuring
point noted in Step #3 in the field book and continue lowering the probe until water is
encountered.
NOTE: For LNAPL, it is necessary to take both the air/product interface measurement on
the way down into the product and the water/product interface measurement on the way
back up. This is required when passing through product into water, since some product may
adhere to the probe sensors due to surface tension and, as a result, a greater product
thickness measurement may be erroneously obtained. Therefore, when LNAPL is detected,
the probe should be lightly shaken or raised and lowered rapidly in a short vertical motion
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 11 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
while the probe is within the water column to remove any product that may have been
carried down with the probe. After passing through the product, the water/product interface
should then be measured as the probe is raised very slowly back up from the underlying
water into the product. Once the interface is detected, the probe can be raised and lowered
in small increments to precisely determine the interface and obtain accurate measurements.
Repeat these measurements as needed to confirm water/product interfaces and product
thickness on multiple measurements.
9. In the field book or on the water level monitoring form, record the DTW from the
measuring point noted in Step #3. If measuring the total depth of the well, proceed to
Section 2.4.
10. Calculate the thickness of the LNAPL in the well using the following equation:
(DTW) - (Depth to product) = LNAPL thickness
11. Decontaminate the probe and the entire length of the submerged tape in accordance with the
manufacturer specifications.
2.4 Procedure for Measuring Total Well Depth
When measuring the total depth of a well, the water level and separate-phase product level, if
present, should be determined first (see Section 2.2 or 2.3). It is recommended that the tone
function of the instrument remain engaged during the total depth measurement.
1. After the water level and product level, if present, have been determined, continue reeling
the electronic probe into the well riser (with the increments visible) until the probe
encounters resistance. Resistance may be inferred when the probe appears to stop
descending and the tape slackens against the side of the riser.
2. Determine whether the observed resistance likely represents the total depth of the well by
raising and then lowering the probe to the level of the previously encountered resistance
several times at different positions in the well. Then compare the observed level of
resistance to available information about the total depth of the well, such as well log data or
previous total depth measurements.
3. Measure the total depth of the well by: 1) noting the depth (to the nearest 0.01 feet) at which
the probe first touches bottom before the tape begins to slacken; 2) adding the measured
length from the bottom of the probe to the fluid level sensor in the probe; and 3) recording
the combined lengths as the total depth.
4. In the field book or on the water level monitoring form, record the total depth of the well
from the measuring point.
5. Also, note any observations about the conditions encountered in the well during the total
depth measurement. A clear and distinct bottom reading would indicate little or no
sediment in the bottom of the well. A soft and indistinct probe landing would indicate the
presence of silt or sediment in the bottom of the well. A total depth measurement
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 12 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
inconsistent with the well log or previous total depth measurements may indicate an
obstruction in the well or significant sedimentation at the bottom of the well.
6. Decontaminate the probe and the portion of the tape inserted in the riser in accordance with
the manufacturer specifications.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the
materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The following Quality Assurance/Quality Control procedures apply:
• Operate field instruments according to the manufacturers’ manuals.
• Calibrate field instruments at the proper frequency.
• Check the DTW at least two times in order to compare results. If results do not agree to
within 0.02 feet, take a third measurement. If results still do not agree, check for possible
equipment failure or review the cautions and potential problems listed in Section 1.6. Repeat
the measurement when the cause of the precision nonconformance has been discovered and
corrected.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
• Record water and separate-phase product level measurements on field forms or in a field
book. See Attachment A for an example of a Water and Product Level Monitoring Form and
Attachment B for an example of field book documentation.
• The following additional information may be recorded in the field book:
- Well/piezometer or monitoring point identification number
- Well/piezometer or monitoring point location (sketch of the sample point or
reference to a location figure)
- Visual or sensory description (e.g., odors, product, etc.)
- Time and date measurements were taken
- Personnel performing the task
- Weather conditions during task
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 13 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
- Other pertinent observations
- Measurement equipment used
- Calibration procedures used
- Decontamination procedures used
- Fixed measuring point used for DTW measurements
6.0 REFERENCES
Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
U.S. EPA Environmental Response Team, Standard Operating Procedures, Manual Water Level
Measurements, SOP 2043. February 11, 2000.
U.S. EPA Region 4. Science and Ecosystem Support Division (SESD) Operating Procedure,
Groundwater Level and Well Depth Measurement, SESDPROC-105-R2. January 29, 2013.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 MAY 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 14 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT A
EXAMPLE WATER AND PRODUCT LEVEL MONITORING FORM
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 15 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 16 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT B
EXAMPLE FIELD BOOK DOCUMENTATION FOR WATER LEVELS
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 17 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 18 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT C
SOP FACT SHEET
WATER LEVEL AND PRODUCT MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
Water Level and Product Measurements Page 19 of 19
Procedure No: RMD 004 Revision: 0 Effective: 5/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVE
The following water level and product measurement procedures have been developed to direct TRC personnel in the methods of
collecting water levels and product measurements in the field. Other state or federal requirements may be above and beyond the
scope of this SOP and should be followed, if applicable. Depth-to-water (DTW) measurements are used to evaluate pressure
and/or elevation changes within the aquifer. The objective of separate-phase product measurements is to obtain measurements of
the thickness of separate-phase product in the water column. Both of these measurements are very important as they drive
remediation decisions.
WHAT TO USE
• Water level meter
• Oil/Water interface probe
• Extra batteries
• Well keys
• Socket set
• Decontamination supplies
• Field book
• Indelible/waterproof ink
ON-SI T E WELL GAUGING
• Prior to well gauging, site water level measurement data should be reviewed for direct comparison to aid in identifying and
resolving potential measurement errors while in the field.
• Conduct an operational check of the water level meter by pushing the Start or Test button on the meter to test the battery and
circuitry on the water level indicator. The meter audible indicator should sound and test light illuminate.
• If possible and when applicable, start at wells that are least contaminated and proceed to those wells that are most
contaminated.
• Prior to collecting a water level, record the condition of the well (e.g., protective casing, concrete collar, lock in place, etc.).
• Stand upwind of the well and remove the well lid. Unlock and remove the well cap slowly to relieve pressure buildup that
may have occurred in the well casing. Allow the well time to equilibrate.
• Identify the previous measuring point marking or notch on the riser or casing (if present). If no previous measuring point
exists, use a permanent marker to mark a location on the rim of the riser or casing (typically the highest point). Record this
location in the field book.
• Grasp the tape with hand, withdraw the tape, and lower it slowly until the sound is audible. Check the DTW on the tape and
make a mental note of the depth to within 0.01 feet. Lower the probe again slowly and repeat the measurement for precision.
• If total depth measurements were not recorded recently, advance the tape to the bottom of the well to record a total depth.
• Decontaminate the probe and tape between each well.
ON-SI T E PRODUCT MONITORING
• Prior to product gauging, product measurement data should be reviewed for direct comparison to aid in identifying and
resolving potential measurement errors while in the field.
• Using a previously decontaminated oil/water interface probe, turn on the meter, check the audible indicator, and slowly reel
the electronic probe into the well riser (with the increments visible) until the appropriate sound for water or separate-phase
product is heard (intermittent tone for water; steady tone for product).
• If water is encountered first (as determined by the audible sound on the meter, which represents water), record the DTW from
the measuring point to the nearest 0.01 feet.
• If water is encountered first and dense non-aqueous phase liquid (DNAPL) is suspected, continue lowering the probe until
product is encountered (as determined by the audible sound on the meter, which represents product). In the field book or on
the water level monitoring form, record the depth to product from the measuring point. If light non-aqueous phase liquid
(LNAPL) is encountered before water, record the depth to product from the measuring point and continue lowering the probe
until water is encountered and record the depth to water.
• Decontaminate the probe and tape between each well.
WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for investigation-derived waste disposal
with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place prior to performing the field
work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot
be returned to the site, consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the client,
testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the materials by appropriately licensed
vendors.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 2 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 4
1.1 Scope and Applicability ........................................................................ 4
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 4
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 4
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 5
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 5
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 5
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 5
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 5
2.1 Modified Burmister Soil Classification System ...................................... 6
2.2 USCS Soil Classification System.......................................................... 7
2.2.1 Group Name (Group Symbol) ....................................................... 7
2.3 Soil Identification Based on Grain Size ................................................. 8
2.3.1 Grain-Size Scales ......................................................................... 8
2.3.2 Proportions .................................................................................... 9
2.4 Color ..................................................................................................... 9
2.5 Relative Density ................................................................................. 10
2.5.1 Soil Samples Collected with Split Spoons ................................... 10
2.5.2 Test Pit Samples ......................................................................... 11
2.5.3 Soil Samples Collected Via Direct Push Technology .................. 11
2.5.4 Pocket Penetrometer .................................................................. 11
2.6 Moisture Content ................................................................................ 12
2.7 Geologic Modifiers or Classifications .................................................. 12
2.7.1 Stratification ................................................................................ 12
2.7.2 Lamination or Varves .................................................................. 12
2.7.3 Sorting ........................................................................................ 12
2.7.4 Grading ....................................................................................... 13
2.7.5 Angularity or Rounding ............................................................... 13
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 3 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.7.6 Shape ......................................................................................... 13
2.7.7 Odor ............................................................................................ 13
2.7.8 Cementation ................................................................................ 13
2.7.9 Hydrochloric Acid Reaction (HCl) ................................................ 14
2.8 Fine Grained Soils .............................................................................. 14
2.8.1 Dilatancy ..................................................................................... 14
2.8.2 Toughness and Plasticity ............................................................ 14
2.8.3 Identification of Fine Grained Soils ............................................. 15
2.8.4 Identification of Organic Soils...................................................... 15
2.9 Fill Soils .............................................................................................. 16
2.10 Geologic Origin ................................................................................... 16
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 16
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 17
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 17
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 17
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 17
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Field Forms
Attachment B USCS Field Reference Sheets
Attachment C SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 4 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the method
for identifying and describing soil samples in soil borings, test pits, and soil grab samples. The
SOP was prepared in general conformance with American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) Standard D2488, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-
Manual Procedure) and other pertinent technical publications.
1.2 Summary of Method
The objective of this method is to standardize the collection and documentation of information on
soil that is useful for the purpose of hydrogeological or geotechnical evaluation of a site. The use
of standardized visual examination and manual test methods by all field personnel results in
standardized data that can be evaluated later for geologic and engineering uses. Consistent soil
description is important because during many projects multiple employees may be involved at
different times. Hence, being able to compare or correlate soil classification logs that were
created by different geologists is essential for creating consistent subsurface interpretations. The
methods outlined in this SOP can be utilized for the characterization of soils in the field, field
office, or other setting. Characterization of the soils in a relatively undisturbed state is preferred,
but is subject to the limitations of the collection methods utilized.
Soil samples may be collected by various means, as discussed in TRC’s Soil Sampling SOP.
Regardless of the sample collection method, the resulting soil sample should be visually
described and characterized. Visual examination of the sample will result in identifying grain
size, particle size percentages, geologic and geotechnical modifiers and/or classifications, and a
host of secondary characteristics. Manual and laboratory test methods also may be utilized to
provide additional characteristics of the material, aiding in the description of fine-grained soils
and providing more detailed geotechnical characterization.
The data gathered from the visual observations and manual test results are then recorded
following an industry recognized classification system in a field log.
1.3 Equipment
The following list of equipment may be utilized when identifying and describing soil samples.
Site-specific conditions may warrant the use of additional items or deletion of items from this list.
• Appropriate level of personal protection
• Field book, boring logs, test pit logs (as applicable)
• A copy of boring logs or field notes from previous work performed at or near the site
• Pocket penetrometer or miniature vane shear device
• Munsell Soil Color Chart
• Burmister and/or Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) classification chart/reference
sheets
• Sand grading chart
• Appropriate knife
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 5 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Spoon and/or small spatula
• Tape measure, folding ruler or yard stick
• Portable table
• Polyethylene sheeting
• Hand lens
• Deionized water in squeeze bottle
• Small squirt bottle with dilute hydrochloric acid (1 part 10N HC1 to 3 parts water)
1.4 Definitions
Not Applicable; terms defined throughout SOP.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel may be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific health and safety plan (HASP). TRC personnel will use the appropriate
level of personal protective equipment (PPE) as defined in the HASP.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
• Samples collected for identification and description may contain hazardous substances or
petroleum hydrocarbons. Consult the site-specific HASP for air monitoring and PPE
requirements.
• One of the most common problems encountered when identifying soil types is the
misidentification of fine-grained soils. If new to the identification process, take time to
perform the manual field tests presented herein and/or consult with an experienced geologist
or engineer.
• Geologic and engineering principles are both utilized in this method. Remember a well or
widely graded soil (engineering term) is a poorly sorted soil (geologic term).
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
• OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Workers (HAZWOPER)
• 8-hour annual refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
This SOP includes procedures for both the modified Burmister and USCS soil classification
systems. Consult the Project Manager and site work plan for guidance on the appropriate system.
Several components of the soil description overlap between the two methods; however, there are
some slight differences, such as the descriptors for percent composition (e.g., Burmister: “some”
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 6 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
means 20-35% and USCS: “some” means 30-45%). Again, consistent soil description is
important because during many projects multiple employees may be involved in performing field
work. Hence, being able to compare between logs that were created by different geologists is
essential for creating subsurface interpretations.
2.1 Modified Burmister Soil Classification System
The general description of a soil sample should be in the following order:
1. Color
2. Major Constituent – capitalized
3. Minor Constituent(s)
4. Geologic modifiers or classifications (e.g., glacial deposit, fill material) in parentheses
5. Density
6. Moisture content
7. Modifiers for fine fraction of sample (plasticity, dilatancy and toughness)
8. Other significant observations (e.g., odors, staining, sheen, petroleum product, debris)
Use the following guidelines when recording soil descriptions:
• If the major constituent comprises more than 50% of the soil, then fully capitalize the major
component descriptor (e.g., SAND);
• If the major constituent comprises less than 50% of the soil, capitalize the descriptor (e.g.,
Sand);
• Place a comma after the major and minor constituent descriptors;
• Place size qualifiers such as coarse, medium, or fine before the major constituent descriptors
(see Section 2.7);
• Use the appropriate adjectives for proportions in Section 2.3.2 (e.g., and, some, little, trace)
when describing the minor fraction(s); and
• Use the modifiers for fine grained soils described in Section 2.8.
EXAMPLES:
Tan, medium SAND, little fine sand, trace coarse sand, trace silt, statified (Outwash), loose, wet.
Or
Gray, CLAY, soft, wet, medium plasticity, no dilatancy and low toughness.
When logging a soil sample collected from a boring (e.g., split spoon or acetate liner) where more
than one soil type is present, describe each one separately, using additional line(s) on the boring
log form. Start the description from the top and log each change in stratigraphy in sequence to
the bottom. Record the length (e.g., 0-0.5 ft.) at the beginning of each separate sequence
description, followed by a colon. Draw a line below the bottom of the complete sample
description.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 7 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.2 USCS Soil Classification System
The USCS is based on grain size and response to physical manipulation at various water contents.
This system is often used for classifying soils encountered in boreholes, test pits, and surface
sampling. The following properties form the basis of USCS soil classification:
• Percentage of gravel, sand, and fines;
• Shape of the grain size distribution curve; and
• Plasticity and compressibility characteristics.
Four soil fractions are recognized: cobbles, gravel, sand, and fines (silt or clay). The soils are
divided as coarse-grained soils, fine-grained soils, and highly organic soils. The coarse grained
soils contain 50 percent of grains coarser than a number 200 sieve (approximately 0.08 mm).
Fine grained soils contain more than 50 percent of material smaller than the number 200 sieve.
Organic soils contain a significant percentage of organic material (leaves, roots, peat, etc. in
various stages of decomposition). Soil description should be concise and stress major
constituents and characteristics for fine-grained, organic, or coarse-grained soils.
The general description of a soil sample should be in the following order:
1. Group Name (Group Symbol)
2. Percent and Range of Particle Sizes
3. Plasticity
4. Color (Munsell Color Chart)
5. Odor
6. Moisture
7. Density
8. Additional Comments
9. Geological Origin (Stratigraphic Unit)
EXAMPLES:
Well Graded Gravel with Sand (GW): mostly fine to coarse subangular gravel, little fine to coarse
subangular sand, yellowish brown (10YR 5/4), no odor, moist, loose, few small cinders, fill.
Or
Silt (ML): mostly silt, nonplastic, gray (7.5YR 5/1), slight hydrocarbon odor, moist, medium
dense, lacustrine.
2.2.1 Group Name (Group Symbol)
The USCS recognizes 15 soil groups and uses names and letter symbols to distinguish between
these groups. The coarse grained soils are subdivided into gravels (G) and sands (S). Both the
gravel and sand groups are divided into four secondary groups. Fine grained soils are subdivided
into silts (M) and clays (C). Soils are also classified according to their plasticity and grading.
Plastic soils are able to change shape under the influence of applied stress and to retain the shape
once the stress is removed. Soils are referred to either low (L) or high (H) plasticity. The grading
of a soil sample refers to the particle size distribution of the sample. A well graded (W) sand or
gravel has a wide range of particle sizes and substantial amounts of particles sized between the
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 8 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
coarsest and finest grains. A poorly graded (P) sand or gravel consists predominately of one size
or has a wide range of sizes with some intermediate sizes missing.
The flow charts included in Attachment B: USCS Field Reference Sheets, for fine- and coarse-
grained soils, can be used to assign the appropriate group symbol(s) and name and are replicated
from ASTM Standard D2488. If the soil has properties which do not distinctly place it into a
specific group, borderline symbols (e.g., SP-SM, GP-GC, etc.) may be used.
Soils which have characteristics of two groups are given boundary classifications using the names
that most nearly describe the soil. The two groups are separated by a slash. The same is true when
a soil could be well or poorly graded. Again the two groups are separated by a slash.
2.3 Soil Identification Based on Grain Size
2.3.1 Grain-Size Scales
Determination of grain size can be difficult, especially for the fine grained particles.
Identification of coarse grained particles can be aided by grain size particle charts with actual
samples affixed to the card. In general, fine grained particles are not visible with the naked eye or
a hand lens and require manual field tests to differentiate between silts and clays.
Peat, organic material in various stages of decomposition, usually appears dark brown to black,
has a fibrous to amorphous texture, with an organic odor. This material should be classified as
highly organic soil (Peat; Hummus; or Swamp/bog deposit). This material is not subject to grain
size classification described herein.
Grain size classification should be based on the following method.
COARSE GRAINED PARTICLES
• Boulder: > 300 mm (>12 in.)
• Cobble: 75 - 300 mm (3 in. – 12 in.)
• Coarse Gravel: 19 - 75 mm (¾ in. – 3 in.)
• Fine Gravel: 4.75 - 19 mm (No. 4 sieve – ¾ in.)
• Coarse Sand: 2.0 - 4.75 mm (No. 10 sieve – No. 4 sieve)
• Medium Sand: 0.425 - 2.0 mm (No. 40 sieve – No. 10 sieve)
• Fine Sand: 0.075 - 0.425 mm (No. 200 sieve – No. 40 sieve)
FINE GRAINED PARTICLES
Note that these particle sizes cannot be visually differentiated with standard field equipment.
Silts and clays are distinguished in the field by cohesion and plasticity.
Burmister:
• Silt: 0.002 - 0.075 mm
• Clay: <0.002 mm
USCS:
• Silt & Clay: <0.075 mm (< No. 200 sieve)
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 9 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.3.2 Proportions
Proportions of grain sizes need to be described in accordance with one of the two following
classification systems. Note that in either system minor constituents also include ancillary
materials such as mica flakes, dark minerals, naturally occurring organic matter, or anthropogenic
material (e.g., fill, brick, concrete).
Modified Burmister:
For geologic description, proportions of grain sizes will be based upon the following
nomenclature:
• Trace: 0-10%
• Little: 10-20%
• Some: 20-35%
• And: 35-50%
The major soil sample constituent is always capitalized and listed first.
USCS:
For geologic description, proportions of grain sizes will be based upon the following
nomenclature:
• Trace: < 5%
• Few: 5-10%
• Little: 15-25%
• Some: 30-45%
• Mostly: > 50%
The soil is fine grained if it contains 50% or more fines (<0.075 mm or passes #200 sieve)
The soil is coarse grained if it contains less than 50% fines.
2.4 Color
The main color value should be stated, along with a modifier, if appropriate. For example:
• light brown
• dark brown
• reddish brown
• brown
The presence of mottling (patches or spots of differing colors) should be included in the
description, where present. For example:
Gray, poorly sorted angular fine to medium SAND, some silt, trace angular coarse sand, trace
clay (lodgement glacial till), slightly mottled, dense, moist (Modified Burmister description)
Or
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 10 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Well Graded Sand (SW), mostly angular fine to medium sand, little to some silt, few angular
coarse sand, few clay, gray, no odor, moist, dense, lodgement glacial till. (USCS description)
As with other components of soil classification, consistent soil color descriptions can be very
helpful when preparing subsurface interpretations from soil data collected by different personnel.
To that end, the use of Munsell Soil Color charts may be implemented to standardize color
nomenclature. Just as paint stores have pages of color chips, soil scientists use a book of color
chips that follow the Munsell System of Color Notation. The system has three components: Hue
(a specific color), Value (lightness and darkness) and Chroma (color intensity). For example, a
brown soil may be noted as: hue value/chroma (10YR 5/3).
2.5 Relative Density
The modifiers used to describe soil relative density depend on whether the soil is cohesive (e.g.,
clay) or granular/non-cohesive (gravel, sand or silt). Field evaluation of the density of non-
cohesive soils is based the ease of penetration by the sampling equipment used. The density of
cohesive soils is based the compressive soil strength of soil or soil stiffness (i.e., how much the
soil compresses under a given pressure). Density can be directly measured in the field, such as
with the ASTM Standard D1586: Standard Penetration Test during split spoon sample collection
or with a pocket penetrometer. Alternatively, the density can be measured qualitatively, such as
the ease of thumb penetration. Methods of determining density and the appropriate density
modifiers are discussed in the following sections.
2.5.1 Soil Samples Collected with Split Spoons
During soil sample collection using split spoons, the density can be based on the N-Value, which
is the sum of the middle two 6-inch blow counts of a two foot split spoon or the last two 6-inch
blow counts of an 18-inch split spoon (ASTM Standard D1586: Standard Penetration Test).
Professional judgment should be used when applying the density modifier. If high blow counts
are due to the presence of a cobble, boulder or large piece of gravel that impedes forward
progress of the split spoon, density should be based upon the character of the material in the split
spoon, if any, or omitted from the description. A notation should be made in the sample
description when this situation occurs. Appropriate modifiers are described in the following
table:
Non-Cohesive (Granular Soils) Cohesive Soils
N-Value
(Blows/ft)
Density
N-Value
(Blows/ft)
Density
0-4 very loose <2 very soft
4-10 loose 2-4 soft
10-30 medium dense 4-8 medium
30-50 dense 8-15 stiff
>50 very dense 15-30 very stiff
>30 hard
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 11 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.5.2 Test Pit Samples
In test pits, density is subjective and should be based upon the ease of excavation. The above
modifiers in Section 2.5.1 for granular and cohesive soils should be used in the description. The
following should be used as a guide for test pits:
• Very Loose/Very Soft – The bucket of the excavating equipment easily penetrates the soil
and fills in one pass.
• Medium Dense/Medium – Several passes are required to fill the bucket.
• Very Dense/Very Stiff – The bucket has difficulty penetrating the soil.
2.5.3 Soil Samples Collected Via Direct Push Technology
In borings advanced by direct push methods, field evaluation of density is more subjective. Blow
counts along with visible qualifiers such as number of passes to fill an excavation bucket are not
applicable to direct push methods. Samplers therefore need to pay attention to the progress of the
sampling tool being advanced, as well as gather information from the driller advancing the tool.
Driller’s input is very valuable as the macro core might be advanced at varying speeds to best
achieve the goal of the boring. Below are approximations for estimating soil densities while
utilizing direct push methods:
• Very Loose/Very Soft – Macro core advances easily, penetrates within a few seconds.
• Medium Dense/Medium – Macro core advances slowly but steadily, penetrates within a
minute or two.
• Very Dense/Very Stiff – Macro core advances very slowly if at all, penetration may take
several minutes.
Similar to above, if drilling progress is slowed due to the presence of a cobble, boulder or large
piece of gravel that impedes forward progress of the direct push sampler, density should be based
upon the character of the material in the sampler, if any, or omitted from the description. A
notation should be made in the sample description when this situation occurs.
2.5.4 Pocket Penetrometer
A pocket penetrometer is a field tool which can be implemented to directly measure compressive
soil strength. The unit is spring-operated, and it is measures strength in tons/sq. ft. (tsf) or kg/sq.
cm by pushing a loading piston into soil until the calibration mark is level with soil. Compressive
Granular Soils Cohesive Soils Thumb Penetration Key
very loose very soft very easily – inches
loose soft easily – inches
medium dense medium moderate effort – inches
dense stiff indented easily
very dense very stiff indented by nail
hard difficult by nail
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 12 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
load is indicated by reading a scale on the piston barrel. A friction ring indicates maximum
reading. The reading correlates to the density description as follows:
The user should refer to the pocket penetrometer instruction manual for specifics on operation. It
is recommended that several pocket penetrometer readings be collected for each soil horizon and
averaged to determine the density, as opposed to one single reading.
A miniature vane shear device can also be used to directly measure compressive soil strength of
cohesive soils. The device is a spring-operated torsional test that provides shear strength by
measuring the resistance of turning a vane inserted into the sample.
2.6 Moisture Content
Moisture content should be described using the following modifiers:
• Dry – no apparent moisture, dusty.
• Moist – slight moisture content but no visible water, soils may stick together.
• Wet – water dripping from sample; usually soil is below the water table.
2.7 Geologic Modifiers or Classifications
Sedimentological descriptions aid in the geologic classification of a soil material. Only insert
geologic modifiers when present.
2.7.1 Stratification
The presence of alternating layers of non-cohesive materials of different grain sizes or color with
layers at least 6 mm thick. Note thickness of layers.
2.7.2 Lamination or Varves
The presence of alternating very thin layers of fine materials or color, such as silt and clay, with
layers less than 6 mm thick. Note thickness of layers.
2.7.3 Sorting
A geological term used to describe how close in size the grains in a sample are to each other. For
example, a well sorted sample contains grains of similar size; a poorly sorted sample contains
grains of many sizes. Caution: Sorting and grading both describe grain size distribution and can
Cohesive Soils Compressive Strength (tsf)
very soft < 0.25
soft 0.25 – 0.50
medium 0.50 – 1.0
stiff 1.0 – 2.0
very stiff 2.0 – 4.0
hard > 4.0
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 13 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
easily be confused (e.g., well sorted is the opposite of well graded). If possible, either sorting or
grading terminology, NOT both, should be used for a given project.
2.7.4 Grading
An engineering term used to describe the range in grain sizes present in a sample. For example, a
narrowly graded or poorly graded sample contains grains of similar size; a widely graded or well
graded sample contains grains of many different sizes. Caution: Sorting and grading both
describe grain size distribution and can easily be confused (e.g., well sorted is the opposite of
well graded). If possible, either sorting or grading terminology, NOT both, should be used for a
given project.
2.7.5 Angularity or Rounding
Geological terms that are used to describe the general appearance of visible grains in the soil
sample. This term is useful in determining the origin and depositional environment of a material.
Water transported materials may be rounded. Glacial tills will be more angular.
• Angular – Particles have sharp edges and relatively plane sides with unpolished surfaces.
• Subangular – Particles are similar to angular description but have rounded edges.
• Subrounded – Particles have nearly plane sides but have well-rounded corners and edges.
• Rounded – Particles have smoothly curved sides and no edges.
2.7.6 Shape
A term used to describe the shape of gravel, cobbles, and boulders. Terms are as follows where
the particle shape shall be described based on the ratio of the dimensions where the length, width,
and thickness refer to the greatest, intermediate, and least dimensions of a particle.
• Flat – Particles with width:thickness > 3.
• Elongated – Particles with length:width > 3.
• Flat and Elongated – Particles meet criteria for both flat and elongated.
2.7.7 Odor
Soils containing a significant amount of organic material may have a distinct odor of decaying
vegetation. Soils may also have a petroleum, sewage or chemical type odor. Note the type of
odor but avoid trying to identify the specific chemical; any contaminants in the soil should be
identified only by chemical analysis. Caution - Safety Note: Odors should be noted if observed.
However soil samples may contain contaminants that are harmful if inhaled. Field personnel
should NOT inhale deeply near the sample in an attempt to better determine if an odor is present.
Olfactory characteristics are subject to field conditions such as temperature and wind, as well as
individual nasal sensitivities. The strength of the odor may also be noted (e.g., strong or slight).
2.7.8 Cementation
Describe the cementation of intact coarse-grained soils as follows.
• Weak – Crumbles or breaks with handling or little finger pressure.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 14 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Moderate – Crumbles or breaks with considerable finger pressure.
• Strong – Will not crumble or break with finger pressure.
2.7.9 Hydrochloric Acid Reaction (HCl)
As appropriate for the geologic environment, describe the reaction with HCl as none, weak, or
strong. As calcium carbonate is a common cementing agent, a report of its presence on the basis
of the reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid (1 part 10N HCl to 3 parts water) is appropriate for
certain projects.
• None – No visible reaction.
• Weak – Some reaction, with bubbles forming slowly.
• Strong – Violent reaction, with bubbles forming immediately.
2.8 Fine Grained Soils
Fine grained soils can be identified based on several manual field tests described below.
2.8.1 Dilatancy
Dilatancy is the appearance/disappearance of surface water during shaking, indicating a change in
the pore volume of the material during deformation. Of the fine grained soils, silts are more
likely to exhibit dilatancy. In order to test for dilatancy, obtain a small sample of soil and mold
into a ½-inch diameter ball adding water as needed until the sample is soft but not sticky. Flatten
the ball with the blade of a knife or spatula and shake the sample horizontally striking the side of
the hand with the other hand. Note the rate at which water appears on the surface of the sample,
if any. Squeeze the sample and note the reaction of the water, if any. Describe the dilatancy of
the sample as follows:
Description Criteria
None No visible water at surface
Slow Water appears slowly on shaking, does not disappear or disappears slowly on
squeezing
Rapid Water appears quickly on shaking, disappears quickly on squeezing
2.8.2 Toughness and Plasticity
Toughness is a measure of the amount of effort required to roll a 1/8-inch thick thread of soil at
the plastic limit. Plasticity is a property of the soil that is exhibited when the soil is at a specific
water content known as the plastic limit; that is, the degree at which soil is permanently deformed
without rupturing by force applied in any direction.
2.8.2.1 Toughness Procedure
Roll a sample of the soil against a flat surface or between the palms of the hand to a thickness of
1/8-inch. If the thread crumbles and breaks prior to reaching the 1/8-inch thickness, add water
and repeat. If the sample is too wet to roll easily, dry the sample by spreading into a thin layer or
re-rolling repeatedly. The sample is at the plastic limit when the soil breaks apart and crumbles
just when the thread reaches the 1/8-inch thickness. Note the pressure required to roll the thread
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 15 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
at the plastic limit, the strength of the thread, and the pressure required to mold the sample back
into a lump.
Describe the toughness of the sample as follows:
Description Criteria
Low Slight pressure required to roll the thread and the thread and lump are soft and weak
Medium Moderate pressure required to roll the thread and the thread and lump have medium
stiffness
High Considerable pressure required to roll the thread and the thread and lump have very
high stiffness
2.8.2.2 Plasticity Procedure
Soil plasticity is a measure of the soil’s ability to be molded into a shape, and is the primary
mechanism for distinguishing between silt and clay in the field. Silts are non-plastic; they are
non-cohesive and cannot be molded and shaped. Clays exhibit varying degrees of plasticity. The
plasticity of the soil can be determined using the observations made during the toughness test.
Based on those observations, the plasticity of the soil can be described as follows:
Description Criteria
Nonplastic The soil cannot be molded at any water content
Low When moistened the soil can be molded into a ball or cylinder. A 1/8-inch diameter
thread may be formed if kept very moist, but crumbles easily if dried slightly.
Medium When moistened a 1/8-inch thread of soil is easy to roll. Crumbles if manipulated.
High When moistened a 1/8-inch thread of soil is easy to roll. Thread does not crumble
easily even if bent and manipulated.
2.8.3 Identification of Fine Grained Soils
Fine grained soils can be identified using the dilatancy, toughness and plasticity tests and the
criteria identified in the following table. These criteria should only be used for inorganic soils.
Soil Type Dilatancy Toughness Plasticity
Silt Slow to Rapid Low Nonplastic to Low
Elastic Silt None to Slow Low to Medium Low to Medium
Lean Clay None to Slow Medium Medium
Fat Clay None High High
2.8.4 Identification of Organic Soils
Organic soils contain enough organic particles to influence the soil properties and usually have a
dark brown to black color and often have an organic odor. Organic soils are typically fine
grained and are identified as either organic silts or clays. Peat is a particular type of organic soil
composed primarily of vegetable tissue in various stages of decomposition that has a fibrous to
amorphous texture, usually a dark brown to black color, and an organic odor. When present the
sample shall be designated as highly organic soil or peat. Laboratory tests are usually required to
differentiate between organic silts and clays.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 16 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.9 Fill Soils
Frequently soils are encountered that have been placed in an area for the purpose of changing or
modifying the surface elevation. These fill soils can be reworked native soils or soils imported
from another location. Indications that a soil is a non-native fill material include the following:
• The presence of anthropogenic materials (e.g., bricks, concrete, plastic);
• A heterogeneous mixture of soils with a random or unnatural distribution;
• Soils with an unnatural particle size distribution (e.g., clean pea stone).
Environmental and geotechnical projects often require that the extent and depth of fill soils be
characterized. Fill soils are usually considered unsuitable for geotechnical uses due to the
potential variation of soil types and engineering properties, and the uncertain compaction history
of the material.
Fill soils can also contain anthropogenic materials that can be sources of contamination.
Examples of anthropogenic materials that can be sources of contamination include the following:
• Construction and demolition debris especially with coatings or materials that contain tar or
asphalt;
• Ash;
• Slag;
• Coal; and
• Asphalt pavement.
Regardless of the potential for contamination, all anthropogenic materials should be listed in the
soil description. Contact the Project Manager immediately if any of these materials are
unexpectedly encountered. This is especially important if environmental samples are being
collected for site characterization.
2.10 Geologic Origin
Where possible based on existing site data, local research, or geologic understanding of the local
region, include the apparent geologic origin of the material, such as glacial deposit (e.g., till,
outwash), aeolian deposit, residual soil, colluvium, alluvium, regolith, residuum, saprolite, or fill
material. Do not utilize geologic origin if not certain.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pick-up and disposal of
the materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 17 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
Other than having another person peer review and duplicate the visual identification, samples of
identified soils can be submitted to a geotechnical laboratory for classification in accordance with
ASTM D 2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System). The laboratory classification can then be compared to the visual
identification which can be changed as needed. It is recommended that Project Managers include
laboratory classification of site soils in work plans for environmental projects. Laboratory
classification should always be included for geotechnical projects. TRC field staff shall consult
the site-specific work plan to determine laboratory soil classification requirements, if any.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
All soil identification information must be documented in the field book and/or on an appropriate
field form (TRC Sample Log Sheet, Boring Logs, Test Pit Logs or gINT). Example field forms
are included in Attachment A. Field notes should neatly convey the soil descriptions. Providing
soil classifications following this SOP will allow for consistent data interpretation and increase
project efficiency when soil descriptions are taken from field logs and converted to electronic
report logs (e.g., gINT). Record the following information in the field book:
• Sample identification number
• Sample location (sketch of the sample point)
• Time and date sample was taken
• Personnel performing the task
• Visual description of the sample
• Weather conditions during sampling
• Other pertinent observations as prescribed in TRC’s SOP for field activity documentation
6.0 REFERENCES
ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System), Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 04.08, Current edition.
ASTM D2488 Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual
Procedure), Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 04.08, Current edition.
ASTM D1586-11 Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Split Barrel-
Sampling of Soils, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 04.08, Current edition.
Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
Procedures for Testing Soils. Burmister, D.M., 1958. Suggested Methods of Test for
Identification of Soils.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 SEPTEMBER 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 18 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT A
FIELD FORMS
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 19 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
<2
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 20 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
19-4.8 mm
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 21 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 22 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT B
USCS FIELD REFERENCE SHEETS
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 23 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 24 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 25 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT C
SOP FACT SHEET
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 26 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 27 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 28 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification Page 29 of 29
Procedure No: RMD 005 Revision: 0 Effective: 9/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 1 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Well Development
RMD 006
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
October 2013
Authorization Signatures
10/21/13 10/21/13
Technical Reviewer
Elizabeth Schwartz, PG
Date Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 2 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 3
1.1 Scope and Applicability .................................................................... 3
1.2 Summary of Method......................................................................... 3
1.3 Equipment....................................................................................... 4
1.4 Definitions ....................................................................................... 5
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ........................................................ 6
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ...................................................... 6
1.7 Personnel Qualifications................................................................... 6
2.0 PROCEDURES......................................................................................... 7
2.1 Well Development Methods .............................................................. 7
2.2 General Procedures for Well Development ........................................ 8
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................. 11
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................ 11
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT .................................... 11
6.0 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 12
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ........................................................................ 12
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Example Well Development Form
Attachment B SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 3 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the methods
for the development of wells. Well development is completed to (1) evacuate any water added
during the drilling of wells, (2) establish a good hydraulic connection between the well and the
surrounding water-bearing zone, (3) settle the sand pack and formation following the disruptive
drilling and installation activities, (4) alleviate clogging, smearing or compaction of formation
materials at the borehole wall due to the drilling process, and (5) remove fine particles (e.g., silt
or clay) from the water column and sand pack in order to obtain groundwater samples that are
representative of the water-bearing zone in which the well is installed and/or enhance
groundwater extraction and injection rates. Well development typically occurs for all newly
installed wells and can also be implemented to refurbish an older well where significant
silt/sediment build-up has occurred, as may be observed when the measured depth to bottom of a
well is notably shallower than the recorded constructed depth to bottom.
1.2 Summary of Method
Proper well development includes initial and ongoing water-level and water quality
measurements, implementation of the development method, management of the development
wastes, equipment decontamination, and documentation. First, the well should be opened and
initial measurements (e.g., headspace air monitoring readings, depth to water, total depth of the
well) are collected and recorded. The well is developed using the method selected for each project
based on the lithology, site conditions, and objectives and requirements of the project.
Development of the well continues until the water is visually clear and free of sediments (e.g.,
turbidity <10 nephelometric turbidity units [NTU]), until a minimum number of well volumes has
been evacuated (depending on regulatory requirements) or until water quality parameters such as
pH, temperature, and specific conductivity stabilize, depending on project requirements. All
purge water is containerized for proper characterization and disposal at an appropriate facility
unless prior approval to discharge to land surface has been obtained from appropriate sources
(e.g., governing regulatory agency). Final measurements (e.g., depth to water, total depth of the
well, total water removed) are recorded in the field book or on the Well Development Form
(Attachment A). Equipment is decontaminated, as appropriate, prior to use in the next well.
After well installation, development of a well should occur as soon as reasonably possible to
enable representative sampling within the parameters of the project schedule. Some regulatory
agencies require minimum timeframes for the newly-installed well materials, such as the
bentonite seal or grout column, to cure before initiating well development (e.g., 24 or 48 hours).
In addition, more vigorous well development methods (e.g., surging) may require a relatively
longer setup time before development. If a less vigorous method (e.g., bailing) is being used,
development may be initiated shortly after installation when grout is not used in well installation
or if the sealant is above the water table. Regardless, the method used for development should
not interfere with the setting of the well seal, which should be considered in preparing the work
plan.
Well development also provides an opportunity to collect data that can be used to estimate the
hydraulic conductivity (permeability) of the screened water-bearing formation. These estimates
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 4 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
can be used to estimate groundwater flow velocities, and are often needed to project the extent of
plume migration, estimate monitored natural attenuation rates, and other investigative tasks.
Estimates of hydraulic conductivity and aquifer transmissivity can be derived from a measure of a
well’s specific capacity; i.e., flow rate divided by water-level drawdown (expressed in gallons per
minute per foot [gpm/ft] of drawdown). The data needed to estimate specific capacity are the
flow rate (purge rate during development, measured with a flow meter or a 5-gallon bucket and
stopwatch), the static (pre-pumping) depth to water, and the pumping depth to water. The
duration of pumping when the pumping depth to water is measured should also be noted.
Several development methods may be used depending on site conditions and project
requirements. There are several regulatory agency guidance documents (e.g., USGS, 1997) as
well as ASTM standards available for reference. If possible, select a development method that
avoids introduction of air, foreign water, or chemicals to the aquifer during development. A few
development methods are outlined in Section 2.0.
1.3 Equipment
The following list of equipment may be utilized during the development of wells. Site-specific
conditions may warrant the use of additional items or deletion of items from this list.
• Appropriate level of personal protection equipment (PPE), as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
• Electronic water level indicator
• Oil/water interface probe
• Extra batteries for water level/interface probe
• Field book and forms
• Well keys
• Socket wrench
• Centrifugal or submersible pump and tubing/hosing
• Water quality meter (including parameters such as pH, temperature, specific conductivity,
oxidation-reduction potential (ORP) and dissolved oxygen (DO))
• Flow-through cell
• Turbidity meter
• Plastic beaker, jar, or disposable plastic cups
• Bailer and cord
• Large-capacity DOT-approved containers (if required)
• Five-gallon buckets
• Surge block
• Bulk supply of deionized/organic-free water
• Well construction diagrams and previous well development data (if available)
• Equipment decontamination supplies
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 5 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.4 Definitions
Bailer A cylindrical device suspended from a rope or cable, which is used
to remove water, non-aqueous phase liquid (NAPL), sediment or
other materials from a well or open borehole. Usually equipped
with some type of check valve at the base to allow water, NAPL,
and/or sediment to enter the bailer and be retained as it is lifted to
the surface.
Dense Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (DNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is denser than water and, therefore,
sinks to the bottom of the water column.
Depth To Water (DTW) The distance to the groundwater surface from an established
measuring point.
Light Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (LNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is less dense than water and, therefore,
floats on the surface of the water.
Monitoring Well A well made from a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, or other
appropriate material, with slotted screen installed across or within a
saturated zone. A monitoring well is typically constructed with a
PVC or stainless steel pipe in unconsolidated deposits and with steel
casing in bedrock.
Non-aqueous Phase
Liquid (NAPL)
Petroleum or other fluid that is immiscible in water and tends to
remain as a separate liquid in the subsurface.
Piezometer A well made from PVC or metal with a slotted screen installed
across or within a saturated zone. Piezometers are primarily
installed to monitor changes in the potentiometric surface elevation.
Separate-phase Product A liquid that does not easily dissolve in water. Separate-phase
product can be more dense (i.e., DNAPL) or less dense (i.e.,
LNAPL) than water and, therefore, can be found at different depths
in the water column.
Low-permeability
Formation
A geologic formation that has very slow recharge and discharge
rates due to small pore spaces in the formation material. A clay
formation is considered to have low permeability and a very slow
recharge rate compared to a more permeable formation, such as
sand or gravel.
Surge Block A disc-shaped or cylindrical device that closely fits the well casing
interior and is operated like a plunger below the water table to force
water in and out of the well as a well development tool.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 6 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Total Depth of Well Distance from the measuring point to the bottom of the well.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE as defined in
the HASP.
When present, special care should be taken to avoid contact with contaminated groundwater,
LNAPL or DNAPL. The use of an air monitoring program, as well as the proper PPE designated
by the site-specific HASP, can identify and/or mitigate potential health hazards.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
The following cautions or problems may be associated with well development:
• The observed presence of NAPL may warrant alternative goals and objectives for the well other
than immediate development. The Project Manager should be contacted for direction on how to
proceed.
• Low-yielding wells (e.g., at clay-bedrock interface, tight bedrock formations, etc.) may produce
insufficient water to achieve optimal development including parameter stabilization.
• High-yielding wells (e.g., in coarse sand and gravel aquifers) may require the removal of large
quantities of water to approach optimal development.
• Long well screens and/or larger diameter wells may require more time and effort to ensure
adequate development of the entire interval depending on the development method employed.
• Development of wells should occur from the least-contaminated well to the most-contaminated
well, if known.
• Overpumping is not as vigorous as surging and jetting and is probably the most desirable method
for the development of new wells. The possibility of disturbing the filter pack is greatest with
jetting well development methods, which are generally reserved for redevelopment of clogged
extraction or injection wells. Surging or jetting may be preferred methods for supply, recovery,
or injection wells (if constructed with metal screens) to achieve higher well efficiencies.
• The introduction of external water or air by jetting may alter the chemistry of the aquifer.
• Surging with compressed air may produce “air locking” in the water-bearing zone, preventing
water from flowing into the well.
• Exercise caution with the use of surge blocks in PVC screen and pipe as the well could be
damaged.
• Small (2-inch nominal diameter) submersible pumps that will fit in 2-inch diameter well casings
are especially susceptible to becoming lodged (stuck) if used in well development applications.
• Prior to sampling a well, sufficient time should be allowed for equilibration with the formation
after development. Refer to the governing regulatory agency for guidance regarding the
required/recommended time interval between well development and sampling.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 7 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Project- and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
Well development will be completed on wells after the grout, annular seals, and protective casings are
deemed sufficiently stable (i.e., 24 to 48 hours after installation) for the development method being
utilized and/or after required regulatory agency timeframe requirements. Development may be performed
immediately after well installation if grout is not used during well installation or if the sealant (i.e.,
bentonite seal) is above the water table, in accordance with the regulatory requirements. Various well
development methods, including surging, pumping, hand bailing, and jetting, are summarized below,
followed by step-by-step well development procedures.
2.1 Well Development Methods
Surging Method
Surge and Pump: To increase the effectiveness of well development, the well can be surged and then
pumped. Surging may be accomplished in several ways, but essentially water is rapidly forced into and
out of a well in a wash and backwash action. One method of surging is to simply turn the pump on for a
few minutes and then turn it off for a few minutes. Surging can also be accomplished with a surge block,
which is a piston-like device attached to the end of a drill rod or pipe. The block is plunged up and down
along the screened interval, similar to a piston in a cylinder, to flush water in and out of the well. Periods
of surging are typically followed by a period of water extraction to remove the sediment brought into the
well. Surge blocks are best utilized for wells screened in lithologies of medium to high porosities and
hydraulic conductivities. Exercise caution with the use of surge blocks in PVC screens which can be
damaged by tight-fitting surge blocks.
A surge block method is used alternately with either a bailer or pump, so that materials that have been
agitated and loosened by the surging action are removed. The cycle of surging-pumping/bailing is
repeated until satisfactory development is achieved.
The surge block, usually attached and operated by a drill rig, is lowered to the top of the well screen and
then operated in a surging action with a typical stroke of about three feet. The surging action is usually
initiated at the top of the well screen and gradually worked downward through the screened interval so
that sand or silt loosened by the surging action cannot cascade down on top of the surge block and prevent
removal from the well. The surge block is removed at regular intervals and the fine material that has been
loosened is removed by a bailer or pump.
Surging is initially gentle and the energy of the action is gradually increased during the development
process. By controlling the speed, length and stroke of the surge block, the surging activity can range
from very rigorous to very gentle.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 8 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Pumping Method
Pumping develops a well by creating a surging action as a result of variable flow rates. An electric
submersible pump or compressed air-operated air displacement pump is installed into the well. The rate
of flow is varied at levels adjacent to the well screen.
Overpumping: A simple method of well development is overpumping, where water is simply pumped
from the well at a high rate.
Many pumps can also be used to surge a well, employing a similar method as with the surge block.
While either off or running, the pump may be plunged up and down along the screened interval, in effect
flushing water and sediment in and out of the well and adjacent filter pack.
Hand Bailing Method
Surge and Bail: Instead of a surge block, a bailer can be used in a similar manner since the diameter of
the bailer is commonly slightly smaller than the diameter of the well. A water-filled bailer can be
plunged up and down, followed by periods of bailing out sediment suspended in the water column. The
impact of the bailer as it strikes the surface of the water produces an outward surge of water through the
well construction and into the formation. This action tends to break sediment bridges that may have
formed during well installation. Movement of water back into the well suspends fine sediments into the
water column, which are removed with the bailer.
Bailers are good well development tools for wells screened in low-permeable formations. Deep wells or
large purge volume wells should not be developed with bailers, as development with a bailer would be
very labor intensive.
Jetting Method
Another method of development is high-velocity hydraulic jetting. Using a specialized jetting tool, jets of
water are directed horizontally at the sides of the well from inside the well to loosen fine-grained material
and drilling mud residue from the formation. The loosened material is flushed into the well and can be
removed through concurrent pumping or by bailing. Caution should be used when using a jetting method
of development as there is the possibility of disturbing the well filter pack. For product recovery, a jetting
method of development can push product away from the well and can delay or completely prevent
product from coming back into the well.
2.2 General Procedures for Well Development
1. The project plan will be consulted regarding any project-specific well development requirements.
2. Consult the well completion diagram and boring log to determine the well construction (well
diameter, depth and length of screen), soil core vapor screening results, lithology of the screened
interval, and depth to water.
3. If potable water was introduced into the water-bearing zone during well installation, the estimated
amount of water lost to the formation during the drilling process should be removed during well
development to ensure connection with formation water during the development process.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 9 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
4. Select the appropriate method and equipment to implement development of the well. Ensure any
non-dedicated equipment is clean and decontaminated prior to use and also in between wells.
The development equipment should be the appropriate length to reach the entire length of the
well screen. The method should be capable of evacuating the development water to the surface
and into containers if required.
5. Measure the static DTW and total depth of the well using RMD SOP 004, and determine the
amount of standing water in the well (well volume). Record the DTW and calculate the water
column volume of the well.
To calculate the volume of water in the well, the following equation (Equation 1) is used:
Well Volume (V) = πr2
h (cf)
where:
π = pi (3.14)
r = radius of well in feet (ft)
h = height of the water column in ft. [This may be determined by subtracting the DTW from the
total depth of the well as measured from the same reference point.]
cf = conversion factor in gallons per cubic foot (gal/ft
3
) = 7.48 gal/ft
3
.
The volume in gallons/linear foot (gal/ft) for common size wells are as follows:
Well Diameter (inches) Volume (gal/ft)
2 0.1631
3 0.3670
4 0.6524
6 1.4680
If the volumes for the common size wells above are utilized, Equation 1 is modified as follows:
Well volume = (h)(f)
where:
h = height of the water column (feet)
f = the volume in gal/ft
6. Using the appropriate length of dedicated or decontaminated hosing/tubing and the selected
pumping apparatus, insert the equipment into the well.
7. Initiate water removal from the well and record the initial water quality measurements including
pH, temperature, specific conductivity, DO, ORP and turbidity (as required by project
specifications) in the field book or on the Well Development Form. Record any odors, water
color/clarity, changes in air monitoring results or other observations in the field book or on the
Well Development Form.
8. Optional step to estimate the permeability of the formation: Estimate flow rate of extracted water,
in gallons per minute (gpm). The flow rate can be measured with a 5-gallon bucket and stop
watch, or timed transfer to any vessel which can be measured. Measure DTW in the well during
pumping to derive an estimate of water-level drawdown. Calculate the approximate specific
capacity (gpm/ft of drawdown). Tracking the improvement of specific capacity can provide a
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 10 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
direct measure of the effectiveness of well development and can determine when development is
no longer providing improvement.
9. In general, well development should proceed until the following criteria are met (note: certain
regulatory agencies may have more stringent well development requirements):
a. Water can enter as readily as hydraulic conditions allow.
b. A representative sample can be collected.
• In general, representative conditions can be assumed when the water is visibly clear of
sediments (e.g., turbidity <10 NTU).
• In addition to clear water, a further criterion for completed well development is that the
other water quality parameters mentioned above stabilize to within 10 percent between
readings over one well volume. During well development, pH, specific conductivity,
DO, ORP, temperature and turbidity can additionally be monitored to establish natural
conditions and evaluate whether the well has been completely developed.
c. The duration, along with any measured water quality parameters (e.g. pH, temperature,
specific conductivity, DO, ORP and turbidity) should be recorded on the Well
Development Form.
In some instances, collection of a sample with a turbidity of 10 NTU or less is difficult or
unattainable. If a well does not provide a sediment-free sample, development can stop
when all of the following conditions are met:
• Several procedures have been tried,
• Proper well construction has been verified,
• Turbidity has stabilized within 10 percent over three successive well volumes, and
• Specific conductivity and pH have stabilized over at least three successive well
volumes.
(It should be noted that pH, temperature, and specific conductivity may not stabilize
if water quality has been degraded).
d. The sediment thickness remaining in the well is less than 1 percent of the screen length or
less than 0.1 foot for screens equal to or less than 10 feet.
e. A minimum of three times the standing water volume in the well (to include the well
screen, casing, plus saturated annulus, assuming 30 percent annular porosity) should be
removed. If water was added as part of the well installation and development, attempts
should be made to recover the volume of water added, plus the three well volumes.
10. Measure the total depth of the well, to determine the amount, if any, of sand/silt removed during
development of the well.
11. Note the final water quality parameters in the field book or on the Well Development Form. The
time between well development and sampling will depend on project objectives and regulatory
requirements.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 11 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the
materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The following Quality Assurance/Quality Control procedures apply:
• Operate field instruments according to the manufacturers’ manuals.
• Calibrate field instruments at the proper frequency.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
• Record well development measurements on field forms or in a field book. See Attachment A
for an example of a Well Development Form.
• The following additional information should be recorded on the field form or in a field book:
- Well/piezometer or monitoring point identification number
- Well/piezometer or monitoring point location (sketch of the sample point or
reference to a location figure)
- Date of well installation
- Date(s) and time of well development
- Static DTW before and after development
- Quantity of water removed and initial and completion times
- Quantity and source of water added to well to facilitate development, if applicable
- Type and capacity of pump or bailer used
- Description of well development techniques
- Visual or sensory description (e.g., odors, product, etc.)
- Time and date measurements were taken
- Personnel performing the task
- Weather conditions during task
- Other pertinent observations
- Measurement equipment used
- Calibration procedures used
- Decontamination procedures used
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 12 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
6.0 REFERENCES
U.S. EPA A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods. EPA/540/P-87/001.
December 1987.
U.S. EPA Environmental Response Team, Standard Operating Procedures, Monitor Well
Development, SOP 2044. October 23, 2001.
U.S. Geological Survey, Guidelines and Standard Procedures for Studies of Ground-Water
Quality: Selection and Installation of Wells, and Supporting Documentation. Water-Resources
Investigations Report 96-4233. 1997.
Ohio EPA, Division of Drinking and Ground Waters, Chapter 8: Monitoring Well Development,
Maintenance, and Redevelopment. Technical Guidance Manual for Ground Water Investigations.
February 2009 (Rev 2).
Sanders, Laura L. A Manual of Field Hydrogeology. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 1998. pp. 260-
261.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 OCTOBER 2013 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 13 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT A
EXAMPLE WELL DEVELOPMENT FORM
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 14 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 15 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT B
SOP FACT SHEET
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Well Development Page 16 of 16
Procedure No: RMD 006 Revision: 0 Effective: 10/2013
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
WELL DEVELOPMENT
PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVE
Well development is completed to (1) evacuate any water added during the drilling of wells, (2) establish a good hydraulic connection
between the well and the surrounding water-bearing zone, (3) settle the sand pack and formation following the disruptive drilling and
installation activities, (4) alleviate clogging, smearing or compaction of formation materials at the borehole wall due to the drilling
process, and (5) remove fine particles (e.g., silt or clay) from the water column and sand pack in order to obtain groundwater samples
that are representative of the water-bearing zone in which the well is installed and/or enhance groundwater extraction and injection
rates. State and federal requirements may be above and beyond the scope of this SOP and should be followed, if applicable.
WHAT TO BRING
• Field book or field forms
• Well keys, socket wrench, and device to remove standing
water from flush-mount manholes.
• Water level meter and extra batteries
• Water quality meters, including turbidity meter
• Decontaminated pump, control box, power source (i.e.,
battery, generator, etc.)
• Tubing
• Bailer and cord
• Surge block
• Equipment decontamination supplies
• Indelible marking pens or markers
• Means of containerizing purge water
OFFICE
• Prepare/update the HASP; make sure the field team is familiar with the latest version.
• Review the work plan with the Project Manager and/or the field lead.
• Confirm that all necessary equipment is available in-house or has been ordered. Rental equipment is typically delivered the day
before fieldwork is scheduled. Prior to departure, test equipment and make sure it is in proper working order.
ON-SITE
• Review the HASP with all field personnel, conduct Health & Safety tailgate meeting.
• Make sure appropriate PPE is worn by all personnel and work area is safe (i.e., utilize traffic cones; minimize interference with
on-site activities, pedestrian traffic etc.)
• Calibrate equipment (if applicable) and record all rental equipment serial numbers in the field book.
GENERAL DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURES
• Well development will be completed on wells after the grout, annular seals, and protective casings are deemed sufficiently stable
(i.e., 24 to 48 hours after installation) for the development method being utilized and/or after required regulatory agency
timeframe requirements.
• Measure the static water level and total depth of the well using RMD SOP 004, and determine the amount of standing water in the
well (well volume). Calculate volume of water in one well volume.
• Using the appropriate length of dedicated or decontaminated hosing/tubing and the selected pumping apparatus, insert the
equipment into the well.
• Initiate water removal from the well and record the initial field water quality measurements including pH, temperature,
conductivity, DO, ORP and turbidity (as required by project specifications) in the field book or on the Well Development Form.
Record any odors, water color/clarity, changes in air monitoring results or other observations in the field book or on the Well
Development Form.
• Well development procedures may include surging, overpumping, bailing, and jetting.
• Continue well development procedures until criteria have been met (e.g., turbidity <10 NTU, stabilization of water quality
parameters, sediment thickness remaining in well is less than 1 percent of screen length) and a minimum of three times the
standing water volume in the well has been removed.
WATER DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for investigation-derived waste disposal with
the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place prior to performing the field work.
Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be
returned to the site, consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the client, testing for
disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 2 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope and Applicability ........................................................................ 3
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 4
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 5
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 6
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 7
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 8
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 8
2.1 Preparation ........................................................................................... 8
2.2 Materials ............................................................................................... 9
2.2.1 Well Screens ................................................................................. 9
2.2.2 Riser and End Caps .................................................................... 10
2.2.3 Filter Pack ................................................................................... 10
2.2.4 Annular Seal ............................................................................... 11
2.2.5 Grout ........................................................................................... 11
2.2.6 Surface Protective Casing........................................................... 11
2.3 Monitoring Well Installation ................................................................. 12
2.3.1 Procedures .................................................................................. 13
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 16
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 16
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 16
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 17
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 17
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Example Monitoring Well Installation Forms
Attachment B SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 3 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the
construction and installation of groundwater monitoring wells. TRC typically employs a drilling
subcontractor to perform the actual construction and installation. The SOP conforms to A
Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods (EPA/540/P-87/001) and American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standard D5092, Standard Practice for Design and
Installation of Groundwater Monitoring Wells in Aquifers (ASTM 2004). A thorough discussion
of well design, installation, materials, and potential problems is found in Practical Handbook of
Environmental Site Characterization and Ground-Water Monitoring, Chapter 10: Design and
Installation of Ground-Water Monitoring Wells (Nielsen and Schalla 2006). In general, this SOP
conforms to typical practices utilized in the field; project-specific and local or state regulatory
requirements should be applied, as needed.
1.1 Scope and Applicability
The objective of a groundwater monitoring well is to provide for the collection of representative
groundwater samples and hydrologic data on the target saturated zone. These objectives require
that the well be installed and developed (well development is presented in RMD SOP 006) using
suitable materials, equipment, and procedures that will best represent the actual hydraulic
conditions. Specific monitoring well design and installation procedures depend on project-
specific objectives and subsurface conditions. The well construction activity should include
consideration of the potential impact on the groundwater quality and measures to rectify that
impact to the extent practicable. The following aspects should to be considered prior to well
installation:
Borehole drilling method
Well construction materials
Well depth
Screen length
Location, thickness, and composition of annular seals
Well completion and protection requirements
Monitoring well installation will be performed in accordance with the applicable regulatory
agency standards and the project-specific work plan. Drilling methods used to pilot the borehole
for monitoring well installation will be dependent on the physical nature of the subsurface
materials (unconsolidated materials and/or consolidated materials) at the project site.
1.2 Summary of Method
The most common type of monitoring well installations are single-screen, single casing wells
designed to monitor one specific interval within the groundwater. Monitoring wells are typically
2 inches (inside) diameter, but may be larger or smaller depending on the project requirements.
With direct push technology being used more frequently, 1-inch diameter wells are also
frequently used. Monitoring wells most commonly consist of 5 or 10 feet of well screen with an
interconnected length of blank well casing that extends to the surface. The annulus between the
screen and the formation is filled with a filter pack of appropriately-sized sand depending on the
formation material. The annulus between the blank casing and the borehole is filled with an
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 4 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
annular seal to the ground surface. A surface completion usually consisting of a traffic-rated well
vault or monument that protects the well from damage or unauthorized use is installed at or above
the surface.
For more complicated monitoring well installations, such as situations requiring very small screen
intervals (such as with fractured rock), open boreholes, or multiple zones of interest, the well
design can be modified to suit the application. See Nielsen and Schalla (2006) for additional
information on less conventional well installations.
In general, all well materials (other than filter sand, seals, and grout) are typically provided by the
manufacturer and are individually plastic-wrapped. If required by the project-specific work plan
or at the discretion of the TRC inspector, well materials (other than filter sand, seals, and grout)
may be steam-cleaned, rinsed with deionized water, and covered in plastic prior to installation of
the well to prevent the introduction of foreign contaminants into the aquifer. Decontamination
and bagging can be conducted by the manufacturer, prior to delivery to the site. Furthermore,
well construction materials shall be properly stored until use to ensure their good condition and
cleanliness.
1.3 Equipment
The following list of equipment may be used during the installation of groundwater monitoring
wells. Many of these materials may be supplied by the drilling subcontractor. Specific details on
these materials are described in Section 2.2. Site-specific conditions may warrant the use of
additional items or deletion of items from the list.
• Appropriate level of personal protection equipment (PPE), as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
• Electronic water level indicator
• Weighted tape measure appropriate to the depth of well
• Well screens with appropriately sized slot openings
• Well casings/risers
• Well end caps
• Centralizers
• Graded sand for filter pack (appropriate for formation and screen slot size)
• Fine-grained sand (for use between filter pack and annular seal)
• Bentonite pellets or granules/chips
• Powdered bentonite
• Type I Portland cement
• Redi-Mix concrete
• Protective surface casing (for aboveground or “stick-up” wells)
• Lockable well cover
• Steel manhole/curb box (for flush-mounted wells)
• Equipment decontamination supplies
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 5 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.4 Definitions
Annulus/annular space The space between the well casing/screen and the borehole wall.
Annular seal An interval of low-permeability material placed above the filter
pack designed to inhibit the flow of water into or through the
annulus.
Bentonite A naturally occurring deposit of volcanic ash that has partially
weathered to form an absorbent swelling clay, consisting mostly of
montmorillonite.
Bridge(-ing) An obstruction within the annulus that may prevent circulation or
complete installation of annular materials.
Casing – pipe (well
casing)
Rigid pipe constructed in threaded or welded sections installed to
temporarily or permanently counteract caving of the borehole or to
isolate an interval to be monitored.
Casing - protective A section of larger diameter pipe placed over the uppermost end of
a monitoring well riser or casing to provide structural protection to
the well and restrict unauthorized access.
Caving (sloughing) The inflow or collapse of unconsolidated material into a borehole
that occurs when the borehole walls lose their cohesive strength, or
a detached section of consolidated material is dislodged into the
borehole.
Cement (Portland
cement)
A mixture of calcareous, argillaceous, or other silica-, alumina-, and
iron-oxide-bearing materials that is manufactured and formulated to
produce a hardened material when mixed with water. Type I
Portland cement as classified by ASTM C150 Standard
Specification for Portland Cement is a general purpose cement most
commonly used for monitoring wells when the special properties
(e.g., sulfate resistance, high early strength, low heat of hydration)
specified for other types are not required.
Centralizer A device that assists in centering the riser pipe and screen in the
borehole or casing.
Filter pack (gravel pack;
sand pack)
An annular material composed of clean silica sand or sand and
gravel of selected grain size and gradation that is placed in the
annulus between the screened interval and the borehole wall in a
well for the purpose of retaining and stabilizing the formation
material.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 6 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Flush-threaded Casing or riser that is threaded and sized in such a manner that the
inside and outside diameters are maintained between sections and
joints.
Grout A low-permeability material placed in the annulus between the well
casing or riser and the borehole wall (typical well construction), or
between the riser and casing, to maintain the alignment of the
casing and riser and to prevent movement of groundwater or surface
water into the annular space.
Riser Sections of blank pipe that connect to the well screen and extend to
or above the ground surface.
Tamping device A heavy object attached to a measuring tape, rope or wire used to
slip inside the annular space to ensure annular materials are
properly placed per the designed depth criteria and to prevent
bridging.
Tremie pipe A tube or string of piping used to convey filter pack and annular
seal materials from the ground surface to fill the annulus.
Vented end cap A covering device that slips over or into the top of the well riser
with a hole drilled in it to allow continuous equilibration of the
potentiometric surface with the atmospheric pressure.
Well screen Pipe (typically polyvinyl chloride [PVC] or stainless steel) used to
retain the formation or filter pack materials outside of the well. The
pipe has openings/slots of a uniform width, orientation, and spacing.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
Drilling operations can create a hazardous environment. The potential for injury is fairly high
around a drill rig. Level D PPE, including a hardhat, gloves, steel-toed safety shoes, and safety
glasses, must be worn at a minimum. Hearing protection is also standard for drilling personnel.
Tyvek clothing is recommended when mixing grout. Most well installations are performed with
the assistance of the hoist on the drill rig mast as the downhole drill pipe or augers are removed
when the well materials are placed. Therefore, TRC personnel must be mindful of the same
hazards that apply during drilling. TRC staff should only approach the drill rig if necessary to
monitor the breathing zone, confirm depths of materials, or confer with the driller. Before
approaching the drill rig, direct eye contact should be made with the driller so they are aware of
your presence. The following safety requirements should be adhered to while performing drilling
activities:
• The drill rig should not be operated within a minimum distance of 20 feet of overhead
electrical power lines and/or buried utilities that might cause a safety hazard. In addition, the
drill rig should not be operated while there is lightening in the area of the drilling site. If an
electrical storm moves in during drilling activities, the area will be vacated until it is safe to
return.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 7 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Serious injuries have occurred while the driller removes casing using a cable and winch. The
winch should only be used to move augers or piping – NOT to pull casing, piping or augers
from the ground. Use of the drill string is the safest means to pull casing, auger, or piping as
the well materials are placed.
• Exposure to potential contaminants can occur from vapors coming from the open boring and
from contaminated groundwater being forced out of the boring when grouting.
• While the exposure duration is very low, the dusts from well sand, bentonite, and cement can
harm the lungs. Workers should avoid the dust produced when placing the well materials.
• Cement is highly caustic and can irritate the skin. Chemical-resistant gloves should be worn
if contact with cement is necessary.
• The bags of sand, cement, and bentonite typically do not require a knife to cut them open. A
dull instrument, such as a screwdriver, is sufficient.
• Cutting PVC well casing or screen should be conducted using a PVC cutting tool or hacksaw.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
Well installation is typically conducted by the drilling subcontractor. TRC personnel serve to
observe and document the installation and to serve as quality control that the well is installed
according to the project specifications. The following cautions or problems may be associated
with well installation
• Wells are often specified to be installed as “water table” wells with the screen designed to
intersect the top of the water table. The difficulty arises in being able to determine if the
water surface as measured in the open borehole will remain the same once the well is
installed.
• It is also common that “water table” conditions do not exist due to a confining layer or
fractured rock environments. In such cases, the well screen is placed in the producing
formation or fracture, and the screen may not intersect the potentiometric surface.
• A well screen should never be placed such that the screen straddles a confining unit, thus
connecting two separate aquifer units.
• Flush-mount well constructions require appropriate design to account for vehicular traffic and
potential water infiltration into the surface completion among other things. In general, wells
with flush-mount completions should not be located in low-lying areas or drainage paths
where water influx can be a recurring problem. Appropriate design should consider a
drainage layer of sand or gravel with a weep hole so water that accumulates in the vault can
drain.
• Aquifer or other pressure conditions at some locations may warrant consideration of a vent
hole in the well cap. For flush-mount well completions, a vent hole can provide a means for
ambient surface water to enter the well if the if the completion is not designed properly.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 8 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Careful consideration should be given to well completion design, including vented well caps,
depending on the circumstances at the location.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project- and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project-specific work
plan. These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
Monitoring well installation is typically conducted by a subcontractor experienced in such
installations following completion of a soil boring. A qualified TRC representative provides
oversight and documentation that the well is properly installed. Subcontractor personnel should
not be on the site without a TRC representative being present unless specific prior approval has
been given by TRC. The TRC representative should prepare a Monitoring Well Installation Form
(Attachment A) that documents the well completion details.
2.1 Preparation
Prior to the initiation of field work, the Project Manager or field technical lead (site manager) will
secure the services of a qualified drilling contractor. A contract between TRC and the drilling
contractor should be executed before mobilization. At a minimum, the drilling contractor must
meet the following requirements:
• have the appropriate licenses, registrations and/or certifications for drilling and monitoring
well installation in the state in which the work is being conducted,
• have the proper equipment in good operating condition and free of leaks (fuel, hydraulic
fluid, lubricants, and similar compounds) available to perform the type of well installation
required, and
• have experienced personnel who are OSHA-trained to work on hazardous waste sites.
Before the start of field tasks, the TRC field representative is responsible for coordinating the
following items with the drilling subcontractor personnel:
• familiarizing the subcontractor with the objectives of the investigation,
• providing and reviewing a copy of the project-specific work plan with the subcontractor,
• providing and reviewing a copy of the project HASP with the subcontractor,
• determining overhead hazards including power lines, buildings, trees and verifying local/city
regulatory requirements if tree roots will be damaged, and
• performing a daily health and safety review with the subcontractor.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 9 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Compliance with state and federal requirements is required prior to the installation of monitoring
wells. TRC is responsible for ensuring that all required permits have been obtained prior to the
start of work. If state regulations require the driller to obtain drilling permits and/or utility
clearance approvals, TRC personnel must review the documentation prior to the start of work.
This documentation may include, but is not limited to, the following:
• notification and approval to drill/install a monitoring well (access agreement),
• registration or notification of the well installation,
• permit for water withdrawals,
• well abandonment when the project is completed, and
• applicable dig-safe permits or approvals (utility clearance).
Copies of any permits and notification forms must be provided to TRC.
2.2 Materials
Unless approved in writing by TRC, no lubricants or glue shall be used in any manner that could
possibly contaminate samples, boreholes, or monitoring wells. The following provides a detailed
description of the key features of well installation and how their proper selection and use is
necessary to complete an effective groundwater monitoring well.
2.2.1 Well Screens
Monitoring well screens most commonly consist of two-inch diameter, flush-threaded,
Schedule 40, PVC, machine-cut, slotted, wire wrap and/or V-wire screen. Up to two-inch or
smaller diameter PVC is often used for wells installed using direct-push drilling methods. Four-
inch diameter (and larger) wells are most typically used to accommodate larger pumps for
groundwater and/or non-aqueous phase liquid (NAPL) recovery – but may also be used for
groundwater monitoring. The screen slot size should be selected to retain a minimum of 90% of
the filter pack material (see below). The most commonly used slot size is 0.010-inch (0.25 mm)
slot openings.
In wells installed at depths greater than 100 feet, Schedule 80 PVC well screens can be used to
minimize narrowing of the slots from the increased weight of the riser string. Note that the inside
diameter of Schedule 80 riser pipe is slightly smaller than Schedule 40. That difference may
cause difficulty when inserting some downhole monitoring equipment or instrumentation.
PVC screens can be adversely affected (typically by weakening or swelling) by concentrations of
organic solvents that exceed 25% of the solubility limit. If such subsurface contaminant
conditions are possible, the type and concentration of solvent should be researched in more detail
prior to well installation. Stainless steel is also a common choice for well screens, but under
certain conditions, metals (including iron, nickel, lead, and chromium) have been known to leach
from stainless steel screens; in addition, stainless steel screens are costly. Other materials or sizes
may be specified in the project-specific work plan as required by site conditions or local
regulations.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 10 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Manufactured prepacked well screens are commercially available and generally consist of a
standard, slotted Schedule 40 PVC well screen pipe (typically 0.5 to 2.0 inch diameter) wrapped
in a stainless steel mesh filled with filter sand (typically 20-40 grade silica sand). Additional
finer sand pack is commonly added directly above the installed prepack as a grout barrier. Since
the sand is packed around the slotted PVC before the well screen is installed, using prepacked
screens guarantees that sand will be located directly adjacent to and uniformly around the well
screen. Prepacked well screens are typically installed by direct push drilling techniques. The use
of prepacked well screens generally makes well installation quicker and more efficient than
traditional methods. However, their use for permanent groundwater wells for chemical
groundwater quality monitoring should first be verified to determine consistency with project-
specific and state regulatory requirements.
2.2.2 Riser and End Caps
Monitoring well riser and end caps will consist of appropriately sized, flush-threaded material
compatible with the well screen. Other materials or sizes may be specified in the project-specific
work plan as required by site conditions or local regulations. The top cap should be vented to
allow the passage of air, unless the well is to be installed at or below the ground surface (i.e.,
“flush mount well”). In that case, the top of the well should be sealed with an expansion cap/plug
or a protective watertight manhole provided to prevent the inflow of storm water runoff into the
well.
2.2.3 Filter Pack
A filter pack (also known as “sand pack” or “gravel pack”) will be required in any formation
other than coarse sand and gravels containing less than 10% fines (silts and clays) by weight. In
such formations (i.e. well-to-moderately sorted sands and gravels), a filter pack may not be
necessary and the formation can be allowed to collapse around the screen; however, most
regulatory guidance requires a filter pack be constructed. The purpose of the filter pack is to
inhibit transport of fine-grained formation material into the well screen and stabilize the
formation so as to avoid excessive caving/sloughing during installation and development. The
introduction of coarser material than the natural formation also results in increasing the effective
diameter of the well.
The filter pack material shall be composed of washed, graded, commercially-produced silica
sand. Based upon field estimates of grain size distribution of the screened aquifer materials, a
sand pack should be selected. A detailed discussion of filter pack determination is found in
Nielsen and Schalla (2006). ASTM Standard D5092, Standard Practice for Design and
Installation of Groundwater Monitoring Wells in Aquifers (ASTM 2004), may also be consulted
for further guidance on specifications for sand packs for various conditions. If grain size
information is not known for the formation, several sand packs should be available during well
construction based upon known or presumed geological information for the site. The most
common choice of filter pack sand is 20-40 mesh for 0.010-inch screen slots.
One to two feet of clean, fine sand can be used (required in some states) as a buffer between the
annular seal and the filter pack to provide added protection that grout invasion into the filter pack
and/or the well screen will not occur. This layer is sometimes referred to as the “secondary filter
pack.” The sand should be well sorted quartz sand; 40-60 mesh sand is typically used for this
purpose.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 11 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.2.4 Annular Seal
An annular seal, typically a minimum of 2 feet thick, is placed above the filter pack and screen to
inhibit the boring from serving as a pathway for the vertical movement of water. Without an
annular seal, the wellbore annulus can serve to transport contaminants between geologic units (for
example, from unconfined to confined aquifer or from the vadose zone to the groundwater). The
annular seal will consist of bentonite pellets, chips, granules, or slurry (produced from powdered
bentonite). Bentonite swells rapidly when in contact with water. Coated bentonite pellets are
preferable in situations where the bentonite must travel through a water column greater than 30
feet, because uncoated pellets may expand and bridge the annulus above the desired depth.
Larger bentonite chips may also be used since they also swell at a slower rate than pellets and
granules. The selection of the form of bentonite will depend upon the location of the top of the
filter pack relative to the water table. If the seal is placed in the vadose zone, the seal will be
hydrated with potable water. The volume of water necessary to hydrate the bentonite chips or
pellets is dependent on the pellet size, volume of pellets used, and manufacturer’s requirements.
Granular bentonite is the best choice in situations where the seal is placed in the vadose zone –
particularly in arid climates. Other forms of bentonite require longer contact times with water to
form an adequate seal. Note that if the seal may be exposed to NAPL, it can shrink and crack. In
addition, in situations with total dissolved solids (TDS) concentrations >5,000 parts per million
(ppm) or chloride concentrations >8,000 ppm, bentonite will not swell; in these situations, neat
cement should be considered as an alternative seal.
2.2.5 Grout
In certain wells, the annular space above the bentonite seal to the ground surface may be grouted
with a mixture of 95% Portland cement or equivalent, and 5% bentonite grout, mixed with
potable water to the specifications of the concrete manufacturer. This equates to 6 gallons of
water added to each 94-pound sack of Type I Portland cement with 3- to 8% powdered bentonite
added to improve the workability of the slurry. Bentonite should be prehydrated before adding to
the cement to limit clumping. Note that bentonite does not swell considerably when mixed with
cement. Grout is generally mixed in a container or barrel using pumps and may include an
electric paddle or rotating vane blender.
Note: Grout mixtures may vary based on applicable regulatory requirements or site-specific
subsurface conditions.
2.2.6 Surface Protective Casing
The primary purpose of a protective surface completion is to prevent surface water runoff from
entering the well, and to prevent unauthorized access to the well. There are two types of
protective casings used for surface completions of monitoring wells: (1) the above ground
completion and (2) the below ground or flush-mount manhole-type completion, which is typically
used in high traffic or public areas where the well could be damaged by equipment or is deemed
unsightly.
An above-grade surface completion (i.e., a well monument) consists of rigid surface casing
(typically galvanized or steel coated with rust-proofing or anodized aluminum). The inside
diameter of the casing should be at least 2 inches larger than the well casing and be long enough
to extend 2.5 to 3 feet above and below the ground surface. The casing is set in the annular seal
Above-Ground Completion
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 12 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
and/or the surface seal that consists of either concrete (in warm to moderate climates) or bentonite
(in cold climates). Bollards are often used around the aboveground surface casing to prevent
vehicular damage.
The surface casing shall have a cap with provision for a lock that cannot be easily removed and
leave at least 3 to 6 inches of clearance between the top of the well casing and the cap. The base
of the casing, at the point where it shall extend above the concrete pad, should have a small weep
hole drilled through the casing to prevent the build-up of precipitation or ice between the steel
casing and well riser.
Flush-mount well completions are generally selected or may be required in areas where vehicular
traffic or equipment operation is an important consideration and an above-ground completion
may not be a viable option. Depending on the expected activity in the area of the flush-mount
completion and the existing surface conditions, the strength and durability of the completion will
need to be designed appropriately. An appropriate completion may not be noticed, but a poor
completion will generate negative comments with increasing wear and tear. In general, flush-
mount completions should be located away from local low areas that drain or accumulate water, if
at all possible.
Flush-Mount Completion
Well completions flush with the pavement or ground surface may be accomplished by various
means including the use of well can cylinders or elaborate vaults, and sufficient concrete to
stabilize the structure within its surroundings. Regardless of the surface completion, the interior
of the flush-mount completion should include the following characteristics: 1) rubber gasket to
provide a cover seal; 2) locking capability for well security; 3) drainage management; and 4)
sufficient interior space to accommodate any equipment (e.g., dedicated pump) that may be
placed in the well.
Flush-mount well completions should provide a minimum of 2 inches of annular space around the
outside of the well (i.e., a 6-inch diameter vault for a 2-inch well). The protective steel “skirt”
should extent at least 1 foot below the top of the well vault. As most flush-mount wells are
installed in paved areas, the concrete used to set the well vault should be compatible with the
bearing capacity of the existing pavement. Depending on location considerations, the well
completion may be sloped slightly away from the well or completed truly flush with the
surroundings. The inside of the manhole annulus should be filled with a drainage layer of sand or
gravel with a weep hole so water that accumulates in the vault will drain.
2.3 Monitoring Well Installation
Boreholes to be completed as monitoring wells will be advanced and logged in accordance with
RMD SOP 005 (Visual-Manual Procedure for Soil Description and Identification). Equipment
used to advance the boring and install the monitoring well will be decontaminated prior to the
start of the boring.
All downhole well construction materials (with the exception of the protective casing) should be
clean prior to use at the site. In general, all well materials (other than filter sand, seals, and grout)
are typically provided individually plastic-wrapped by the manufacturer. If required by the
project-specific work plan or at the discretion of the TRC inspector, well materials (other than
filter sand, seals, and grout) may be steam-cleaned, rinsed with deionized water, and covered in
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 13 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
plastic prior to installation of the well to prevent the introduction of foreign contaminants into the
aquifer. Decontamination and bagging can also be conducted by the manufacturer, prior to
delivery to the site. Furthermore, well construction materials shall be properly stored until use
to ensure their good condition and cleanliness.
2.3.1 Procedures
Monitoring wells will be installed by the drilling subcontractor under the direction of a qualified
TRC geologist, environmental scientist, or engineer. Monitoring wells will be installed using the
following general procedures which may be dependent on the site-specific requirements.
1. Prior to mobilizing to the site, the construction details of the well to be installed will be
provided to the driller, including well identifiers, locations of wells, boring diameter, well
materials, screen slot size, screen lengths/depths, riser length, well depths, filter pack
materials and depths, annular seal, grouting requirements, and well surface completion
requirements.
2. All well materials shall be inspected to ensure that they are new and clean prior to
installation.
3. Sections of screen and riser will be threaded together and lowered into the borehole to the
predetermined depth. It is preferable to keep the drilling string or temporary casing in the
hole while well materials are placed and slowly remove them as the well materials are
installed. Centralizers may be used on the well riser in deeper wells to ensure proper well
placement within the center of the borehole. Centralizers should not be placed within the
location of the annular seal. Once the well is completed, the well cap should have a hole
drilled in the top for venting, if possible.
4. The selected well packing materials will be introduced into the annulus in a manner so as to
ensure an adequate well pack and seal. Approximately 0.5 to 1.0 foot of filter pack may be
placed at the base of the boring to establish a stable base for the well materials. The thickness
of each layer of well materials placed in the annulus will be measured with a weighted
measurement tape and recorded to the nearest 0.10 foot. The weighted tape may also act as a
tamping device to reduce bridging. Augers or casing will be removed sequentially during
sand pack installation and the well will remain at the desired depth during auger or casing
withdrawal.
The primary filter pack may be placed using a rigid tremie pipe to minimize the potential for
sand bridging in the annulus. The primary filter pack should extend at least 2 feet above the
top of the well screened interval. One to 2 feet of fine sand as the secondary filter pack can
then be placed above the primary filter pack (if required). However, the height of the filter
pack may differ from that specified here due to shallow well depth limitations and project-
specific work plan requirements. The secondary filter pack should not extend into a different
aquifer unit as the primary filter pack. The depth of each interval of filter pack and volume of
material used must be recorded on the Monitoring Well Installation Form and/or the field
book.
5. The annular bentonite seal installation technique will vary with the depth of the water table.
The appropriate type of bentonite will be selected to suit the objectives of the installation
program. The bentonite should be poured slowly into the annular space to minimize
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 14 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
bridging, with periodic tamping. The volume of the annular space should be calculated and
compared to the volume of bentonite used as a check to make sure bridging in the annular
space has not occurred. If a tremie pipe is used for installation of the annular seal, either
coated pellets or slurry should be used because bridging may occur as the bentonite swells.
The preferred method of annular seal placement is by using the drilling rods or augers as a
conductor casing, except in deep or difficult wells. The annular seal typically ranges from 1
to 5 feet in thickness. Annular seals in wells installed above the water table will be hydrated
typically with 10 to 20 gallons (added in 5-gallon increments) of water and allowed to swell
prior to the emplacement of a cement-bentonite grout mixture (if the well is to be grouted).
In arid or highly permeable formations, the bentonite pellets should be allowed to swell for 1
hour. The high TDS concentration of cement grout does not act to hydrate bentonite, so it is
important to allow the bentonite to hydrate fully in water. The level and volume of
material(s) used for the annular seal are then recorded on the Monitoring Well Installation
Form and/or the field book.
6. Once the annular seal is sufficiently hydrated, a cement-bentonite grout (or other type
depending on local regulation) is placed to fill the remaining annulus of the boring.
Depending on the depth of the well and water table, the grout may be tremied into the desired
location from the bottom up. A side-discharge tremie is preferred so as to not disturb the
annular seal. The tremie can remain near the bottom until grouting is completed. Grout
requires 8 to 48 hours to set, but it does not become rigid like cement. The grout mixture
(percentage of cement to bentonite) will be recorded and will be in accordance with the
project-specific work plan or recommended guidance and Section 2.2.5 of this SOP. The
grout will be pumped into the boring around the well materials to the surface. If necessary,
after solidification of the grout and settling occurs, the grout may need to be topped off with
additional grout mixture. The need for additional grout will be based on the intended surface
completion for the well. The composition and volume of material(s) used for the grout are
then recorded on the Monitoring Well Installation Form and/or the field book.
7. For wells finished above-grade, the protective casing may be cemented in place as described
in Section 2.2.6 or completed with grout and bentonite in areas subject to frost heave. The
protective casing should be in a plumb position and installed with at least half of the casing
below ground and below the frost line (3- to 5 feet below ground surface). The protective
casing should have a granular material placed in the base and a weep hole drilled through the
casing to allow drainage of water that accumulates in the protective casing. Once completed,
the well will be locked and typically allowed to settle for a minimum of 24 hours prior to well
development. After well installation, development of a well should occur as soon as
reasonably possible to enable representative sampling within the parameters of the project
schedule. Some regulatory agencies require minimum timeframes for the newly-installed
well materials, such as the bentonite seal or grout column, to cure before initiating well
development (e.g., 24 or 48 hours).
In some instances, a concrete pad is often constructed around wells to provide a working
surface and more significant protective surface seal; this concrete pad is required by law in
some states. These pads should be a minimum of 4 inches in thickness and are typically a
minimum of 2 feet by 2 feet. It is recommended that the concrete pad extend 4 to 6 inches
below the ground surface within six inches of the borehole. In areas of traffic or periodic
mowing, three or four guard posts (“bumper guards” or bollards) may be positioned around
the well to protect the well from equipment. The ground or pad around the well head should
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 15 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
be sloped away from the well to promote drainage away from the surface completion. The
guard posts consist of 3- to 4-inch diameter steel pipes set 3 to 4 feet outside the concrete pad.
The pipes are set at least 3 feet in the ground and are filled with concrete. The well “stickup”
and the guard posts should be painted a bright color (typically “safety yellow”) for visibility.
The type and details of the surface completion should be sketched, photographed or otherwise
recorded on the Monitoring Well Installation Form and/or the field book.
8. Depending on the location of the well, flush-mounted utility boxes (i.e., well vaults or
manholes) or above-ground, steel, protective casings with locking caps will be used to
complete the well. Flush-mount wells should be located outside of areas that accumulate
ponded water or areas of runoff, if at all possible, to minimize the potential for well damage
by freeze/thaw conditions or for surface water to flow into the completed well.
The well top should extend a minimum of 4 inches from the bottom of the cement or grout
base with sufficient distance to the vault cover to accommodate any equipment (e.g.,
dedicated pump) that may be placed in the well. The well vault should also include a rubber
gasket to make it water tight and is typically tightened with lug bolts.
Flush-mount well vaults should provide a minimum of 2 inches of free space around the
outside of the well (i.e., a 6-inch diameter vault for a 2-inch well). The protective, steel
“skirt” should extent at least 1 foot below the top of the well vault. The vault will be sealed
in concrete or cement grout that extends 4 to 6 inches away from the vault and extends a
minimum of 1 foot below the frost depth. As most flush-mount wells are installed in paved
areas, the concrete used to set the well vault should be compatible with the bearing capacity
of the existing pavement. The vault should be set slightly higher than the existing grade and
the concrete sloped (1- to 2% slope) away from the manhole to promote drainage away from
the well. In cold-weather areas where snow removal occurs, the well may have to be set flush
with the pavement to avoid damage. The inside of the manhole annulus should be filled with
a drainage layer of sand or gravel with a weep hole, so water that accumulates in the vault
will drain. Below-grade wells should be fitted with a locking, water-tight friction cap or
expandable plug because below-grade wells often fill with water.
9. The wells should be permanently marked with the well identification number either on the
cover or an appropriate place (i.e., in concrete pad) that will not be easily damaged and/or
vandalized. Keyed-alike weatherproof brass padlocks should be installed on each well
casing.
10. The manufacturer, type, weight, and number of bags or other containers of each type of well
sand, cement, bentonite, and any other grout materials should be counted and documented on
the Monitoring Well Installation Form and/or the field book as a means of determining if the
amount used is consistent with the information obtained by the drilling subcontractor.
11. All information concerning well installation details will be recorded on a Monitoring Well
Installation Form (examples provided in Attachment A).
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 16 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
There are minimal wastes other than general refuse and PPE that is generated during well
installation. Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization
requirements for investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the
materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The following quality assurance/quality control procedures apply:
• Check well construction materials to ensure these materials conform with the project-specific
work plan and project specifications.
• Operate field instruments according to the manufacturers’ manuals.
• Calibrate field instruments at the proper frequency, if utilized.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Record well installation measurements on field forms or in a field book. See Attachment A for an
example of a Monitoring Well Installation Form.
The following additional information should be recorded in the field book and/or Monitoring
Well Installation Form:
• Well/piezometer or monitoring point identification number
• Well permit number (if applicable)
• Date of well installation
• Type of drilling method used and model number of rig
• Ground surface elevation (if known)
• Diameter and depth of borehole
• Depth of well bottom
• Depth of top and bottom of screened interval
• Depth of top and bottom of filter pack
• Depth of top and bottom of secondary filter pack (if used)
• Depth of top and bottom of annular seal
• Depth of top and bottom of grout seal
• Type, diameter, length, and screen slot size of well screen
• Type, diameter and length of riser
• Type, diameter, and length of casing (if used)
• Type, gradation, and volume/mass of filter pack
• Type and volume/mass of secondary filter pack (if used)
• Method used for filter pack placement
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 17 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Well lock type (i.e., padlock) and key number
• Type and volume of bentonite or other material used for annular seal
• Method used for annular seal placement
• Type, volume, and mix percentages of grout used
• Method used for grout placement
• Source of water used
• Type and length of protective casing
• Type and dimensions of well vault
• Type, number and array of protective posts (if used)
• Type and dimensions of surface completion/seal
• Measurement of “stickup” above or below ground
• Initial depth to groundwater
• Other pertinent observations
• Measurement equipment used
• Decontamination procedures used
6.0 REFERENCES
ASTM. 2004. Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Groundwater Monitoring Wells
in Aquifers, ASTM Standard D 5092, ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA 2004, pp. 20.
EPA. 1987. A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods, EPA/540/P-87/001, US
EPA. August 1987.
Nielsen, D.M. and Ronald Schalla. 2006. Design and Installation of Ground-Water Monitoring
Wells. In Practical Handbook of Environmental Site Characterization and Ground-Water
Monitoring. Second Edition. David M. Nielsen ed. CRC Press. Boca Raton, FL. pp. 339 – 805.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 JANUARY 2014 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 18 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT A
EXAMPLE MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION FORMS
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 19 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 20 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 21 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 22 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ATTACHMENT B
SOP FACT SHEET
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 23 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Monitoring Well Installation Page 24 of 24
Procedure No: RMD 007 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 1 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Groundwater Sampling
RMD 009
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
August 2014
Authorization Signatures
Technical Review
Cinnamon Smith
Date
8/26/14
Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
8/26/14
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 2 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 4
1.1 Scope & Applicability ............................................................................ 4
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 4
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 4
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 7
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 9
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 9
1.6.1 Pre-Sampling Issues ..................................................................... 9
1.6.2 General Purging and Sampling Issues ........................................ 11
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ..................................................................... 13
2.0 PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 13
2.1 Pre-sampling Activities ....................................................................... 13
2.2 Groundwater Purging Activities .......................................................... 14
2.2.1 Multiple-Volume Purging Approach ............................................. 14
2.2.2 Low-flow Purging Approach ........................................................ 16
2.2.3 Field Parameter Stabilization During Purging ............................. 17
2.2.4 Special Considerations During Purging ...................................... 18
2.2.5 Equipment Considerations for Purging ....................................... 19
2.2.5.1 Purging with a Suction Pump ................................................. 19
2.2.5.2 Purging with a Submersible Pump ......................................... 20
2.2.5.3 Purging with a Bailer .............................................................. 22
2.3 Post-purging Groundwater Sample Collection .................................... 23
2.3.1 Sample Collection Order ............................................................. 23
2.3.2 VOC Sample Collection .............................................................. 23
2.3.3 Non-VOC Sample Collection ....................................................... 24
2.3.4 Field Filtering .............................................................................. 24
2.4 Groundwater Sample Collection Without Purging (Passive Sampling)24
2.5 Post-sampling Activities ...................................................................... 26
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 3 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 26
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 27
4.1 Field Duplicates .................................................................................. 27
4.2 Equipment Blanks............................................................................... 27
4.3 Trip Blanks ......................................................................................... 27
4.4 MS/MSDs and MS/Duplicates ............................................................ 28
4.5 Temperature Blanks ........................................................................... 28
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 28
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 29
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 29
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Groundwater Field Parameter Stabilization Criteria for
Selected Jurisdictions
Attachment B Example Groundwater Field Data Records
Attachment C SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 4 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope & Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to provide TRC personnel with general
guidance in performing groundwater sampling activities. This SOP details equipment and
sampling procedures for low-flow sampling, multi-volume purge sampling and passive diffusion
bag sampling from monitoring wells. Various regulatory agencies and project-specific work
plans may have specific requirements (e.g., equipment/instrument, flow rate, etc.) that may be
applicable and take precedence, depending on the program.
The objective of groundwater sampling is to obtain a representative sample of water from a
saturated zone or groundwater-bearing unit (i.e., aquifer) with minimal disturbance of
groundwater chemistry. This requires that the sample being collected is representative of
groundwater within the formation surrounding the well bore as opposed to stagnant water within
the well casing or within the filter pack immediately surrounding the well casing.
1.2 Summary of Method
There are three general approaches to groundwater purging/sampling that can be used to obtain a
representative groundwater sample for analysis: 1) the low-flow or micropurge method where the
mixing of the stagnant water is minimized using low-flow pumping rates during the collection of
the groundwater sample; 2) the multiple well volume removal approach in which the stagnant
water is removed from the well and the filter pack prior to sample collection; and 3) the passive
sampler procedure where water quality equilibration with the surroundings is achieved through
deployment of the passive sampler for a sufficient amount of time prior to sampling.
For low-flow and multiple well volume removal, there are various types of equipment available
to perform groundwater sampling. The most common of these are the submersible pump,
peristaltic pump, and bailer. However, the equipment selected and the purge method used, if any,
will depend on project goals, data quality objectives (DQOs), hydrogeologic conditions, and
regulatory requirements. Care should be taken when choosing the sampling procedures and
device(s), as some procedures have the potential to affect the representativeness of the sample
more than others. For repeated monitoring events, the sampling methodology and operating
equipment employed should be consistent to minimize potential variability due to sampling
procedures. The type of sampling method utilized is dependent upon site-specific conditions and
it is not within the scope of this document to recommend a specific methodology. Information on
applicability of sampling methods can be found on Interstate Technology & Regulatory Council
(ITRC) and United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) websites.
1.3 Equipment
The following equipment is commonly used to collect groundwater samples from a monitoring
well. Site-specific conditions may warrant the use of additional equipment or deletion of items
from this list.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 5 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE) as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
Electronic water level indicator capable of measuring to 0.01 foot accuracy
Oil/water interface probe
Extra batteries for water level/interface probe
Submersible pump with low-flow capabilities (less than 1 liter/min) constructed of inert
materials (e.g., stainless steel and Teflon®), such as a bladder pump (with sufficient
quantity of bladders, o-rings, grab plates, etc.)
Peristaltic pump
Source of power for use with submersible or peristaltic pump (e.g., 12-volt battery,
compressor, generator, compressed gas tanks, etc.)
Flow controller for use with submersible pump (varies depending on type of pump used)
Bottom-filling bailer constructed of inert materials (i.e., polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride
[PVC], stainless steel or Teflon®)
Bailer cord or wire (recommended Teflon-coated, stainless steel cable; bailer wire; or
contaminant-free rope with a Teflon-coated stainless steel leader to connect bailer and
rope)
Tubing (Teflon, Teflon–lined polyethylene, or high density polyethylene [HDPE],
type dependent upon project objectives)
Silicone tubing (only used for peristaltic pump head and/or flow-through cell
connections)
Water quality meter(s) capable of measuring parameters, such as pH, temperature,
specific conductivity, oxidation-reduction potential (ORP), and dissolved oxygen (DO)
Flow-through cell
T-connector
Turbidity meter
Passive sampling device (and any device-specific accessories)
- Passive diffusion bags (PDBs)
- Tether (stainless steel cable or marine-grade polyethylene rope), well cap, and weights,
unless already installed
- Funnel (Fill kit)
- PVC cable ties
- Tool to cut cable ties
- PVC discharge tubes
- Tether reel
Well lock keys
Bolt cutters
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 6 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Appropriate tools for equipment and to open well box (e.g., socket wrench, pry bar, etc.)
Containers with lids for purge water (i.e., 5-gallon buckets, drums, etc.)
Stopwatch or timer
Graduated measuring container appropriately sized to measure flow rate
Sample bottle labels
Laboratory-grade water (can request from lab – for equipment blanks)
Chain-of-custody (COC) forms
Sample cooler(s)
Photoionization detector (PID) or flame ionization detector (FID) for well head
monitoring
Sample containers (may be supplied by the laboratory depending upon the regulatory
program): The proper containers should be determined in conjunction with the analytical
laboratory in the planning stages of the project. If not included in sample containers
provided by laboratory, sample preservatives will need to be kept with sample containers,
and added to sample containers prior to sample collection.
Field book and/or Groundwater Field Data Record (multiple copies)
Filtration equipment
In-line filter (0.45 micron [µm]) or as otherwise required by the project-specific work
plan.
Bubble wrap/Bubble wrap bags
Lint-free, non-abrasive, disposable towels (e.g., Kimwipes)
Indelible marking pens
Plastic bags (e.g., Ziploc®)
Ice
Teflon tape
Plastic sheeting or large trash bags which can be cut open
Umbrella, tent, or equivalent for shading equipment (particularly the flow-through cell)
from sunlight or blocking rain
Equipment decontamination supplies
Container for bailing water out of water-logged road boxes or well vaults
Map of well locations and well construction data
Copy of field notes from previous sampling event for reference
Project-specific work plan
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 7 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.4 Definitions
Bailer A cylindrical device suspended from a rope or cable, which is used to
remove water, non-aqueous phase liquid (NAPL), sediment or other
materials from a well or open borehole. Usually equipped with some
type of check valve at the base to allow water, NAPL, and/or
sediment to enter the bailer and be retained as it is lifted to the
surface. A bailer may be made in varying diameters; however a
bailer that fits in a two-inch well is the most common. In some
instances a < 1-inch diameter bailer (a.k.a. pencil bailer) is used for
small diameter wells.
Borehole A hole drilled into the soil or bedrock using a drill rig or similar
equipment.
Dense Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (DNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is denser than water and, therefore, sinks
to the bottom of the water column.
Depth To Water (DTW) The distance to the groundwater surface from an established
measuring point.
Drawdown The response to purging/pumping a well resulting in the lowering of
groundwater within the water column in the well or in a water-
bearing zone.
FID
Flow-Through Cell
An instrument that uses a flame to break down volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) into ions that can be measured.
The container used to immerse the multi-parameter probes in well
purge water during pre-sampling well purging. The flow-through cell
is usually made of transparent acrylic and is connected to the end of
the discharge tubing creating an in-line, sealed container in which
purge water circulates around the measurement probes. The
discharge from the pump prior to the flow-through cell may be fitted
with a check valve or T-connector for collection of water for turbidity
measurement.
Flush Mount The type of well completion where the riser terminates at or below
grade. Flush-mounted wells are typically completed with a “curb
box” which is an “at-grade” enclosure designed to protect the well
riser.
Light Non-aqueous
Phase Liquid (LNAPL)
Separate-phase product that is less dense than water and therefore
floats on the surface of the water.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 8 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Monitoring Well A well made from a PVC pipe, or other appropriate material, with
slotted screen installed across or within a saturated zone. A
monitoring well is typically constructed with a PVC or stainless steel
pipe in unconsolidated deposits and with steel casing in bedrock.
PID An instrument that uses an ultraviolet light source to break down
VOCs into ions that can be measured.
Piezometer A well made from PVC or metal with a slotted screen installed across
or within a saturated zone. Piezometers are primarily installed to
monitor changes in the potentiometric surface elevation.
Potentiometric Surface A surface representing the hydraulic head of groundwater.
Protective Casing The pipe installed around the well riser that sticks up from the ground
(above-grade completions) or is flush with the ground (at-grade
completions, e.g., curb box) in order to protect the well integrity.
Protective casings are typically constructed of steel or aluminum and
usually closeable with a locking cover/hasp to maintain well integrity
between sampling events.
Recharge Rate The rate at which groundwater returns to the water column in the
well.
Separate-Phase Product A liquid that does not easily dissolve in water. Separate-phase
product can be more dense (i.e., DNAPL) or less dense (i.e., LNAPL)
than water and, therefore, can be found at different depths in the
water column.
Static Water Level Level at which water resides in a well when the water level is at
equilibrium with atmospheric pressure.
Well Cover The cap or lid constructed at the end of the protective casing (above-
grade completions) or flush-mounted curb box (ground surface
completions) to secure access to the well. Well covers for stick-up
wells are often equipped with a hasp to accommodate a padlock.
Well covers for flush-mounted road boxes or vaults are opened and
closed using a threaded bolt.
Well Filter Pack A material composed of clean silica sand or sand and gravel of
selected grain size and gradation that is placed in the annulus between
the screened interval and the borehole wall in a well for the purpose
of retaining and stabilizing the formation material.
Well Plug/Expansion
Plug
The plug fashioned into a cap placed into the top of the well riser
(e.g., J-Plug). Well plugs are usually designed with an expandable
gasket that is activated by turning a locking wing nut or removable
key latch, closing a snap cap or engaging a magnetic clutch cap to
seal the well riser.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 9 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Well Riser Sections of blank (non-slotted) pipe that extend from the well screen
to or above the ground surface.
Well Screen Pipe (typically PVC or stainless steel) used to retain the formation or
filter pack materials outside of the well. The pipe has openings/slots
of a uniform width, orientation, and spacing. The openings/slots can
vary based on formation and filter pack material specifications.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE as defined in
the HASP.
The well head should be pre-screened using a PID/FID to avoid inhalation of contaminants
venting from the well. If monitoring results indicate sustained elevated concentrations of organic
contaminants, the level of PPE may need to be increased in accordance with the HASP or work
could be conducted upwind of the well.
When present, special care should be taken to avoid contact with LNAPL or DNAPL. The use of
an air monitoring program, as well as the proper PPE designated by the site-specific HASP, can
identify and/or mitigate potential health hazards.
Implementing this SOP may require the use of reagents and/or compressed gases for the
calibration and operation of field equipment. These substances may be hazardous and TRC
personnel must appropriately handle, store, and dispose of them at all times. Skin contact with
liquid from preserved sample bottles must be avoided as they may contain strong acids or bases.
When filling bottles pre-preserved with acid (e.g., hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid),
vapors may be released and should not be inhaled. Do not allow bottles with acid to be exposed
to elevated atmospheric temperatures or sunlight as this will facilitate fumes from the acids.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
The following sections highlight issues that may be encountered and should be discussed with the
Project Manager prior to mobilization into the field.
1.6.1 Pre-Sampling Issues
(a) Selection of equipment for groundwater sampling should consider multiple factors, including:
DTW, well specifications (e.g., depth and length of well screen intervals), desired flow rate,
possible weather conditions, type and concentration of contaminant(s), and
remoteness/accessibility to the site. The benefits and limits of each type of groundwater
sampling equipment should be fully reviewed during project planning or prior to mobilization
if the project-specific work plan does not identify the required equipment. For example,
peristaltic pumps are incapable of withdrawing water in wells in which the depth to water is
greater than approximately 20-25 feet below ground surface (bgs).
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 10 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
(b) If the screen or open borehole is greater than 10 feet in length, consult the project-specific
work plans for the target sampling interval. Generally, pumps are either placed in the middle
of the saturated zone if the water level is below the top of the screen or in the middle of the
screen interval if the water level is above the top of the screen.
(c) The need for redevelopment of the monitoring wells should be evaluated periodically in
accordance with the project-specific requirements. This is assessed by comparing the
measured total depth of the well with the constructed depth. If the measured depth is less
than the constructed depth, this may indicate siltation of the well and/or the presence of an
obstruction in the well. If it is determined that redevelopment is necessary, it should be
performed in accordance with RMD SOP 006, Well Development. The time necessary for a
well to restabilize after redevelopment will be determined on a project-specific basis and may
depend on regulatory requirements.
(d) During the total well depth measurement, there is the potential for sediment, if present at the
bottom of the well, to be disturbed, thereby increasing the turbidity of the groundwater.
Therefore, the total well depth measurement should be collected the day prior to collecting
groundwater samples, if possible.
(e) Use caution if using compressed gas cylinders (e.g., nitrogen, carbon dioxide) for
purging/sampling of groundwater. Check for leaks around regulator connections by spraying
soapy water on the connections. If a leak is discovered, the connection to the regulator
should be disassembled, wrapped with Teflon tape, and reconnected to the cylinder. If the
leak continues, the regulator should be replaced. It should be noted that Department of
Transportation (DOT) regulations apply to the transportation and handling of compressed gas
cylinders (see 49 Code of Federal Regulations [CFR] 171). Never transport cylinders with
the regulator attached. Replace the cylinder valve cover on the compressed gas cylinder
before transport.
(f) All field personnel must be made aware of the water level measurement reference point being
used for each well at a site (i.e., must be clearly marked) in order to ensure collection of
comparable data between events.
(g) Bolt cutters may be necessary to remove rusted locks. Dipping rusted locks in a soapy
solution may help with opening difficult locks. Oils and other products containing VOCs
(e.g., WD-40) should not be used on locks as these compounds may cause contamination of
water samples collected at the well. Replace cut locks and note in the field book.
(h) Prior to accessing the well, physical conditions around the well head should be assessed for
situations that might result in cross-contamination or the introduction of foreign
material/debris into the well. For example, flush-mounted wells may have water or road
sand/salt/debris inside the curb box. Rodents and insects (e.g., bees, wasps) have been known
to construct nests within the protective casing of a well. If bees, wasps, or other insects are
encountered, insecticides should be used with caution as the chemicals may cause
contamination of water samples collected at the well. If water or foreign material is
introduced into the well, the Project Manager should be immediately notified.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 11 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.6.2 General Purging and Sampling Issues
(a) Prior to installation of a submersible pump into a well, ensure that the tubing is properly
sealed to the pump to avoid losing the pump down the well and to prevent escape of air or
water from the pump, which could result in poor pump performance and the aeration of the
well water. Do not do this by tugging on tubing. Never lower pumps into the well using only
tubing; instead a security line attached to the pump is required to prevent potentially losing
the pump down the well.
(b) A submersible pump should not be lowered to the bottom of the well to avoid stirring up any
sediment at the bottom of the well and prevent getting the pump stuck (fine sediment
accumulation in the bottom of the well can create a strong suction with a flat bottom pump
such as a bladder pump, which may require jetting to retrieve the pump).
(c) Start with the lowest pumping rate possible and increase until a sustainable rate is reached.
Avoid high pumping rates (> 1 liter/min), as this could lead to damage of the well filter pack,
if present. Where practical and/or possible, refer to previous sampling events to establish
consistent flow rates.
(d) Some regulatory agencies may have concern about the use of peristaltic pumps when
sampling for VOCs due to the potential for loss of VOCs during sampling and alteration of
other water quality parameters such as pH and alkalinity. Samplers should review the
requirements in the project-specific work plan and/or regulatory guidelines prior to
performing the work. Explicit approval to use a peristaltic pump for the collection of VOCs
may be required by the governing regulatory agency. An option may be to use the “soda
straw” method to collect the VOC sample which does not allow the water to go through the
pump head:
(1) After purging the well with the peristaltic pump, collect all fractions except VOCs
from the outlet side of the pump (i.e., VOCs will be collected last instead of first).
(2) Turn the pump off.
(3) Change into clean gloves.
(4) Disconnect the tubing coming out of the well from the inlet side of the pump and
immediately put a finger over the end of this tubing to prevent water from draining
out of the tubing.
(5) Retrieve tubing from the well, coiling it in one hand as it is being retrieved (maintain
finger over end of tubing).
(6) Open VOC vials. Briefly remove finger from end of tubing to allow water to flow
into vial. Replace finger on end of tubing to stop flow. Do this for remaining VOC
vials.
(e) In the event that a well cannot be purged and sampled with a pump, the alternative to
pumping may be the use of a bottom-filling bailer. The applicable regulatory agency
requirements and the Project Manager should be consulted if in doubt about the
appropriateness of using a bailer at a site or during a particular sampling event.
(f) During purging and sampling, the tubing should remain filled with water to minimize
possible changes in water chemistry due to contact with the atmosphere. All flow-through
cells should be shaded from direct sunlight to minimize the potential for off-gassing and
temperature fluctuations.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 12 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
(g) Ensure monitoring instruments (i.e., multi-parameter water quality instrument, turbidity
meter, water level measuring device) are maintained in good condition and properly
calibrated to ensure accurate readings. Be sure to have appropriate-sized extra batteries on
hand.
(h) Adverse weather conditions may present challenges that need to be dealt with on a case-by-
case basis. For example, air temperatures below 32°F may cause ice formation in the tubing,
flow-through cell, and on the sampling equipment, or heavy rain could cause standing water
issues with flush-mounted wells. Heavy rain can also impact electronic sampling equipment;
preventative measures should be taken to keep electronic equipment dry.
(i) Observe and avoid any uncontrolled ambient/surrounding air conditions that could affect
analytical results (e.g., truck/vehicle exhaust nearby, industrial building vents). Always
ensure that vehicles are turned off during sampling to avoid introducing vehicle exhaust into
the sample. If uncontrolled ambient/surrounding air conditions cannot be avoided, contact
the Project Manager for further instruction; collection of a field blank sample may be
warranted in this situation.
(j) Procedures should be established to minimize potential cross-contamination. For example:
- Wrap monitoring and sampling equipment with protective material (e.g., aluminum foil,
polyethylene sheeting, Ziploc® bags) after decontamination and between sampling
locations to minimize the potential for cross-contamination between well purging events
at different locations.
- Use dedicated or disposable sampling equipment or new tubing at each sampling point
when appropriate to minimize the need for decontamination.
- Protect sampling equipment and/or the open well head from blowing soil and dust by
covering with plastic sheeting as needed.
- If a bailer and rope are used to purge and/or sample the well, then there is the possibility
of contamination from the rope used to lower the bailer. New or dedicated rope should
be used when appropriate. Alternatively, a decontaminated, Teflon-coated stainless
steel leader can be attached between the rope and the bailer. The leader acts as an
extension to the rope and allows for the top of the bailer to enter the water column
without immediately placing the rope into the water. It is important to keep the rope
clean and not allow contact with the ground surface during bailing.
(k) Disposal of the groundwater collected during purging must be performed in accordance with
all applicable regulations and the project-specific work plan.
(l) Clear tape should not be used to cover labels on containers used for certain analyses (e.g., 40-
mL vials for VOC analysis) due to potential interference with analytical equipment.
(m) In cases where it is difficult to obtain sufficient sample volume for multiple analytical
fractions as well as required quality control (QC) analyses (e.g., field duplicates, matrix
spike/matrix spike duplicate [MS/MSD] analyses), discuss this situation with the Project
Manager and laboratory prior to sample collection. Laboratories can often “make do” with
less volume, especially for inorganic parameters, or increase the reporting limit proportional
to the sample volume obtained.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 13 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project- and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project-specific work
plan. These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training.
2.0 PROCEDURES
Procedures for collecting groundwater samples from monitoring wells are described below. The
project-specific work plan should also be consulted for specific details regarding sampling.
Sampling should always begin at the monitoring well with the least contaminated groundwater
and systematically proceed to the well with the most contaminated groundwater, if possible.
2.1 Pre-sampling Activities
(a) It should be determined if there is the requirement to determine static water level
measurements on all wells at the site prior to sampling, regardless if the well is being
sampled.
(b) Prior to field activities, review historical groundwater sampling logs (if available) to maintain
consistency for the current sampling event (e.g., equipment type, pump intake depth setting,
flow rate, etc.)
(c) Organize monitoring, purging, and sampling equipment taking care not to allow cross-
contamination. This can be accomplished by laying new polyethylene sheeting near the well
or using new buckets, etc.
(d) Calibrate (or perform a calibration check on) all field monitoring equipment on the same day
before collecting groundwater samples. Refer to TRC SOPs and manufacturer’s equipment
calibration instructions. A calibration check may also be required during or at the end of each
sampling day. Consult the project-specific work plan.
(e) Unlock the well cover on the well.
(f) Record the sample location, time, and date in the field book and/or on the Groundwater Field
Data Record.
(g) On the Groundwater Field Data Record, note the physical condition of the well, including
damage, deterioration, and signs of tampering, if any. Collect photographic documentation of
serious damage to present to the Project Manager.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 14 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
(h) Open the well cap and expansion plug, and stay upwind of and not directly over the well.
Note any unusual odors, sounds, or difficulties in opening the well and, if required, measure
the organic vapor reading at the rim of the well with a suitable organic vapor screening
device (e.g., PID or FID), and record the reading in the field book and/or on the Groundwater
Field Data Record. If pressure or vacuum is noted or suspected in the well, allow sufficient
time for the water level elevation in the well to equilibrate.
(i) Gently lower a clean, decontaminated water level measuring device into the well to determine
the static water level. If appropriate for site conditions, check for the presence of LNAPL or
DNAPL using an oil/water interface probe (refer to RMD SOP 004, Water Level and Product
Measurements). If LNAPL or DNAPL is detected, contact the Project Manager before
proceeding with purging and sampling activities. Record the information on depth to
groundwater to the nearest 0.01 feet, depth to LNAPL or DNAPL, and/or thickness of NAPL
in the field book and/or the Groundwater Field Data Record. Refer to RMD SOP 004, Water
Level and Product Measurements, for proper procedures in performing these measurements.
(j) If required in the project-specific work plan, measure the depth to the bottom of the well to
assist in calculating the well volume of the well. If possible, avoid making total well depth
measurements on the same day as sampling due to the tendency to disturb sediment during
this measurement. If NAPL is suspected, use a decontaminated oil/water interface probe. If
the measured depth is less than the constructed depth, this may indicate that the well needs to
be redeveloped (see RMD SOP 006, Well Development). Consult the project-specific work
plan or Project Manager for further instructions.
2.2 Groundwater Purging Activities
Purging is conducted to ensure that representative groundwater is obtained from the water-
bearing unit for analysis. The multiple-volume or low-flow purging approach may be used to
remove water from the well and monitor the water in order to determine when a well has been
adequately purged (i.e., stabilized); at a minimum, the pH, specific conductance and temperature
of the groundwater removed during purging should be monitored and recorded in the field notes.
Other parameters may be required in some regulatory jurisdictions (e.g., turbidity). Additionally,
the purge volume should be monitored and recorded. In some instances, such as when
monitoring at solid waste disposal facilities, simply removing an adequate volume of water (e.g.,
three well volumes) may be suitable for adequate purging, and sampling can commence. Check
with the project-specific work plan and appropriate regulatory guidance to determine any specific
purging requirements.
If the well has been previously sampled consistent with this SOP, then the prior purging strategy
(e.g., method, pump intake depth and the flow rates) should be followed during subsequent
sampling events to maintain consistency and minimize potential variability due to the sampling
procedure.
2.2.1 Multiple-Volume Purging Approach
The multiple-volume purging approach is typically performed using bailers or submersible or
peristaltic pumps. In the multiple-volume purging approach, there are two measurements used to
determine adequate purge volume removal prior to sample collection: 1) purge volume and 2)
field parameter stabilization. The field parameters should be recorded at regular volumetric
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 15 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
intervals. There are no set criteria for establishing how many total sets of measurements are
adequate to document stability of parameters. If the calculated purge volume is small, the
measurements should be taken frequently enough (e.g., every 3 to 5 minutes) to provide a
sufficient number of measurements to evaluate stability. If the purge volume is large,
measurements taken every 15 minutes may be sufficient.
Purge Volume
Prior to purging a well, the amount of water inside the well riser and well screen (i.e., water
column) should be determined, if possible. To do this, the diameter of the well should be
determined and the water level and total depth of the well should be measured and recorded. The
specific methodology for obtaining these measurements is included in SOP 004 Water Level and
Product Measurements.
Once this information is known, the well volume can be calculated using Equation 1:
Well Volume (V) = πr2 h (cf) Equation 1
where:
π = pi (3.14)
r = radius of well in feet (ft)
h = height of the water column in ft. [This may be determined by subtracting the depth
to water from the total depth of the well as measured from the same reference point.]
cf = conversion factor in gallons per cubic foot (gal/ft3) = 7.48 gal/ft3.
The volume in gallons/linear foot (gal/ft) and liters/linear foot (L/ft) for common-size wells are
as follows:
Well Inside Diameter (inches) Volume (gal/ft) Volume (L/ft)
1 0.0408 0.1529
2 0.1631 0.6174
3 0.3670 1.3892
4 0.6524 2.4696
6 1.4680 5.5570
If the volumes for the common-size wells above are utilized, Equation 1 is modified as follows:
Well volume = (h)(f) Equation 2
where:
h = height of water column (feet)
f = the volume in gal/ft or L/ft
For volumetric purging, an adequate purge is typically achieved when 3 to 5 well volumes have
been removed. The field notes should reflect the single-well volume calculations or
determinations according to one of the above methods and a reference to the appropriate
multiplication of that volume, (i.e., a minimum of 3 well volumes) clearly identified as a purge
volume goal.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 16 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
For volumetric purging, it is suggested that field readings are collected every ½ well/well screen
volume after an initial 1 to ½ well volumes are purged. The volume removed between readings
can be adjusted as well-specific information is developed.
If removing a specified volume of water (e.g., 3 well volumes) has been determined to be suitable
for purging, sampling can commence immediately upon achieving the required purge volume. In
other cases, where specified in the project-specific work plan, stabilization of field parameters
must be documented prior to sample collection. If, after 3 well volumes have been removed, the
field parameters have not stabilized (see discussion in Section 2.2.3), additional well volumes (up
to a total of 5 well volumes), should be removed. If the parameters have not stabilized within five
well volumes, it is at the discretion of the Project Manager whether or not to collect a sample or
to continue purging. If, after 5 well volumes, pH and conductivity have stabilized and the
turbidity is still decreasing and approaching an acceptable level, additional purging should be
considered to obtain the best sample possible with respect to turbidity. The conditions of
sampling should be noted in the field book.
2.2.2 Low-flow Purging Approach
The low-flow purging approach is typically performed using peristaltic pumps or submersible
pumps. Low-flow purging (also referred to as low-stress purging, low-volume purging, or
Micropurging®) is a method of well purging/sampling that minimizes the volume of water
withdrawn from a well in obtaining a representative sample. The term low-flow refers to the low
velocity with which water enters the pump intake during purging and sampling. The objective is
to draw representative saturated zone water through the well screen to the pump intake while
avoiding disturbance of the stagnant water above the well screen through minimizing drawdown
of the water column in the well. To achieve this, the flow rate should be adjusted to less than 1
L/min (usually, this will be a rate less than 500 ml/min and may be as low as 100 ml/min). Once
drawdown stabilizes, the sampled water is isolated from the stagnant water in the well casing,
thus eliminating the need for its removal. This sampling method is based on the principle that
water within the screened zone passes through continuously and does not mix with water above
the screen. Water entering the pump can be considered representative of water in the formation
after drawdown and indicator parameters have stabilized.
When performing low-flow purging and sampling, it is recommended that the pump intake be set
in the center of the well screen interval (or center of the water column within the well screen if
the water level is below the top of the well screen) to help prevent disturbance of any sediment at
the bottom of the well. If known, the pump can be placed adjacent to the areas with the highest
hydraulic conductivity or highest level of contaminants. Dedicated pumps can be utilized to
minimize disturbance of the water column. Subsequent sampling events should duplicate as
closely as possible the pump intake depth and the stabilized flow rate from the previous events.
To begin purging, the pump should be started at the lowest pressure/power flow rate setting (e.g.,
100 mL/min) and then slowly increased until water begins discharging. Monitor the water level
and slowly adjust the pump speed until there is little or no drawdown or drawdown has stabilized.
The pump pressure/power may need to be increased for discharge to occur.
The stabilization of drawdown should be documented. Measure and record the flow rate and
water level every 3 to 5 minutes during purging. The flow rate should be reduced if drawdown is
greater than 0.3 feet over three consecutive 3 to 5 minute interval readings. Note any flow rate
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 17 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
adjustments on the Groundwater Field Data Record. Once an appropriate purge rate has been
achieved, record this information, continue purging until water quality indicator parameters have
stabilized (see Section 2.2.3), and then sample the well.
Attempts should be made to avoid pumping a well dry. If drawdown cannot be maintained at less
than 0.3 feet and the falling water level is approaching the top of the screened interval (or the top
of the pump for sampling that began with the water level below the top of the screen), perform
the following steps:
1. Reduce the flow rate, or turn the pump off and allow for recovery. (The pump must have
a check valve to prevent backflow if it is shut off).
2. Begin pumping again at a lower flow rate.
3. If water draws down to the top of the screened interval again (or the top of the pump for
sampling that began with the water level below the top of the screen), turn the pump off
and allow for recovery.
4. If two tubing volumes (including volume of water in the pump and flow-through cell)
have been removed during purging, sampling can proceed the next time the pump is
turned on without waiting for indicator field parameters to stabilize. The project-specific
work plan or Project Manager should be consulted for guidance.
5. If this procedure is used, this should be recorded in the field book and/or on the
Groundwater Field Data Record.
2.2.3 Field Parameter Stabilization During Purging
Stabilization criteria may depend on project objectives or regulatory-specific requirements. Refer
to Appendix A for some of the regulatory-specific requirements for field parameter stabilization.
Generally, an adequate purge with respect to the ground water chemistry is achieved when,
stability for at least three consecutive measurements is as follows:
pH ± 0.1 standard unit (SU)
specific conductance within 3%
turbidity within 10% for values greater than 5 nephelometric turbidity units (NTUs). If
three turbidity readings are less than 5 NTUs, the values are considered as stabilized
Other parameters, such as DO, may also be used as a stabilization parameter. Typical stabilization
goals for DO are within 0.2 mg/L or 10% saturation, whichever is greater. DO measurements
should be conducted using either a flow-through cell or an over-topping cell to minimize or
reduce potential oxygenation of the sample.
Because groundwater temperature is generally not very sensitive in distinguishing between
stagnant casing water and formation water and is subject to rapid changes during purging, its
usefulness is subject to question for the purpose of determining parameter stability. Even if
temperature is not used to determine stability during well purging, it is still advisable to record
the sample temperature, along with the other groundwater chemistry parameters, during well
purging, as it may be needed to interpret other parameter results.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 18 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
ORP is not always used as a stabilization parameter since it may also be subject to rapid changes
during the purging process; however, it may be measured and recorded during well purging.
2.2.4 Special Considerations During Purging
Wells Purged Dry/Purge Adequacy
For wells with slow groundwater recovery, attempts should be made to avoid purging the well
dry. This may be accomplished by slowing the purge rate. As water enters a well that has been
purged dry, the water may cascade down the sand pack and/or the well screen, potentially
stripping VOCs that may be present and/or potentially mobilizing soil fines into the re-
accumulating water column.
However, even with slower purge rates, in some situations, a well may be pumped or bailed dry
(evacuated) during the purging process. In these situations, evacuation generally constitutes an
adequate purge and the well may be sampled following sufficient recovery (enough volume to
allow filling of all sample containers). It is not necessary that the well be evacuated three
times before it is sampled. Purging parameters should be measured and recorded during sample
collection to serve as the measurements of record for the sampling event.
It is particularly important that wells be sampled as soon as possible after purging to maintain
sample representativeness. If adequate volume is available upon completion of purging, the well
should be sampled immediately. If not, sampling should occur as soon as adequate volume has
recovered. If possible, sampling of wells that have a slow recovery should be scheduled so that
they can be purged and sampled in the same day after adequate volume has recovered. Wells of
this type should, unless it is unavoidable, not be purged at the end of one day and sampled the
following day.
Temporary Monitoring Wells
Procedures used to purge temporary groundwater monitoring wells may differ from permanent
wells, because temporary wells are installed with different DQOs for immediate sample
acquisition. Wells of this type may include standard well screens and risers placed in boreholes
created by hand augering, power augering, or by drilling. Alternatively, they may consist of a
rigid rod and screen that is pushed, driven, or hammered into place to the desired sampling
interval, such as a direct push Wellpoint®, a Geoprobe® Screen Point 15/16 sampler, or a
Hydropunch® sampler.
Purging to address stagnant water may not necessarily apply to temporary wells, because stagnant
water is not typically present. It is important to note, however, that the longer a temporary well is
in place and not sampled, the more stagnant the water column may become, and the more
appropriate it may be to apply, to the extent possible, standard permanent monitoring well
purging criteria.
In cases where the temporary well is to be sampled immediately after installation, purging is
conducted primarily to mitigate the impacts of installation. In most cases, temporary well
installation procedures disturb the existing saturated conditions, resulting primarily in increased
turbidity. Therefore, the goal of purging, if conducted, may be to reduce the turbidity and remove
the volume of water in the area directly impacted by the installation procedure. Low turbidity
conditions in these types of wells that are completed within the limit of suction are typically and
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 19 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
routinely achieved by the use of low-flow/low-stress purging techniques using variable-speed
peristaltic pumps.
2.2.5 Equipment Considerations for Purging
Monitoring well purging is accomplished by using in-place plumbing and dedicated pumps or by
using portable pumps/equipment when dedicated systems are not present. The pump of choice is
usually a function of the purging approach (e.g., multiple-volume vs. low-flow), well diameter,
the DTW, the total depth of the well, the amount of water that is to be removed during purging,
the specific analytical testing program for the well, and the equipment previously used during
purging and sampling of the well. A peristaltic pump is appropriate for purging whenever the
head difference between the sampling location and the water level is less than the limit of suction
(approximately 25’ to 30’) and the volume to be removed is reasonably small. For wells where
the water level is below the limit of suction, and/or where there is a large volume of water to be
purged, the variable-speed electric submersible pump or adjustable-rate bladder pumps would be
appropriate. Bailers may also be used for purging in appropriate situations (e.g., shallow wells
with small purge volumes); bailers are not suitable for low-flow purging.
The following subsections describe well evacuation devices that are most commonly used. Other
devices are available but are not discussed in this SOP due to their limited use. Site-specific
operating procedures should be developed in the case that an uncommon purge device is used.
2.2.5.1 Purging with a Suction Pump
There are many different types of suction pumps. They commonly include: centrifugal,
peristaltic and diaphragm. Diaphragm pumps can be used for well evacuation at a fast pumping
rate and sampling at a low pumping rate. The peristaltic pump is a low-volume pump that
incorporates a roller to squeeze flexible tubing, thereby creating suction. This tubing can be
dedicated to a well for re-use or discarded. It is recommended that 1/4 inch or 3/8 inch (inner
diameter) tubing be used to help ensure that the sample tubing remains filled with water and to
prevent water from being aerated as it flows through the tubing. Purging procedures are as
follows.
(a) Determine the volume of water to be purged as described in Section 2.2.1 or follow the
low-flow approach described in Section 2.2.2 (applicable to peristaltic pumps only).
(b) Take necessary precautions (e.g., laying plastic sheeting around the well) to prevent
contamination of pumps, tubing or other purging/sampling equipment with foreign
materials.
(c) Assemble the pump, tubing and power source, if necessary, in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications.
(d) Ensure that the pump tubing is set at the pre-determined pump intake depth.
(e) Connect the discharge line from the pump to the flow-through cell for parameter
measurements. Use a T-connection or valve prior to the flow-through cell to allow for
collection of water for turbidity measurements. Direct the discharge line from the flow-
through cell to a 5-gallon bucket (or equivalent) to contain the purge water for proper
disposal. Verify the end of the tubing is not submerged in the purge bucket. Manage
purge water as specified in the project-specific work plan.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 20 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
(f) Do not allow the pump to run dry. If the pumping rate exceeds the well recharge rate,
adjust the rate accordingly or, if consistent with the purging and sampling objectives,
lower the tubing further into the well and continue pumping.
(g) Using the water quality meter, take an initial reading of the required indicator parameters.
All measurements, except turbidity, must be obtained using a transparent flow-through
cell unless an unforeseen situation makes this impractical or inadvisable. Initially,
turbidity may be elevated. Once turbidity has decreased to a measurable range, begin
monitoring indicator parameters at approximately every 3-5 minutes, or as appropriate.
Please note that flow-through cell size should be taken into account in conjunction with
the flow rate to determine the length of time between water quality parameter readings.
At least one flow-through cell volume should be turned over between readings. For
example, if the flow through cell size is 500 mL and the flow rate is 100 mL/min, then it
would be appropriate to measure water quality parameters every 5 minutes.
(h) Record the readings on the Groundwater Field Data Record. The monitoring probes must
be submerged in water at all times. Record the indicator parameters, along with the water
level, as described in Step (g) above. If removing a specified volume of water (e.g., 3-5
well volumes) has been determined to be suitable for purging, sampling can commence
immediately upon achieving the required purge volume. In other cases, where specified
in the project-specific work plan, stabilization of field parameters must be documented
prior to sample collection. Stabilization criteria are discussed in Section 2.2.3.
Particulate build-up in the flow-through cell may impact indicator parameters. If the cell
must be cleaned during pumping operations, continue pumping and disconnect the cell
for cleaning, then reconnect and continue monitoring. Record the start and stop times,
and describe the cleaning steps in the field book.
If indicator parameter stabilization is required and parameters have not stabilized after 2-
hours of purging (or other pre-determined length of time), one of three options may be
taken after consultation with the Project Manager:
1) continue purging until stabilization is achieved;
2) discontinue purging, do not collect any samples, and record in the field book and/or
on the Groundwater Field Data Record the stabilization conditions and steps taken to
attempt to achieve stabilization; or,
3) discontinue purging, collect samples and document attempts to achieve stabilization.
NOTE: If parameters do not stabilize, or turbidity remains greater than 5 NTU within
the project-determined time range (EPA recommends up to 2 hours), contact the Project
Manager to develop a modified sampling approach.
(i) Record the volume of water purged on the Groundwater Field Data Record. Record the
disposal method used for purge water in the field book.
(j) Once the required volume of water is removed (typically 3 to 5 well volumes) from the
well and/or parameters are stabilized to the satisfaction of the project-specific work plan,
proceed to Section 2.3, Post-purging Groundwater Sample Collection.
2.2.5.2 Purging with a Submersible Pump
Submersible pumps generally use one of two types of power supplies, either electric or
compressed gas. Electric pumps can be powered by a 12-volt DC rechargeable battery, or a 110-
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 21 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
or 220-volt AC power supply. Those units powered by compressed gas (e.g., bladder pump)
normally use a small electric controller that also needs a 12-volt DC battery or 110-volt AC
power. They may also utilize compressed gas from bottles. Pumps differ according to the depth
and diameter of the monitoring wells and the height of the potentiometric surface/water table
(e.g., pressure head). It is recommended that 1/4-inch or 3/8-inch (inner diameter) tubing be used
to help ensure that the sample tubing remains filled with water and to prevent water from being
aerated as it flows through the tubing. Purging procedures are as follows.
(a) Determine the volume of water to be purged as described in Section 2.2.1 or follow the
low-flow approach described in Section 2.2.2.
(b) Take necessary precautions (e.g., laying plastic sheeting around the well) to prevent
contamination of pumps, tubing or other purging/sampling equipment with foreign
materials.
(c) Assemble the pump, tubing and power source, if necessary, in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications. If the pump itself is being lowered into the well, ensure a
safety line is attached.
(d) Non-dedicated purge/sampling vs. dedicated purge/sampling systems.
Dedicated systems: Pump has already been installed. Refer to historical monitoring well
information, and record the depth of the pump intake in the field book and/or on the
Groundwater Field Data Record.
Non-dedicated systems: Determine the target depth of the pump intake. Note that this
may be a historical intake depth; see well construction data or the project-specific work
plan. If there is not an established intake depth, the center of the screened interval should
be targeted. If the measured water level is lower than the top of the well screen, position
the pump intake at the midpoint of the water column. The intake should be generally 1 to
2 feet above the bottom of the well to minimize potential mobilization of any settled
sediment, the risk of the pumping suction being broken, or the entrainment of air in the
pump tubing and resulting sample. Slowly lower the pump, safety line, and tubing into
the well to the pre-determined pump intake depth. The tubing should be cut to the
desired length to assist in installing the pump. Measure the depth of the pump intake
while lowering the tubing/pump into location. Record the pump intake depth in the field
book and/or on the Groundwater Field Data Record. For deeper wells and large diameter
wells, two staff members may be necessary to accomplish this task.
(e) Connect the discharge line from the pump to the flow-through cell for parameter
measurements. Use a T-connection or valve prior to the flow-through cell to allow for
collection of water for turbidity measurements. Direct the discharge line from the flow-
through cell to a 5-gallon bucket (or equivalent) to contain the purge water for proper
disposal. Verify the end of the tubing is not submerged in the purge bucket. Manage
purge water as specified in the project-specific work plan.
(f) Measure the flow rate of the pump with a graduated container and stop watch. The pump
pressure may need to be increased for discharge to occur. Record the volume of water
collected for a period of 1 minute and calculate the flow rate as follows.
1 minute
volume collected (mL)
Flowrate (mL / min)
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 22 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
(g) Measure the water level and record the flow rate and the water level. This should be
performed every 3 to 5 minutes during purging. For low-flow purging, the flow rate
should be adjusted to result in a rate between 100 to 500 mL/min; however, if drawdown
of the well is observed, a slower flow rate may be necessary. If using a bladder pump, it
is recommended that the pump be set to deliver long pulses of water so that one pulse
will fill a 40 mL volatile organic analysis (VOA) vial, if possible.
(h) Prior to recording the water quality indicator parameters, a minimum of one tubing
volume should be purged. Note that this includes the volume of the flow-through cell.
(i) Proceed to steps (g) through (j) in Section 2.2.5.1.
2.2.5.3 Purging with a Bailer
(a) Determine the volume of water to be purged as described in Section 2.2.1.
(b) Take necessary precautions (e.g., laying plastic sheeting around the well) to prevent
contamination of tubing or other purging/sampling equipment with foreign materials.
(c) Use a well-dedicated bailer (i.e., used exclusively for that well only), a decontaminated bailer
or an unused, disposable bailer.
(d) Attach an appropriate length of (a) bailing line, (b) Teflon®-coated bailing wire or (c) rope
with Teflon®-coated stainless steel leader to reach the bottom of the well. Secure a knot or
series of knots to the top of the bailer. Be sure to have additional length of line to facilitate
handling of the bailer at the surface (typically 10 ft).
(e) Lower the bailer gently into the well until it reaches the water column and fills with water
from the bottom. Note: It is recommended that the bailer be lowered into the water to a
depth that prevents the water from entering the top of the bailer. This is done to prevent
excess turbulence caused by filling from the bottom and the top simultaneously. Controlling
the line attached to the bailer as it is lowered into the well is also important to prevent
degassing of the water as the bailer impacts the water. In shallow wells, controlling the line
is not too difficult; however, for wells of greater depths it is common to utilize a hand-over-
hand (windmill) approach using both hands to control longer lengths of line and prevent the
loops in the line from tangling with one another. This procedure is simple to learn and saves
a good deal of time by preventing tangles. Do not allow the bailing line or rope to become
contaminated by surface soil.
(f) Once the bailer is full of water, gently withdraw the bailer from the well until it comes out of
the top of the well. Be sure to control excess line in your hands to prevent the rope and bailer
from touching the ground, and then grasp the bailer as it appears at the top of the well.
(g) Immediately pour the water into a vessel for water quality measurements, and record the
measurements in the field book or on the Groundwater Field Data Record (at the project-
required frequency). Otherwise, pour water into a 5-gallon bucket or other vessel to track the
volume purged. As a general rule, standard 2-inch bailers are able to hold about 1 liter of
water when full. This process will have to be repeated several times to complete adequate
purging of the well (e.g., three to five well volumes).
(h) Record the volume of water purged on the Groundwater Field Data Record. Record the
disposal method used for purge water in the field book.
(i) Once the required volume of water is removed (typically 3 to 5 well volumes) from the well
and/or parameters are stabilized to the satisfaction of the project-specific work plan, proceed
to Section 2.3, Post-purging Groundwater Sample Collection.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 23 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.3 Post-purging Groundwater Sample Collection
(a) New, disposable gloves should be donned immediately prior to sample collection and should
be changed at any point that their cleanliness becomes compromised during sample
collection.
(b) If using a submersible or peristaltic pump, maintain the same flow rate as used during
purging. Disconnect the pump tubing from the flow-through cell or sample from the T-
connector, if used. Samples must be collected directly from the discharge port of the pump
tubing prior to passing through the flow-through cell. This is critically important to avoid
cross-contamination between wells.
(c) If using bottom-filling bailers,
Slowly lower the bailer into the well until it is submerged to the point where water
does not enter the top (i.e., bottom-filling).
Retrieve the bailer. The first bailer recovered after well purging must be used for
sample collection.
2.3.1 Sample Collection Order
Fractions of the groundwater sample should be collected in the following order (i.e., decreasing
volatility) unless otherwise specified in the project-specific work plan:
1. VOCs;
2. Semivolatile organic compounds (SVOCs);
3. Other organic parameters;
4. Unfiltered inorganic constituents (e.g., total metals);
5. Filtered inorganic constituents (e.g., dissolved metals); and
6. Other constituents.
During sample collection, allow the water to flow directly down the side of the sample container
without allowing the tubing to touch the inside of the sample container or lid in order to minimize
aeration and turbulence and maintain sample integrity. The tubing should remain filled with
water.
2.3.2 VOC Sample Collection
Collection of VOCs/Volatile Petroleum Hydrocarbons (VPH): Samples for VOCs will be
collected first unless they are being collected by the “straw” method described in Section 1.6.2
(d), and the sample vial must be filled so a meniscus forms over the mouth of the vial. This
ensures no air bubbles or headspace will be formed after it has been capped. Ensure the lack of
air bubbles and headspace by turning the vial upside down and tapping it lightly. If any bubbles
are observed, the vial should be topped off using a minimal amount of sample to re-establish the
meniscus. Care should be taken to not flush any preservative out of the vial when topping off. If,
after topping off and capping the vial, bubbles are still present, a new vial should be obtained and
the sample re-collected. Note: Extra VOC vials should be obtained prior to the sampling event in
case this situation occurs.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 24 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Note: When using a bladder pump, it is recommended that the pump be set to deliver long pulses
of water so that one pulse will fill a 40 ml VOA vial, if possible.
When acid preservation is used for the collection of VOCs, the acid must be added to the vials
before sample collection. However, in most cases 40-ml VOA vials come pre-preserved. If a
pre-preserved vial effervesces upon the addition of sample, the acid preservative can be rinsed out
of the vial with sample water and then used to collect the sample. The laboratory should be made
aware that the affected sample will not be acid-preserved as this may affect the sample holding
time. Note effervescence in the field book for future reference.
2.3.3 Non-VOC Sample Collection
Completely fill the remaining sample containers for all non-VOC analyses.
Preserve the non-VOC samples in accordance with method and project-specific requirements
following sample collection if the sample containers are not pre-preserved.
(NOTE: Pre-preserved vials may be supplied by the laboratory, depending on the program).
2.3.4 Field Filtering
Depending upon project requirements, field filtering may be performed for non-VOC analyses.
An in-line filter should be fitted at the end of the discharge tubing and the sample should be
collected after the filter. Pre-rinse the in-line filter by allowing a minimum of 0.5 to 1 liter of
groundwater from the well to pass through the filter prior to sampling. Ensure the filter is free of
air bubbles prior to collecting samples. Preserve the filtered water sample immediately or
directly fill pre-preserved containers (if provided). Clearly note “filtered” or “dissolved” on
sample label and COC document.
2.4 Groundwater Sample Collection Without Purging (Passive Sampling)
Passive sampling can be defined as the free flow of contaminants from the media being sampled
to a receiving phase in a sampling device. Depending upon the sampler, the receiving phase can
be a solvent (e.g., water), chemical reagent, or porous adsorbent (e.g., activated carbon). While
there are many different types of passive samplers, most have a barrier between the medium
being sampled and the receiving phase. The barrier determines the sampling rate that
contaminants are collected at a given concentration and can be used to selectively permit or
restrict various classes of chemicals from entering the receiving phase.
There are three generic forms of passive (no purge) samplers: thief (grab) samplers, diffusion
(equilibrium) samplers, and integrating (kinetic) samplers. However, this SOP focuses on the
more commonly used diffusion (equilibrium) samplers.
Passive samplers are deployed down a well to the desired depth within the screened interval or
open borehole to obtain a discrete sample without using pumping or a purging technique. Most
samplers are able to be stacked to obtain samples at multiple depths. Some samplers can also be
used to measure contaminants in groundwater as it enters a surface water body.
Diffusion, or equilibrium, samplers are devices that rely on diffusion of the analytes to reach
equilibrium between the sampler fluid and the well water. Samples are time-weighted toward
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 25 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
conditions at the sampling point during the latter portion of the deployment period. The degree of
weighting depends on analyte and device-specific diffusion rates. Typically, conditions during
only the last few days of sampler deployment are represented. Depending upon the contaminant
of concern, equilibration times range from a few days to several weeks. Diffusion samplers are
less versatile than grab samplers as they are not generally effective for all chemical classes.
Both the diffusion and integrating samplers depend upon permeation or diffusion through barriers
that hold the receiving phase. This diffusion process is chemical and barrier specific. Diffusion
samplers are commonly known as PDBs or rigid porous polyethylene (RPP) samplers. PDBs
may be used to sample for VOCs, and RPPs may be used to sample for various organic and
inorganic constituents. PDBs must be allowed to remain in the well for a sufficient period of time
to allow the deionized water in the sampler to come into equilibrium with the constituents in the
ambient groundwater.
Some regulatory agencies allow groundwater samples to be collected without purging the well.
This may be accomplished by suspending a passive sampler in the well for a period of time
appropriate for the type of passive sampler being used. It is important to confirm that the chosen
sampler is compatible with the contaminants of concern including all VOCs of interest at the site.
Diffusion passive samplers are used most commonly and the procedure for their use is as follows:
(a) Passive samplers are deployed at a predetermined depth across the well screen. Typically,
the initial sampling event may deploy multiple passive samplers across 5-foot intervals of
saturated well screen to observe any potential stratification. Long-term sampling depths
typically target a zone of higher concentration, if present.
(b) New passive samplers are attached via PVC cable ties to a tether (a pre-made marine-grade
polyethylene rope or stainless steel cable with a weight at the bottom) that is then suspended
within the well. There should be sufficient well screen saturation within the well to
completely cover the passive sampler. For VOCs, it is recommended that there should be
several feet of groundwater above the top of the PDB.
(c) The passive sampler should be allowed to equilibrate with groundwater for an appropriate
period of time (e.g., at least 2 weeks for PDB samplers). Longer equilibration times may be
necessary in lower permeability formations. Once sufficient time for equilibration has
passed, the PDB samplers can be retrieved when convenient.
(d) Raise the passive sampler to the surface using a tether reel. Examine the surface of the
passive sampler for evidence of algae, iron, or other coatings, and for tears to the membrane.
Note observations in the field book. If tears are present and water is leaking out, the sample
is not considered viable. Contact the Project Manager.
(e) Detach the passive sampler from the tether.
(f) Remove excess beaded water from the passive sampler with a clean gloved hand, running top
to bottom; this is to minimize the contact of beaded water with water in the passive sampler.
(g) Use a small diameter discharge tube (<0.15 inch diameter to reduce volatilization) and pierce
near the bottom, allowing water to smoothly flow into the VOA vial. Tilting the passive
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 26 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
sampler will control the flow rate. The VOA vials must be filled within the first several
minutes of passive sampler retrieval. (Note that sample vials should be prepared and opened
on a stable surface or holding device such as a foam pack. Decanting sample from passive
samplers into containers requires techniques that may require some practice and patience.)
Refer to Section 2.3.2 for special circumstances regarding the filling of VOA vials.
(h) A small amount of water may remain within the passive sampler after filling the VOA vials
and can be used for field parameter measurements if required.
(i) Dispose of the passive sampler after use.
2.5 Post-sampling Activities
(a) Cease pumping and, if system is non-dedicated, disassemble and decontaminate the purging
and sampling equipment. Verify the end of the tubing is not submerged in the purge bucket
prior to turning off the pump.
(b) Dispose of the bailer (if disposable) and/or rope and/or other disposable equipment in
accordance with the project-specific work plan, or store the bailer in a plastic bag for
transport to the site decontamination area.
(c) Dispose of the empty passive sampler and/or rope and/or other disposable equipment in
accordance with the project-specific work plan, or store the empty passive sampler in a
plastic bag for transport to the site decontamination area
(d) Replace the well cap and well cover on the well and lock the outer casing (if present).
(e) Label each sample. If the labels are covered with clear tape, ensure this is not performed for
VOA vials.
(f) Place all samples in a cooler with ice.
(g) Ensure samples are delivered to the laboratory well before the required holding time expires.
(h) Consult the project-specific work plan to determine if a calibration check is required at the
end of the day for the water quality parameters.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper labeling, on-site storage by the
client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and disposal of the
materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 27 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The collection of QC samples is dependent upon the DQOs. Project-specific work plans should
be consulted to determine the required frequency of QC sample collection.
4.1 Field Duplicates
The following procedures should be used for collecting field duplicates of groundwater samples:
(a) For QC purposes, each duplicate sample will be typically submitted to the laboratory as a
“blind” duplicate sample, in that a unique sample identification not tied to the primary sample
identification will be assigned to the duplicate (e.g., DUP-01). Standard labeling procedures
used for groundwater sampling will be employed. However, a sample collection time will
not be included on the sample label or the COC form. The actual source of the duplicate
sample will be recorded in the field book and/or on the Groundwater Field Data Record.
(b) Each duplicate sample will be collected simultaneously with the actual sample by alternately
filling sample and duplicate bottles. Following the order of collection specified for each set of
containers (VOCs, SVOCs, other organic parameters, unfiltered inorganic constituents, and
filtered inorganic constituents), the duplicate sample containers will be alternately filled with
groundwater for each parameter.
(c) All collection and preservation procedures outlined for groundwater sampling will be
followed for each duplicate sample.
4.2 Equipment Blanks
Equipment blanks include reagent water that is run through the bailer (if not disposable), rope,
leader line, decontaminated pump, a representative section of the pump’s tubing, or any other
piece of sampling equipment that may have come in contact with the sample. The equipment
blanks are collected and preserved in the same sample containers as field samples. If dedicated or
disposable systems are used, equipment blanks are not required, although an initial blank could be
performed to demonstrate that the dedicated equipment is clean prior to use. If only dedicated
tubing is used, the equipment blank will include only the pump in subsequent sampling events. A
passive sampler is considered a dedicated device and no equipment blank is required.
Ideally, the reagent water should come from the laboratory and be certified clean. If not certified
and/or if not from the laboratory performing the analyses, a separate water blank that has not run
through the sampling equipment should be sent to the laboratory for analysis.
4.3 Trip Blanks
Trip blanks will be used to check for potential contamination of VOCs via migration during
storage and shipping. Trip blanks typically consist of two to three 40 mL VOA vials filled with
analyte-free water and preserved with hydrochloric acid (HCl) to pH <2 SU. Trip blank
containers are usually supplied pre-filled by the laboratory. Trip blanks are typically submitted to
the laboratory at a frequency of one per cooler for coolers that contain samples for VOC and/or
VPH analysis. Trip blanks are analyzed by the laboratory for VOCs and/or VPH, depending on
field sample analyses.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 28 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
4.4 MS/MSDs and MS/Duplicates
MSs are an additional analysis of a sample spiked by the laboratory with a subset or all of the
target analytes and are used to demonstrate the accuracy of analytical methods for a given matrix.
MSDs are an additional analysis of a sample spiked with a subset or all of the target analytes and
are also used to demonstrate the accuracy of analytical methods for a given matrix. MS/MSDs
also provide a measure of analytical precision for a given matrix. Duplicates are an additional
analysis of a sample and are used to demonstrate the precision of analytical methods for a given
matrix.
Triplicate volumes of a field sample must be collected in order for the laboratory to have enough
volume to perform the MS/MSD analyses for organic parameters. Duplicate volumes of a field
sample must be collected in order for the laboratory to have enough volume to perform
MS/Duplicate analyses for inorganic parameters. The sample designated for MS/MSD or
MS/Duplicate analyses should be noted in the Comments column of the COC document.
4.5 Temperature Blanks
Temperature blanks consist of a sample container filled with non-preserved water (potable or
distilled) and typically are included in all coolers that contain samples that require temperature
preservation. These may be added to the coolers by the field team if not provided by the
laboratory. Temperature blanks must remain inside the coolers on ice during the sampling
process.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Record the sample location, sample identification, and date and time of collection in the field
book and/or the Groundwater Field Data Record. The Groundwater Field Data Record
(Attachment B) should be used to record the following information:
Volume of each sample
Sample identification number
Sample location (sketch of the sample point)
Time and date sample was collected
Personnel performing the task
Volume of water removed
Purging time
Flow rate during purging and sampling
Weather conditions during sampling
Field parameters such as water level, pH, temperature, conductivity, turbidity, ORP, and
DO
Sample collection equipment and method used
Decontamination procedures
Analytical parameters
Preservation method and amount of preservative
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 29 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
All sample numbers must be documented on the COC form that accompanies the samples during
shipment. Any deviations from the records management procedures specified in the project-
specific work plan must be approved by the Project Manager and documented in the field book.
6.0 REFERENCES
Interstate Technology Regulatory Council (ITRC). March 2006. Technology Overview of
Passive Sampler Technologies.
USEPA. November 1992. RCRA Ground-Water Monitoring: Draft Technical Guidance.
EPA/530-R-93-001. USEPA Office of Solid Waste.
USEPA. April 1996. Low-Flow (Minimal Drawdown) Ground-Water Sampling Procedures.
EPA Ground Water Issue. EPA/540-S-95-504. USEPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
Response.
USEPA. May 2002. Ground-Water Sampling Guidelines for Superfund and RCRA Project
Managers. EPA/542-S-02-001. USEPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response.
USEPA. September 2004. Field Sampling Guidance Document #1220: Groundwater Well
Sampling. USEPA Region 9 Laboratory Richmond, California.
USEPA, January 19, 2010. Low Stress (low flow) Purging and Sampling Procedure for the
Collection of Groundwater Samples from Monitoring Wells. USEPA Region 1, Rev. 3.
USEPA. March 6, 2013. Groundwater Sampling. SESDPROC-301-R3. USEPA Region 4,
Science and Ecosystem Support Division. Athens, Georgia.
USEPA. April 22, 2014. Passive (No Purge) Samples.
http://www.clu-in.org/characterization/technologies/default.focus/sec/Passive_%28no%20purge
%29_Samplers/cat/Overview/
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 AUGUST 2014 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 30 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A:
Groundwater Field Parameter Stabilization Criteria for
Selected Jurisdictions
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 31 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Jurisdiction Information Source Applicable Stabilization Criteria
USEPA Region 1 Low Stress (low flow) Purging and Sampling Procedure for the Collection of
Groundwater Samples from Monitoring Wells; U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency Region 1, January 19, 2010.
http://www.epa.gov/region1/lab/qa/pdfs/EQASOP-GW001.pdf (for low flow
PDF)
http://www.epa.gov/region1/lab/qa/qualsys.html (for EPA’s Quality System
Documents)
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±3%
Temperature: ±3%
Turbidity: ±10% if >5 NTUs; if three Turbidity values are <5
NTU, consider the values as stabilized
Dissolved Oxygen: ±10% if >0.5 mg/L, if three Dissolved
Oxygen values are <0.5 mg/L, consider the values as stabilized
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: ±10 millivolts
USEPA Region 2 Groundwater Sampling Procedure: Low Stress (Low Flow) Purging and
Sampling, SOP # SST-7, Revision No. 1, November 2010.
Same as above
USEPA Region 4 USEPA Region 4 SOPs:
http://www.epa.gov/region4/sesd/fbqstp/index.html
See Chemical Parameter Stabilization Criteria (section 3.2.1.1.2 of
Groundwater Sampling SOP, revision 3/6/2013:
http://www.epa.gov/region4/sesd/fbqstp/Groundwater-Sampling.pdf
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±5%
Temperature: Not used
Turbidity: “Stabilized” (no criteria specified) if >10 NTUs ; if
three Turbidity values are <10 NTUs, consider the values as
stabilized
Dissolved Oxygen (optional parameter): ±0.2 mg/L or ±10% of
saturation, whichever is greater
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: Not used
USEPA Region 5 Ground Water Forum Issue Paper (May 2002, Yeskis and Zavala)
http://www.epa.gov/superfund/remedytech/tsp/download/gw_sampling_guide
.pdf
A minimum set of parameters would include pH, conductivity, and turbidity
or DO.
Puls and Barcelona, 1996 (pH, specific conductance, ORP, turbidity)
Wilde et al., 1998 (pH, turbidity, DO)
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±3%
Temperature: Not used
Turbidity: ±10% if >10 NTUs
Dissolved Oxygen: ±0.3 mg/L
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: ±10 millivolts
USEPA Region 9 See USEPA Region 1 (above)
USEPA Region 10 See USEPA Region 5 (above)
Alabama Alabama Environmental Investigation and Remediation Guidance (section
C.3.1)
http://www.adem.state.al.us/MoreInfo/pubs/AEIRGInvestigation.pdf
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±10%
Temperature: “Constant” (no criteria specified)
Turbidity: Stabilized (no criteria specified), or <10 NTUs
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 32 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Jurisdiction Information Source Applicable Stabilization Criteria
Indiana Indiana Department of Environmental Management
The Micro-Purge Sampling Option
http://www.in.gov/idem/files/remediation_tech_guidance_micro-purge.pdf
The parameters normally measured for stability (listed in increasing order of
sensitivity) are pH, temperature, specific conductivity, oxidation-reduction
potential, DO and turbidity. At least one of the last three listed must be used.
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±3%
Temperature: ±3%
Turbidity: ±10%
Dissolved Oxygen: ±10%
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: ±10 millivolts (document says
microvolts, but that may be an error)
Michigan MDEQ Part 201 Op Memo 2, Attachment 5
http://www.michigan.gov/documents/deq/deq-rrd-
OpMemo_2_Attachment5_249853_7.pdf
No specific values to determine stabilization are listed, but the Op
Memo lists several other groundwater sampling guidance
documents. If a valid reference exists, then it can be used to
justify a sampling approach and stabilization parameters.
New Jersey New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection
http://www.state.nj.us/dep/srp/guidance/fspm/
pH: ± 0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ± 3%
Temperature: ± 3%
Dissolved Oxygen: ± 10%
Turbidity: ± 10% for values greater than 1 NTU
ORP/Eh: ± 10 millivolts
Ohio Ohio EPA SOPs:
http://www.epa.state.oh.us/portals/30/rules/FSOPs.pdf
See Purging Stabilization Criteria (SOP 2.2.4, dated January 2, 2007, review
in progress)
pH: ±0.1 unit
Specific Conductance: ±3%
Temperature: No criteria specified
Turbidity: Below 10 NTUs ideal; ±10% if greater than 10 NTUs
Dissolved Oxygen: ±0.3 mg/L
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: ±10 millivolts
This table was last updated in July 2014.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 33 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment B:
Example Groundwater Field Data Records
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 34 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 35 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
BY:
2" 4" 6"
PH: CONDUCTIVITY:
ORP: DO: mg/L
T/ NTU
T/ SLIGHT
PUMP INTAKE DEPTH: ___________T/ _ PVC °C
GALLONS
GALLONS YES NO
NOTE: STABILIZATION TEST IS COMPLETE WHEN 3 SUCCESSIVE READINGS ARE WITHIN THE FOLLOWING LIMITS:
+/- +/- +/- +/- +/- or </= +/-
A - NONE B - HNO3 C - H2SO4 D - NaOH E - HCL F - _______
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
_________________ _____________________
COC NUMBER: _________________ SIGNATURE: _____________________ DATE SIGNED:
_________________
SHIPPING METHOD: DATE SHIPPED: AIRBILL NUMBER: _________________
NUMBER SIZE TYPE PRESERVATIVE FILTERED NUMBER SIZE TYPE PRESERVATIVE FILTERED
pH: 10 % COND.: 10 % ORP: 10 % D.O.: 10 % TEMP.: 0.5°C
BOTTLES FILLED PRESERVATIVE CODES
TURB: 10 % 5
(GAL OR L)
INITIAL
(ML/MIN) (SU) (umhos/cm) (mV) ( mg/L) (NTU) (°C) (FEET)
DISPOSAL METHOD: GROUND DRUM OTHER
TIME
PURGE
RATE PH
CONDUCTIVITY ORP D.O. TURBIDITY TEMPERATURE
WATER
LEVEL
CUMULATIVE
PURGE VOLUME
NONE SLIGHT MODERATE VERY COMMENTS:
___________
TURBIDITY QC SAMPLE: MS/MSD DUP- _________
COLOR: _____________________ ODOR: __________ FILTRATE COLOR: ____________ FILTRATE ODOR:
_________________
VOLUME REMOVED: _________ LITERS FILTRATE (0.45 um)
WELL VOLUME: _________ LITERS COLOR: ____________ ODOR:
DEPTH TO WATER: _________ PVC FLOW-THRU CELL
VOLUME
TURBIDITY: ________
_________ LITERS TEMPERATURE: ___________ OTHER: _________________
DEPTH TO BOTTOM: _________ PVC NONE MODERATE VERY
PURGE
METHOD:
PUMP _____________________ _________ SU ___________ umhos/cm
BAILER _____________________ _________ mV ________
PURGING TIME: DATE: SAMPLE TIME: DATE:
_______________________
SAMPLE TYPE: GW WW SW DI LEACHATE OTHER _______________________
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 36 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 37 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment C: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 38 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 39 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 40 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Groundwater Sampling Page 41 of 41
Procedure No: RMD 009 Revision: 0 Effective: 8/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 1 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Equipment Decontamination
RMD 010
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
April 2014
Authorization Signatures
Technical Reviewer
James Peronto
Date
4/9/14
Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
4/9/14
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 2 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 3
1.1 Scope & Applicability ....................................................................... 3
1.2 Summary of Method......................................................................... 3
1.3 Equipment....................................................................................... 3
1.4 Health & Safety Considerations ........................................................ 4
1.5 Cautions and Potential Problems ...................................................... 5
1.6 Personnel Qualifications................................................................... 6
2.0 PROCEDURES......................................................................................... 6
2.1 General ........................................................................................... 6
2.2 Physical Decontamination Procedures .............................................. 7
2.3 Procedure for Sampling Equipment ................................................... 8
2.4 Procedure for Measuring Equipment ............................................... 10
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................. 10
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................ 10
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT .................................... 11
6.0 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 11
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ........................................................................ 11
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 3 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope & Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the
procedures needed for decontamination of equipment used in the field during environmental
investigations (e.g., sediment, soil, groundwater investigations). Other state or federal
requirements may be above and beyond the scope of this SOP and will be followed, if applicable.
In all instances, the actual procedures used should be documented and described in the field
notes. Preventing or minimizing potential cross-contamination of samples is important for the
collection of representative samples, avoiding the possible introduction of sampling error into
sample results, and for protecting the health and safety of site personnel.
Removing or neutralizing potential contaminants that may have accumulated on equipment and
vehicles ensures protection of personnel, reduces or eliminates potential transfer of contaminants
to clean areas, and minimizes the likelihood of sample cross-contamination.
The use of dedicated, disposable, new sampling equipment (e.g., disposable liners, plastic spoons,
plastic or aluminum bowls) should be considered as an alternative to equipment decontamination
and the subsequent generation of decontamination fluids.
1.2 Summary of Method
Equipment decontamination is used to remove potential contaminants from a sampling device or
piece of field equipment prior to and between the collection of samples and is also used to limit
personnel exposure to residual contamination that may be present on used field equipment.
Contaminants can be physically removed from equipment or deactivated by sterilization or
disinfection. Gross contamination of equipment requires physical decontamination, including
abrasive and nonabrasive methods. These include the use of brushes, air and wet blasting, and
high-pressure water, followed by a wash/rinse process using appropriate cleaning solutions. A
solvent rinse may be required when organic contamination is present, and an acid rinse may be
required when metals are parameters of interest. Equipment decontamination procedures can
vary depending on the media being sampled and the type of sampling equipment being used.
Disposal of decontamination fluids will be handled on a project-specific basis and will be in
accordance with all applicable regulations.
1.3 Equipment
The following equipment may be utilized when decontaminating equipment. Project-specific
conditions or requirements may warrant the use of additional equipment or deletion of items from
this list.
Appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE) as specified in the site-specific Health
and Safety Plan (HASP)
Alconox®, Liquinox® or other nonphosphate concentrated laboratory-grade soap
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 4 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Simple Green® or other nontoxic biodegradable cleaner
Deionized, distilled, or organic-free water, as appropriate (may be supplied by the laboratory or
purchased from commercial vendors depending on project requirements)
Pump sprayer
Pressure sprayer
Squeeze bottle filled with pesticide-grade hexane (option for organic analyses)
Squeeze bottle filled with pesticide-grade methanol (option for organic analyses)
Squeeze bottle filled with pesticide-grade isopropanol (option for organic analyses)
Squeeze bottle filled with 10 percent nitric acid (option for metals analyses and stainless-steel
equipment)
Squeeze bottle filled with 1 percent nitric acid (option for metals analyses)
Container (squeeze bottle to 5-gallon bucket) filled with potable water and a nonphosphate,
laboratory-grade soap (approximately 1 tablespoon of soap to 5 gallons of water)
Extra quantities of above listed liquids
Potable water
Containers, such as buckets or wash basins (the type and number of containers is dependent on
the procedure)
Scrub brushes
Small wire brush
Aluminum foil
Polyethylene sheeting
A container for decontamination of pumps and associated tubing.
1.4 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE as defined in
the HASP.
Samples containing chemical contaminants may be handled during implementation of this SOP.
Certain decontamination fluids, including solvents and/or acids, are considered hazardous
materials, and TRC employees will appropriately handle and store them at all times.
Appropriately manage chemicals that pose specific toxicity or safety concerns, and follow any
other relevant requirements as appropriate. Hazardous substances may be incompatible or may
react to produce heat, chemical reactions, or toxic products. Some hazardous substances may be
incompatible with clothing or equipment and can permeate or degrade protective clothing or
equipment. Also, hazardous substances may pose a direct health hazard to workers through
inhalation or skin contact or if exposed to heat/flame and they combust. Safety data sheets for
chemicals handled by TRC personnel should be maintained in a designated location at the project
site.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 5 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.5 Cautions and Potential Problems
The use of deionized, distilled or organic-free water commonly available from
commercial vendors may be acceptable for decontamination of sampling equipment
provided that it has been certified by the vendor as analyte-free and/or meets the project-
specific requirements.
Alconox®, Liquinox®, or other nonphosphate, concentrated, laboratory-grade soap may
contain trace quantities of perchlorate.
Avoid using an excessive amount of soap during decontamination procedures, as this
could result in difficulty rinsing the soap residue off of the equipment. Typically the soap
solution is prepared using 1 tablespoon of soap to 5 gallons of water.
Use sufficient amount of decontamination fluid (e.g., acid or solvent rinses) so that the
fluid flows over the equipment and runs off. Spraying the equipment with a minimal
amount of decontamination fluid that does not run off is ineffective.
Spent decontamination solutions are considered investigation-derived waste (IDW) and
must be managed as directed by the site-specific field program. Project and regulatory
requirements, chemical compatibility, ambient conditions and professional judgment
should be used to determine the appropriate decontamination process with respect to
combining and/or segregating decontamination fluids. Section 3 of this SOP provides
more guidance on the disposal procedures.
Several procedures can be established to minimize the potential for cross-contamination
or analytical interference by decontamination fluids. For example:
- The use of methanol in the decontamination procedure may not be appropriate if
methanol is a contaminant of concern.
- Isopropanol may be used as a substitute for methanol but may not be appropriate
when collecting samples for volatile organic compound (VOC) analyses. Residual
isopropanol on the equipment may cause substantial interferences in subsequent
VOC analyses and may result in unnecessary dilutions and/or false positive results if
isopropanol is not removed in subsequent decontamination steps. It should also be
noted that the application of isopropanol to hot metal surfaces (e.g., a steam-cleaned
split spoon) may cause oxidation of the isopropanol to acetone.
- If hexane is used in the decontamination procedure, caution should be used to ensure
that the hexane is completely volatilized and the equipment is subsequently rinsed
when samples are to be analyzed for VOCs and volatile petroleum hydrocarbons
(VPH). Residual hexane on equipment could interfere with the VOC and VPH
analyses and may result in unnecessary dilutions and/or false positive results.
- Cover monitoring and sampling equipment with protective material (i.e., aluminum
foil, polyethylene sheeting, or Ziploc® bags) to minimize potential re-contamination
after decontamination.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 6 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
- Use disposable sampling equipment when appropriate to minimize the need for
decontamination. Although disposable sampling tools are encouraged in order to
minimize the generation of decontamination fluids, it should be noted that plastic
tools may not be appropriate for collection of samples to be analyzed for
semivolatile organic compounds (SVOCs), pesticides, and polychlorinated biphenyls
(PCBs). Potential phthalate contamination may cause significant interferences in the
subsequent analyses and may result in unnecessary dilutions and/or false positive
results.
After decontamination, equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean
disposable powder-free nitrile gloves to prevent recontamination.
If equipment decontamination is performed in the field, the equipment should be moved away
(preferably upwind) from the decontamination area to prevent recontamination.
Equipment that is not decontaminated properly may result in potentially high biased results in
field samples. Note: Equipment blank collection may be appropriate after decontamination
of equipment used to collect highly contaminated samples.
1.6 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 40-hour Health and Safety
Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)
workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training.
2.0 PROCEDURES
Refer to the site-specific sampling plan and/or Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP), if
applicable, for site-specific procedures. Other state or federal requirements may be above and
beyond the scope of this SOP and will be followed if applicable. In all instances, the actual
procedures used should be documented and described in the field notes.
2.1 General
All personnel, sample containers, and equipment leaving the contaminated area of a site must be
decontaminated. Various decontamination methods will either physically remove contaminants
by abrasive and/or washing actions, inactivate contaminants by disinfection or sterilization, or
both. Decontamination procedures should be documented in the field book.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 7 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.2 Physical Decontamination Procedures
In many cases, gross contamination can be removed by physical means. The physical
decontamination techniques appropriate for equipment decontamination can be grouped into two
categories: abrasive methods and nonabrasive methods. In general, heavy equipment
decontamination is conducted by drilling and construction subcontractors and not by TRC
personnel. However, TRC personnel will typically need to document such decontamination
efforts as part of project work.
ABRASIVE CLEANING METHODS APPROPRIATE FOR DRILLING EQUIPMENT
(DRILLING RIGS, ETC.)
Abrasive cleaning methods involve rubbing and wearing away the top layer of the surface
containing the contaminant. The following abrasive methods are available but are not commonly
used:
Mechanical: Mechanical cleaning methods use brushes of metal or nylon. The amount and
type of contaminants removed will vary with the hardness of bristles, length of brushing time,
and degree of brush contact.
Air Blasting: Air blasting is used for cleaning large equipment, such as bulldozers, drilling
rigs, or auger bits. The equipment used in air blasting employs compressed air to force
abrasive material through a nozzle at high velocities. The distance between the nozzle and
the surface cleaned, as well as the pressure of air, the time of application, and the angle at
which the abrasive material strikes the surface, determines cleaning efficiency. Air blasting
has several disadvantages, including it is unable to control the amount of materials removed,
it can aerate contaminants, and it generates large amounts of waste.
Wet Blasting: Wet blasting, also used to clean large equipment, involves use of a suspended
fine abrasive delivered by compressed air to the contaminated area. The amount of materials
removed can be carefully controlled by using very fine abrasives. One disadvantage of this
method is the generation of a large amount of waste.
NONABRASIVE CLEANING METHODS APPROPRIATE FOR FIELD EQUIPMENT
(DRILLING AUGERS AND RIGS, ETC.)
Nonabrasive cleaning methods involve forcing the contaminant off of a surface with pressure. In
general, less of the equipment surface is removed using nonabrasive methods. The following
non-abrasive methods are available:
High-pressure Potable Water: This method consists of a high-pressure pump, an operator-
controlled directional nozzle, and a high-pressure hose. Flow rates typically range from 20 to
140 liters per minute.
This procedure is used the majority of the time and is more appropriate for equipment with
painted surfaces.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 8 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Ultrahigh-Pressure Potable Water: This system produces a pressurized water jet. The
ultrahigh-pressure spray removes tightly adhered surface film. The water velocity ranges
from 500 meters per second (m/sec) to 900 m/sec. Additives can enhance the method. This
method is not applicable for hand-held sampling equipment.
This procedure is not commonly used but would be appropriate for carbon steel drilling rods
and augers.
2.3 Procedure for Sampling Equipment
Sampling equipment, such as split-spoon samplers, shovels, hand augers, trowels, spoons,
spatulas, bailers, tethers, dippers, and pumps, will be cleaned using the following procedure.
Note: The overall number of containers needed for collection of decontamination fluids may vary
depending on chemical compatibilities, project and regulatory requirements, and ultimate disposal
methods for these fluids.
1. Lay out sufficient polyethylene sheeting on the ground or floor to allow placement of the
necessary number of containers (e.g., plastic wash basins or buckets) and an air drying area.
The number of decontamination steps and designated containers should be determined prior
to field sampling based on the site-specific sampling plan. At a minimum, one container
should be designated for the detergent wash. A second container should be designated for
water rinsing. A third container may be designated for nonwater rinsing. If more than one,
the nonwater rinsate fluids may need to be separated. Nonwater rinsate fluids should not be
combined with the detergent wash during decontamination. Place the containers on the
polyethylene sheeting. The decontamination line should progress from “dirty” to “clean”.
Note: In instances where acid or solvent rinses are required, additional containers may be
needed to manage collection and subsequent disposal of the spent decontamination fluids.
2. Fill the first container with potable water. Add sufficient nonphosphate concentrated
laboratory-grade soap to cause suds to form in the container. Do not use an excessive amount
of the soap (approximately 1 tablespoon of soap to 5 gallons of water), or rinsing the soap
residue off of the equipment will be difficult.
3. Brush any visible dirt off of the sampling equipment into a designated area before getting
equipment wet.
4. Using a clean, coarse scrub brush, submerge and wash the sampling equipment in the soap
solution in the first container, removing all dirt or visible hydrocarbons. Allow excess soap
to drain off the equipment into the container when finished. If cleaning a pump that is not
completely disassembled, run the submerged pump in the container long enough to allow
sufficient contact time with the internal components of the pump.
5. Rinse the equipment with potable water over an appropriate container, using a coarse scrub
brush or pressure sprayer to aid in the rinse if necessary. If an additional acid or solvent rinse
is not required, proceed to Step 8.
6. **If sampling for metals and if required by the project, rinse the equipment with nitric acid
over an appropriate container. Consider using a container dedicated to acidic solutions to
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 9 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
minimize the volume of liquid that needs to be neutralized later. A 10 percent nitric acid
solution is used on stainless steel equipment. A 1 percent nitric acid solution is used on all
other equipment. If not required, this step may be omitted.
Rinse the equipment over an appropriate container using deionized, distilled or organic-free
water. If cleaning a pump that is not completely disassembled, run the submerged pump in
the container long enough to allow sufficient contact time with the internal components of the
pump.
7. **If sampling for organic parameters and if required by the project, rinse the equipment over
an appropriate container using pesticide-grade methanol or isopropanol (see Cautions and
Potential Problems). If oily, a pesticide-grade hexane rinse should follow the
methanol/isopropanol rinse, or as an alternative, Simple Green® can be used if approved by
the Project Manager. Consider using an appropriate container dedicated to volatile solvents
to minimize the volume of liquid that subsequently needs to be managed as IDW. If not
required, this step may be omitted.
Allow the equipment to completely air dry prior to proceeding to the next step.
** Steps 6 and 7 are optional and may be used on a site-specific basis. The site-specific
sampling plan or QAPP, if available, should be consulted. In the absence of a sampling
plan or QAPP, the Project Manager will decide upon the necessity of these steps.
8. Rinse the equipment over an appropriate container using deionized, distilled or organic-free
water. If cleaning a pump that is not completely disassembled, run the submerged pump in
the container long enough to allow sufficient contact time with the internal components of the
pump.
9. Allow the equipment to completely air dry on a clean surface (e.g., polyethylene sheeting or a
clean container) (See*NOTE).
*NOTE that if temperature or humidity conditions preclude air drying equipment, sufficient
spares, if possible, should be available so that no item of sampling equipment need be used
more than once. If an ample amount of spare equipment is not available and the equipment
will not completely air dry, additional rinses with deionized, distilled or organic-free water
should be used. The inability of equipment to air dry and the usage of additional rinses
should be recorded in the field book or on the appropriate form.
10. Reassemble equipment, if necessary, and wrap completely in clean, unused, protective
material. Reuse of equipment on the same day without wrapping in protective material is
acceptable.
11. Spent decontamination fluids are considered IDW and must be managed as directed by the
site-specific field program.
12. Record the decontamination procedure in the field book or on the appropriate form.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 10 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.4 Procedure for Measuring Equipment
Measuring equipment, such as pressure transducers, water level indicators, oil/water interface
probes, and soil moisture/pH meters will be cleaned using the following procedure, unless it
conflicts with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Fill two clean containers (e.g., plastic wash basins or buckets) with potable water.
2. Add sufficient nonphosphate concentrated laboratory-grade soap to one container to form a
thin layer of soap suds. If oily residues are apparent, the use of Simple Green® may be
required.
3. Brush any visible dirt off of the measuring equipment before getting the equipment wet.
4. Either spray rinse the device with the soap solution over the first container, or for heavily
soiled equipment, immerse the device in the container containing soap and gently agitate.
Scrub device if it is soiled. Do not submerse any electrical controls or take-up reels.
Submerse only that portion of the device that came in contact with potential contaminants.
5. Immerse the device in the container containing the potable water and gently agitate. Do not
submerse any electrical connectors or take-up reels. Submerse only that portion of the device
that came in contact with potential contaminants.
6. Spray rinse equipment with deionized, distilled, or organic-free water over the last container
used.
7. Allow the equipment to air dry if time allows.
8. Record the decontamination procedure in the field book or on the appropriate form.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
IDW disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider IDW disposal methods and have a plan in place prior to performing
the field work. Provisions must be in place regarding what will be done with IDW. If IDW
cannot be returned to the site, consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper
labeling, on-site storage by the client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and
ultimately the pickup and disposal of the materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
One type of quality control sample specific to the field decontamination process is the equipment
blank. The equipment blank provides information about the effectiveness of the decontamination
process employed in the field. An equipment blank can detect contamination that may arise from
potentially contaminated equipment or equipment that has not been decontaminated effectively.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 11 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Equipment blanks consist of a sample of analyte-free (i.e., deionized, distilled, organic-free)
water that is poured over and through a decontaminated sampling device and placed in a clean
sample container. Ideally, the reagent water should come from the laboratory and be certified as
clean. If the blank water is not certified as clean and/or not supplied by the laboratory performing
the analyses, a separate water blank that has not run through the sampling equipment should also
be sent to the laboratory for analysis.
Equipment blanks are typically collected for all parameters of interest at a minimum rate of 1 per
20 samples for each parameter. The frequency of equipment blank collection will vary from
project to project, depending upon the data quality objectives, and will be specified in either the
site-specific sampling plan or QAPP. Equipment blanks are typically not required if dedicated
sampling equipment is used.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
All reagents used must be documented in the field book or on the appropriate form. Any
deviations from the decontamination procedures specified in the sampling plan or QAPP must be
approved by the Quality Assurance (QA) Officer and Project Manager and documented in the
field book. The lot number and vendor of each reagent used should be documented in the field
book. Refer to RMD SOP 001 for field documentation procedures.
6.0 REFERENCES
USEPA. December 1987. A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods. EPA/540/P-
87/001.
USEPA. January 1991. Compendium of ERT Groundwater Sampling Procedures. OSWER
Directive 9360.4-06. PB91-9211275.
USEPA. November 1992. RCRA Ground-Water Monitoring: Draft Technical Guidance.
EPA/530-R-93-001. USEPA Office of Solid Waste.
USEPA. January 1999. Compendium of ERT Groundwater Sampling Procedures. EPA/540/P-
91/007. OSWER Directive 9360.4-06. PB91-921275.
USEPA. December 20, 2011. Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination. SESDPROC-
205-R2. Region 4. Science and Ecosystems Support Division. Athens, Georgia.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 APRIL 2014 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 12 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A: SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 13 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Equipment Decontamination Page 14 of 14
Procedure No: RMD 010 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 1 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters
RMD 011
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
November 2014
Authorization Signatures
Technical Review
Darby Litz
Date
11/21/2014
Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
11/21/14
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 2 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope and Applicability ........................................................................ 3
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 4
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 4
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 4
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 5
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 5
2.1 Temperature ......................................................................................... 6
2.2 Dissolved Oxygen................................................................................. 7
2.3 pH ......................................................................................................... 9
2.4 Specific Conductance ......................................................................... 11
2.5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential (ORP) ................................................. 12
2.6 Turbidity .............................................................................................. 13
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................. 15
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ................................................... 15
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 16
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 16
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 16
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Oxygen Solubility at Indicated Pressure
Attachment B Example Field Instrument Calibration Logs
Attachment C SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 3 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope and Applicability
The purpose of this standard operating procedure (SOP) is to provide a framework for calibrating
field instruments used to measure water quality parameters for ground water and surface water.
Water quality instruments addressed in this SOP include those that measure temperature, pH,
dissolved oxygen (DO), conductivity/specific conductance, oxidation-reduction potential (ORP),
and turbidity.
1.2 Summary of Method
All monitoring instruments must be calibrated before they are used to measure environmental
samples. This SOP outlines the general methods for field instrument calibration, calibration
documentation requirements, and corrective action procedures that will be implemented during
field activities. Calibration procedures are different for each field instrument used and these
procedures should be provided by the instrument manufacturer. The manufacturer’s instruction
manual (including the instrument specifications) should accompany the instrument into the field.
At a minimum, calibration and/or a calibration check must be performed at the beginning of each
day prior to use. Site-specific work plans should be consulted for required calibration frequency.
Note: The initial calibration may be performed in the office prior to the field event or by the
equipment supplier; however, calibration checks should be performed on site prior to use on the
day of the fieldwork.
1.3 Equipment
The following equipment may be utilized when calibrating water quality parameter measuring
equipment. Project-specific conditions or laboratory requirements may warrant the addition or
deletion of items from this list.
Appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE), as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP).
Water quality meter capable of measuring one or more of the following based on project
scope: pH, temperature, DO, specific conductivity, and ORP (e.g., YSI 600XL, Horiba U-50,
Hydrolab Quanta/QED MP-20, or equivalent)
Turbidity meter (e.g., LaMotte Model 2020e, Hach 2100P, or equivalent)
Deionized water
Flow-through cell
Ring stand with clamp
Paper towels
Soft tissue (e.g., Kimwipes®)
Cuvettes
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 4 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Buffer solutions at pH 4, 7 and 10 standard units (SU)*. Commercially available solutions
that have been validated by comparison to National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) standards are recommended for routine use.
Conductivity solution (potassium chloride, typically 1,413 micromhos/centimeter
[mhos/cm])*
ORP calibration solution (e.g., Zobell)*
Turbidity standards (0, 1, 10 nephelometric turbidity units [NTUs] or StablCal Kit)*
Zero DO solution (0.0 milligrams per liter [mg/L])*
DO membrane kit (electrolyte solution, membranes)
NIST thermometer (0.2ºC accuracy)*
Small glass or polyethylene jars to hold the calibration standards (4-8 oz.)
Field book
Field instrument calibration logs
Cup or spray bottle for the deionized water
*Dependent on the project-specific requirements and the instrument manufacturer
1.4 Definitions
Not applicable
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE as defined in
the HASP.
Implementing this SOP will require the use of calibration solutions. The following health and
safety precautions must be taken with the pH, conductivity, turbidity, zero DO and ORP
solutions: Avoid inhalation, skin and eye contact, and ingestion.
Maintenance of the instruments will require the use of liquid cleaners. Although these substances
are not hazardous materials, TRC will appropriately handle and store them at all times in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
General cautions and potential problems are discussed below. Specific issues for individual
parameters are discussed in Section 2.
Prior to calibration, all instrument probes must be cleaned according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Failure to perform this step (proper maintenance) can lead to erroneous
measurements. Rental instruments are routinely maintained by the vendor but should be
checked for residues upon receipt.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 5 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Prior to using calibration standards, check and record all expiration dates and lot numbers for
the solutions on the field instrument calibration log. Discard any calibration standards that
are past their expiration date.
Avoid storing calibration solutions in extremely hot or cold temperatures to maintain solution
integrity and prevent calibration errors.
The volume of the calibration solutions must be sufficient to cover both the probe being
calibrated and the temperature sensor (see manufacturer’s instructions for additional
information).
Pre-rinse the sensor and calibration cup with a small amount of calibration solution to
minimize dilution or cross-contamination.
If desired, use a ring stand and clamp to secure the sonde in an upright position. This will
prevent the sonde from falling over and damaging the probes.
While calibrating or performing sample measurements, make sure there are no air bubbles
lodged between the probe and the probe guard.
Do not immerse the sensors in sea water or other highly saline water, alcohol or organic
solvents.
Problems during calibration may indicate the need to clean or replace sensors, electrodes or
membranes or replace the calibration solutions.
Have several clean absorbent paper towels or cotton cloths available to dry the probe between
rinses and calibration solutions. Shake excess water off of the probes and dry off the outside
of the probe sensors.
All meters may have different relative accuracy, which will be specified in the instrument
manual. Confirm that the meter being used meets the project’s accuracy requirements.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project- and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- OSHA 40-hour Health and Safety Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training
2.0 PROCEDURES
Prior to use, instruments that will be used during field activities will be inspected to ensure they
are clean, checked for possible malfunctions, and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer’s
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 6 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
procedures. Often, equipment provided by a rental company is calibrated prior to shipment, and a
calibration certificate is provided with the equipment. Review the calibration certificate provided
by the equipment supplier.
Calibration checks (or verifying that instrument readings fall within an acceptable range of a
standard without running through the full instrument calibration steps) will be performed on field
instruments prior to their initial use, at least once daily, or whenever indications of faulty readings
or instrument malfunction occurs. Some instruments or certain project scopes may require more
frequent calibration checks depending on project quality objectives. In general, instrument
selection and calibration will include the following steps:
Determine which instruments are needed for the specific field tasks. Record the make, model
number, and serial number of the instrument on the field instrument calibration log or in the
field book.
Obtain the necessary instruments and standard solutions for calibration. Check expiration
dates on standard solutions and replace if out of date. Record the manufacturer, true value, lot
number and expiration date of the standard solutions on the field instrument calibration log or
in the field book.
Assemble the instrument and turn it on allowing the instrument to warm up.
Check battery charge, and charge or replace if necessary.
Clean instrument (if necessary).
If applicable, program the multi-probe instrument so that the applicable parameters to be
measured will be displayed.
Calibrate the instrument prior to field use in accordance with manufacturer’s procedures.
(Note: If applicable, calibrate DO and conductivity first, because these parameters may affect
the other calibrations).
Document all calibration activities and results on the field instrument calibration log or in the
field book.
If the instrument malfunctions and cannot be corrected, obtain a replacement.
Clean and decontaminate the instrument after use and before storage.
Conduct calibration checks at least once per day or as needed.
The subsections that follow provide additional details and guidance regarding calibration for
specific parameters; however, since every field instrument is different, refer to the specific
instrument’s manual for appropriate operating and calibration procedures.
2.1 Temperature
Most instrument manuals state that calibration of the temperature sensor is not required, but this
SOP recommends that the temperature sensor be checked to verify its accuracy. This accuracy
check should be performed at least once per year and the accuracy check date/information should
be kept with the instrument. If the accuracy check date/information is not included with the
instrument or the last check was performed over a year prior to the date of use, it is recommended
that the temperature sensor accuracy be checked at the beginning of the sampling event. If the
instrument contains multiple temperature sensors, each sensor should be checked. Accuracy
checks may be performed by the manufacturer/equipment supplier or in the field. Review the
calibration certificate provided by the equipment supplier.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 7 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
In the event of suspect temperature readings, the following verification procedure can be
performed.
FIELD VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
1. Record the manufacturer, model number, and the certification number of the NIST
thermometer being used to check the instrument’s temperature sensor on the field instrument
calibration log or in the field book. Allow a container filled with water to equilibrate to
ambient temperature.
2. Place an NIST thermometer and the instrument’s temperature sensor into the water, and wait
approximately 2 to 3 minutes for both temperature readings to stabilize.
3. Record the temperature displayed by the thermometer and the temperature sensor on the field
instrument calibration log or in the field book.
4. Compare the two measurements. The instrument’s temperature sensor must agree with the
NIST thermometer measurement within the accuracy of the sensor (typically +0.15ºC). If the
measurements do not agree, determine the correction factor to be applied to any subsequent
temperature measurements made with this instrument. This correction factor must be applied
to all readings made with the temperature sensor of this instrument.
Correction Factor = NIST thermometer value – temperature sensor value
5. Record the date the temperature sensor check was performed and the correction factor that
was determined, if applicable, on the field instrument calibration log or in the field book.
2.2 Dissolved Oxygen
DO is the volume of oxygen that is dissolved in water and is typically measured using an
electrochemical membrane sensor.
CAUTIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH DO MEASUREMENTS
The DO probe’s membrane and electrolyte solution should be checked prior to the
sampling period and replaced if needed. If wrinkles or air bubbles are present under the
membrane, if the membrane is torn or dirty, or if the electrolyte solution looks
contaminated, replace both the membrane and electrolyte solution prior to calibration.
Failure to perform this step may lead to erratic or erroneous measurements.
Rental instruments are routinely maintained by the vendor, but the membrane should be
checked for signs of wear upon receipt.
If the probe reading shows the error message, “value out of range”, the instrument probe
must be recalibrated at a minimum. If the error persists, replace the sensor membrane and
recalibrate.
Most meters will allow you to calibrate the meter in air or against a wet sponge, which
gives a "saturated air" calibration. Like pH, conductivity, and ORP, DO is heavily
dependent on temperature. DO is also dependent upon barometric pressure. Typically
DO is calibrated by entering the barometric pressure (usually in mm of mercury).
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 8 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Barometric pressure is dependent upon elevation, so be aware of substantial differences
in elevation between your sampling location and the location from which you are
obtaining the barometric pressure reading. Use the Oxygen Solubility at Indicated
Pressure chart in Attachment A for comparison to your calibrated reading.
Barometric pressure should be corrected to local altitude for DO calibration:
True BP (mm Hg) = [Corrected BP (mm Hg)] – [2.5 * Local Altitude (ft. above sea
level)/100]
If the calibration cup is used for DO, ensure the cup is loose to allow for pressure
equilibration.
Wait 3 to 5 minutes for the air in the cup to saturate with water during DO calibration.
If calibrating in air, remove water droplets from the membrane by shaking the probe prior
to inserting it into the calibration environment.
Allow the temperature to stabilize completely in the calibration environment.
Always keep the sensor clean of biofouling, such as bacteria or algae growth which may
generate or consume oxygen resulting in erroneous readings.
Keep the sensor free of oil, which could clog the membrane and prevent oxygen from
diffusing to the sensor.
Store the probe in a moist environment to keep the membrane from drying out, but do not
store it in water which could encourage algae growth on the probe.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Gently dry the temperature sensor according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Place a wet sponge, a wet paper towel, or 1/8 inch of water on the bottom of the DO
calibration container that comes with the instrument. (The protective cover of the probe
assembly also serves as the container used for the DO calibration.)
3. Place the DO probe in the container without the probe coming in contact with the wet sponge
or paper towel. The probe must fit loosely in the container to ensure it is vented to the
atmosphere.
4. Allow the confined air to become saturated with water vapor (saturation occurs in
approximately 3 to 5 minutes as temperature becomes stable). During this time, turn on the
instrument to allow the DO probe to warm up (may require at least 10-20 minutes warm-up
time).
5. Record the barometric pressure (usually in mm of mercury) from the instrument’s onboard
sensor, if available. If the instrument does not have an onboard barometer, this measurement
can also be determined from an on-site barometer if a weather station is on site and manually
entered into the meter. It is recommended that the barometric pressure not be obtained from
the local weather service unless the pressure is corrected for the elevation of the sampling
location and this is the only source of barometric data. [Note: inches of mercury times 25.4
mm/inch mercury equals mm of mercury].
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 9 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
6. Record the DO reading in mg/L and percent and compare this reading to the Oxygen
Solubility at Indicated Pressure chart in Attachment A. For example, if the barometric
pressure is 750 mm Hg and the temperature inside the calibration cup is 25ºC, the DO in
mg/L reading should be 8.13 mg/L. Record this value on the field instrument calibration log.
7. If the values recorded on the field instrument calibration log for DO in mg/L do not agree
with the published values from Attachment A and are not within the accuracy of the
instrument (such as + 0.2 mg/L and + 2%, depending on the reading), repeat calibration. If
this does not work, change the membrane and electrolyte solution and repeat calibration.
8. Remove the probe from the container, rinse it with deionized water, pat it dry with a towel,
and place it into a zero (0.0 mg/L) DO standard if being used as part of the calibration. Fill
the protective cup with the fresh zero DO standard. Pour the zero DO standard into the
protective cup; the standard should be close enough to the top, so that the DO probe fits
tightly into the container (no headspace). Check and record the unit’s temperature reading.
9. Wait until the “mg/L DO” readings have stabilized. The instrument should read between -0.5
and +0.5 mg/L or to the accuracy of the instrument (usually + 0.2 mg/L) within 3 minutes.
Record this value on the field instrument calibration log. If the instrument does not reach this
value, it may be necessary to clean the probe and change the membrane and electrolyte
solution. Repeat the zero DO step if the value obtained is not acceptable. If this does not
work, prepare a new 0.0 mg/L standard. If these procedures do not work, consult the
equipment vendor for troubleshooting or equipment replacement.
NOTE: For Zero DO checks: The solution used for this check contains sodium meta-
bisulfite or sodium sulfite, which are harmful to the sensor and membrane. It is common
practice to recalibrate the meter to 100% saturation after conducting a zero DO check to
confirm that the sensor is still operating correctly. A zero DO check is not performed every
day the instrument is in use for this reason, but a check should be performed at a minimum of
once per sampling event. If conducting this check, be sure to record the manufacturer, true
value, lot number, and expiration date of the solution on the field instrument calibration log.
2.3 pH
The pH is the measure of the degree of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution as measured on a
scale of 0 to 14 SU. The pH of a sample is determined electrometrically using a glass electrode.
All pH measurements are in SU.
CAUTIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH PH MEASUREMENTS
Choose the appropriate buffered standards that will bracket the expected values at the
sampling locations. For ground water, the pH will usually be close to 7 SU. A minimum
of two standards are typically needed for the calibration: one close to 7 SU, one at least
two pH units below 7 SU or at least two pH units above 7 SU. The instrument will need
to be re-calibrated if the water sample’s pH is outside the range defined by the two
standards used in the initial calibration, either by adding a third calibration point (if the
meter will allow) or by selecting two new pH standards that bracket the water sample’s
pH.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 10 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Regardless if performing a two- or three-point calibration, always calibrate with pH 7
buffer first.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Allow the buffered standards to equilibrate to the ambient temperature.
2. Fill calibration containers with the buffered standards to ensure the pH probe and temperature
sensor are completely submerged.
3. Remove the cover of the probe, rinse the probe in a cup filled with deionized water or use a
spray bottle, and blot the probe dry with a soft tissue.
4. Enter the value of the first pH buffer solution (e.g., pH 7), immerse the probe in the standard,
and allow at least 1 minute for temperature equilibration before proceeding. Record the
temperature on the field instrument calibration log.
5. Enter the buffered solution value (7) into the pH calibration menu of the instrument. Allow
the pH reading to stabilize for approximately 30 seconds, and if the reading does not change,
finish the calibration and record the calibrated value on the field instrument calibration log.
The calibration values after adjustment shall be within the accuracy of the instrument, or as
required by the project. For example, if the accuracy of the meter is +0.1 SU, then the
calibration values after adjustment shall be between 6.9 and 7.1 SU. If the calibration values
after adjustment are outside of this range, recalibrate. If readings continue to fluctuate or
readings do not stabilize after recalibration, consult the equipment vendor for troubleshooting
or equipment replacement (e.g., may need a new pH electrode).
6. Remove probe from the initial buffer solution, rinse in a cup filled with deionized water or
use a spray bottle, and blot dry with soft tissue. Dispose of the used buffer solution.
7. Immerse probe into the second buffer solution (e.g., pH 4). Repeat step #5, substituting “4”
into the pH calibration menu instead of “7”.
8. Remove probe from the second buffer solution, rinse in a cup filled with deionized water or
use a spray bottle, and blot dry with soft tissue. Dispose of the used buffer solution.
9. Immerse probe in third buffer solution (e.g., pH 10) or continue to step #11 if only a two-
point calibration is being performed. Repeat step #5, substituting “10” into the pH calibration
menu instead of “7”.
10. Remove probe from the third buffer solution, rinse in a cup filled with deionized water or use
a spray bottle, and blot dry with soft tissue. Dispose of the used buffer solution.
11. To perform the instrument pH check, select monitoring/run mode, (ensure that the initial
buffer solution temperature [pH 7] has not changed), and immerse the probe into the buffer
solution. Wait for the reading to stabilize. The instrument should read the initial standard
value (7 SU) within the accuracy of the instrument, or as required by the project. Record the
pH 7 check reading on the field instrument calibration log. If the reading is not within the
acceptance criteria, then re-calibrate the instrument. If re-calibration does not correct the
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 11 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
instrument reading, then the calibration range may be too wide. Reducing the calibration
range by using standards that are closer together may improve the instrument’s accuracy.
2.4 Specific Conductance
Conductivity is used to measure the ability of an aqueous solution to conduct an electrical current.
Specific conductance is the conductivity value corrected to 25ºC. Calibrating an instrument for
specific conductance automatically calibrates the instrument for conductivity and vice-versa.
CAUTIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH SPECIFIC CONDUCTANCE
MEASUREMENTS
Most instruments are calibrated against a single standard that is near the specific
conductance of the environmental samples. A second standard that is above the
environmental sample specific conductance can be used to check the linearity of the
instrument in the range of measurements. However, a single-point calibration standard is
adequate to assess the accuracy and operation of the sensor.
Calibrate the conductivity with a standard near the anticipated conductivity of the water.
For fresh water, a 1 mS/cm standard is appropriate.
For some meters, it is important that the top vent hole of the conductivity sensor be
immersed during the calibration. Review the instrument manual to determine if this is
required.
Specific conductance/conductivity can have different units (e.g., mmho/cm, mS/cm,
µmho/cm, µS/cm), especially on auto-ranging instruments. Note: mhos/cm =
Siemens/cm. Check with the Project Manager or database manager to determine if field
measurements should be restricted to a consistent unit (e.g., µmhos/cm or µS/cm, not
mmhos/cm or mS/cm) so that conversion is not necessary when importing data into a
database.
Be aware of meters which autocorrect for temperature and how to enter the calibration
value per the procedures in the instrument’s manual. To calibrate instruments that
autocorrect for temperature, enter the calibration value of the solution (µmhos/cm at
25C). For instruments without automatic temperature compensation, the solution’s
conductivity value must be corrected for the temperature that the sensor is reading before
entering the value into the meter. In some cases, you may be able to adjust the
temperature of the calibration solution to near 25C, such that the standard calibration
value is applicable; otherwise an adjustment for temperature needs to be accounted for.
Additionally, if calibrating for conductivity instead of specific conductance, the
solution’s conductivity value must be corrected for the temperature that the sensor is
reading.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1. Allow the calibration standard to equilibrate to the ambient temperature.
2. Remove probe from its storage container, rinse the probe with a small amount of deionized
water, and pat dry the sensor with a soft tissue.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 12 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
3. Lower the sensor into the conductivity standard. Gently move the probe up and down in the
solution to remove any air bubbles from the sensor if present. Allow the probe to sit in the
solution for at least 30 seconds to allow values to equilibrate before proceeding.
4. Enter the calibration value of the solution (e.g., 1,413 µmhos/cm at 25C). Record the
temperature of the solution on the field instrument calibration log, and allow the specific
conductance reading to stabilize for approximately 30 seconds. Record the calibrated value
after stabilization on the field instrument calibration log. The reading should be within ±5%
of the true value. If the reading is not within this range, recalibrate. If readings continue to
fluctuate significantly after a recalibration, consult the equipment vendor for troubleshooting
or equipment replacement.
5. Remove probe from the standard, rinse the probe with deionized water, and replace the
protective cover over the sensors.
2.5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential (ORP)
The oxidation-reduction potential is the electrometric difference measured in a solution between
an inert indicator electrode and a suitable reference electrode. The electrometric difference is
measured in millivolts and is temperature dependent.
CAUTIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH ORP MEASUREMENTS
Note that ORP is not usually the same as Eh. Eh is ORP measured relative to a standard
hydrogen electrode (SHE). Typical ORP reference electrodes used in the field are
Ag/AgCl electrodes, not SHEs. The difference is that Eh would be approximately
200mV higher than ORP measured against a Ag/AgCl reference electrode. See Standard
Methods 2580B and YSI Tech Note (2005) for more details.
Some meters allow you to calibrate ORP, but many do not allow calibration. Testing
solutions are available to verify your ORP reading but they are not accurate enough to be
used as calibration standards.
ORP is temperature dependent. Look up the millivolt (mV) calibration value at the
measured temperature from the millivolt versus temperature correction table usually
found on the standard bottle or on the standard instruction sheet. It may be necessary to
interpolate millivolt values between temperatures.
CALIBRATION OR VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
1. Allow the calibration standard (e.g., a Zobell solution) to equilibrate to ambient temperature.
2. Remove the cover of the probe, and place it into the standard.
3. While stirring the standard, wait for the probe temperature to stabilize, and then read the
temperature.
4. Look up the millivolt (mV) value at this temperature from the millivolt versus temperature
correction table usually found on the standard bottle or on the standard instruction sheet. It
may be necessary to interpolate millivolt values between temperatures. Enter the
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 13 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
temperature-corrected ORP value, and calibrate the instrument. Record the values on the
field instrument calibration log.
5. The reading should remain unchanged within manufacturer’s specifications. If it changes, re-
calibrate. If readings continue to change after calibration, consult the manufacturer.
6. If the instrument instruction manual states the instrument is factory calibrated, then verify the
factory calibration against the standard. If the reading does not agree with the standard
within the accuracy of the instrument, the instrument will need to be re-calibrated by the
manufacturer.
2.6 Turbidity
Turbidity refers to how clear the water is and is a measure of relative sample clarity. The greater
the amount of total suspended solids in the water, the higher the measured turbidity. The
turbidity method is based upon a comparison of intensity of light scattered by a sample under
defined conditions with the intensity of light scattered by a standard reference suspension. A
turbidity meter is a nephelometer with a visible light source for illuminating the sample and one
or more photo-electric detectors placed 90 degrees to the path of the light source. Turbidity
values are recorded in NTUs.
CAUTIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS WITH TURBIDITY MEASUREMENTS
Some instruments will only accept one standard. For these instruments, the standards
will serve as check points.
Some regulatory agencies will not allow turbidity measurements through a flow-through
cell, and require a stand alone turbidity meter. Verify that the selected meter will meet
project objectives prior to use.
For the greatest accuracy during the calibration procedure, ensure that after the meter is
blanked and the blank is scanned as a sample, the reading is 0.00 NTU. If not, re-zero the
meter and scan the blank again until it reads 0.00 NTU. When scanning the calibration
standards as the sample, scan the calibration standard three times removing the tube from
the chamber after each scan. The readings should be consistent. Use the last consistent
reading to calibrate the meter. If the readings are not consistent, avoid using an aberrant
reading to calibrate the meter.
The meter should be placed on a surface that is free from vibrations. Vibrations can cause
high readings.
Gently mix the sample by inverting before taking a reading, but avoid introducing air
bubbles.
Scratches, fingerprints, and water droplets on the outside of the cuvettes can cause
additional light scatter, leading to inaccurate readings. If necessary, wipe the outside of
the cuvette with a soft tissue. If the cuvette is scratched or dirty, discard.
Ensure that the cuvette is always placed in the chamber in the same orientation, as
differences in orientation can cause differences in results. Proper cuvette orientation may
be indicated by a mark or arrow on both the cuvette and the instrument.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 14 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES – STAND ALONE TURBIDITY METER
NOTE: Sometimes standards are provided in the cuvette with the meter.
1. Rinse a cuvette with deionized water. Shake the cuvette to remove as much water as
possible. Do not wipe the inside of the cuvette, because lint from the wipe may remain in the
cuvette. Add the standard to the cuvette.
2. Place the 0.0 NTU standard into the instrument and scan the sample (measure the standard).
Record the reading on the field instrument calibration log. The 10.0 NTU standard can be
measured after the 0.0 NTU standard is scanned.
3. Select the 10.0 NTU standard and scan the sample (measure the standard). The reading
should be within +10% of the true value. Record the reading on the field instrument
calibration log. If the reading is within the acceptance criteria, then move on to step # 5. If
not, calibrate the instrument to 10.0 NTU. Record the reading and any significant changes on
the field instrument calibration log.
4. After adjusting the calibration, re-read the 10.0 NTU standard to ensure it is now meeting
accuracy requirements. If not, repeat step #3. Otherwise, continue to step #5.
5. Repeat step #3, if needed, for the 1.0 NTU standard.
6. After adjusting the calibration, re-read the 1.0 NTU standard to ensure it is now meeting
accuracy requirements (+10% of the true value). If not, repeat step #3. Otherwise, continue
to step #7.
7. As a final check of the instrument, scan the blank (0.0 NTU standard). The unit display
should read very close to zero. Record the reading on the field instrument calibration log.
NOTE: If during the calibration procedure, you find the value of the standard is >50% from
the expected value (e.g., 0.49 NTU for the 1.0 NTU standard), scrolling to the true value
(e.g., 1.0 NTU) and attempting to calibrate will result in an error code, because the value to
which you have changed it is >50% of the expected value of the standard. In this case, it is
necessary to re-calibrate the unit from the beginning starting with a blank. If this fails to
produce adjustable and reproducible values for the 1.0 and 10.0 NTU standards, re-calibrate
using new standards and discard the current standards. If the meter still fails to calibrate
following repeated attempts at calibration, consult the equipment vendor for troubleshooting
or equipment replacement.
NOTE: If only performing a two-point calibration (depending on project requirements), the
0.0 NTU and 10 NTU (or comparable NTU level) standards should be used.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES – MULTI-PARAMETER METER WITH FLOW-
THROUGH CELL
This is a two point calibration with a standard and turbidity free water. The standard can be
formazin, polymer beads, or a meter-specific quick calibration solution. Turbidity free water
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 15 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
can be obtained by filtering distilled or deionized water through a 0.1, 0.3, or 0.45 micron
filter.
1. Rinse the calibration cup and sensors with the turbidity free water. Fill the cup with enough
water so that the turbidity sensor is covered (sensors pointed down).
2. Scan the sample (measure the standard). After the reading has stabilized, enter the zero
turbidity value into the meter in accordance with manufacturer directions and record the
reading on the field instrument calibration log.
3. Rinse the calibration cup and sensors with the standard solution. Fill the cup with enough
standard solution so that the turbidity sensor is covered (sensors pointed down).
4. Scan the sample (measure the standard). After the reading has stabilized, enter the standard
solution turbidity value into the meter in accordance with manufacturer directions and record
the reading on the field instrument calibration log. If the reading is within the acceptance
criteria, calibration is complete. If not, recalibrate the instrument. Record the reading and
any significant changes on the field instrument calibration log.
NOTE: If during the calibration procedure, you find the value of the standard is outside of
the range acceptable by the meter and attempting to calibrate results in an error code, it is
necessary to re-calibrate the unit from the beginning starting with a blank/turbidity free
water. If this fails to produce acceptable and reproducible values for the standards, re-
calibrate using new standards and discard the current standards. If the meter still fails to
calibrate following repeated attempts at calibration, consult the equipment vendor for
troubleshooting or equipment replacement.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider investigation-derived waste disposal methods and have a plan in place
prior to performing the field work. Provisions must be in place as to what will be done with
investigation-derived waste. If investigation-derived waste cannot be returned to the site,
consider material containment, such as a composite drum or roll-off bin, proper labeling, on-site
storage by the client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and ultimately the pickup and
disposal of the materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
In addition to checking the calibration of instruments prior to measurements, calibration checks
may also be required at other times of the day. If there are significant temperature fluctuations or
erroneous readings, a calibration check may be required. Some programs require a post-
calibration check at the conclusion of the day to ensure that instrument drift has not occurred.
Refer to the site-specific work plan for calibration frequency.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 16 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Comparing current values with historical values at the same measuring location can be helpful in
assessing instrument and calibration reliability.
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
All work must be dated and signed by the analyst. Any changes should be crossed out with a
single line, initialed, and dated.
Prior to calibrating, the field equipment and calibration standard information should be recorded
on a field instrument calibration log and/or in the field book. For field equipment, the
information recorded should include the make, model number, and the serial number of the
instrument. Each instrument can be assigned an identification number that can be referenced in
future field notes or when filling out the field instrument calibration log.
For calibration standards, the information recorded should include the manufacturer, expiration
date, true value, and any other description, such as lot number. Each calibration standard can also
be assigned an identification number that can be referenced in future field notes or when filling
out the field instrument calibration log. If standards are not supplied with an expiration date, the
standards should be initialed and dated when received and when opened (not applicable for
standards supplied with the rental equipment).
The calibration records provided by the equipment vendor and the certificates of analysis for each
standard will be maintained in the project files.
All calibration measurements must be documented in the field book or on a separate field
instrument calibration log. Example field instrument calibration logs are presented in Attachment
B. At a minimum, the field instrument calibration log must include the instrument information
described above, calibration standard information described above, calibration date, and the
instrument calibration results.
6.0 REFERENCES
USEPA. January 19, 2010. Standard Operating Procedure, Calibration of Field Instruments,
Revision No. 2. USEPA Region I.
American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water
Environment Federation. January 2012. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater, 22nd Edition.
YSI Environmental. 2005. Measuring ORP on YSI 6-Series Sondes: Tips, Cautions and
Limitations. YSI Environmental Tech Note. http://www.ysi.com/media/pdfs/T608-Measuring-
ORP-on-YSI-6-Series-Sondes-Tips-Cautions-and-Limitations.pdf.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 NOVEMBER 2014 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 17 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A
Oxygen Solubility at Indicated Pressure
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 18 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A (page 1 of 2)
Table taken from EPA Region I SOP, Calibration of Field Instruments, January 10, 2010.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 19 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A (Page 2 of 2)
Table taken from EPA Region I SOP, Calibration of Field Instruments, January 10, 2010.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 20 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment B
Example Field Instrument Calibration Logs
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 21 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 22 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 23 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment C
SOP Fact Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 24 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Calibration of Field Instruments for Water Quality Parameters Page 25 of 25
Procedure No: RMD 011 Revision: 0 Effective: 11/2014
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 1 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Headspace Field Screening Procedure
RMD 014
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
April 2015
Authorization Signatures
Technical Reviewer
Jamie Stapleton
Date
4/10/15
Remediation Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
4/10/15
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes
other than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 2 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope & Applicability ............................................................................ 3
1.2 Summary of Method ............................................................................. 3
1.3 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................. 4
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations ............................................................ 4
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems ......................................................... 4
1.6.1 Environmental Factors .................................................................. 4
1.6.2 Ionization Potentials of Contaminants of Concern ........................ 5
1.6.3 High Levels of Methane ................................................................ 5
1.6.4 Use of Headspace Field Screening Data ...................................... 6
1.6.5 Use of Thermal Enhancement for Headspace Measurements...... 6
1.7 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 6
2.0 PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 7
2.1 Calibration Procedures ......................................................................... 7
2.2 Field Screening Procedures ................................................................. 8
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL ................................................... 9
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................... 9
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT ...................................... 10
6.0 REFERENCES ............................................................................................. 10
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................ 10
ATTACHMENTS
Attachment A Example Documentation for Headspace Field Screening
Results
Attachment B Photoionization Characteristics of Selected Compounds
Attachment C Quick Reference Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 3 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope & Applicability
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) was prepared to direct TRC personnel in the methods
for conducting headspace field screening measurements of solid and aqueous samples during field
investigations. This SOP does not cover screening for health & safety purposes or well mouth and
tank headspace.
1.2 Summary of Method
The objective of headspace field screening is to obtain organic vapor/gas measurements of solid
or aqueous media encountered during solid or aqueous sampling. The procedure involves
collecting solid or aqueous samples, sealing them in airtight containers, and analyzing the Total
Organic Vapors (TOVs) that form within the container using a portable vapor/gas detector.
Headspace field screening data can be used to pre-screen field samples or as a guide to direct
subsequent investigations. Data collected using these methods are considered qualitative and
specific compounds cannot be distinguished.
1.3 Equipment
The following list of equipment may be utilized when conducting headspace field screening
measurements. Project-specific conditions or requirements may warrant the use of additional
equipment or deletion of items from this list.
Appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE) as specified in the site-specific
Health and Safety Plan (HASP)
Photoionization detector (PID) with appropriate electron volt (eV) lamp source (see Section
1.6.2 for selection of proper lamp source) or flame ionization detector (FID)
Aluminum foil
500 ml clean jars or larger (for solid samples) - jars less than 8 oz. capacity should not be
used
One quart or one gallon resealable plastic bags (for solid samples)
40 ml to 1,000 ml clean jars (for aqueous samples)
Field book
Charcoal filter (for FID only, if methane present)
Moisture filter/external water trap (for PID only)
Tedlar bag(s)
Isobutylene (100 parts per million by volume [ppmV], at a minimum): compressed gas
cylinder (for PID)
Methane (100 ppmV, at a minimum): compressed gas cylinder (for FID)
Zero air: compressed gas cylinder or carbon filter with ambient air
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 4 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Sharpie pen
1.4 Definitions
FID An instrument that uses a flame to break down volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) into ions that can be measured by the detector.
Headspace The area/space between the sample media and the top of the airtight
container holding the sample. Organic vapors, if present, will
collect in this area/space and can be measured.
PID An instrument that uses an ultraviolet light source to break down
VOCs into ions that can be measured by the detector.
VOCs Any chemical compound based on carbon chains or rings with a
vapor pressure greater than 2 mm of mercury.
1.5 Health & Safety Considerations
TRC personnel will be on site when implementing this SOP. Therefore, TRC personnel shall
follow the site-specific HASP. TRC personnel will use the appropriate level of PPE as defined in
the HASP.
Implementing this SOP will require the use of compressed gases for portable meter calibration.
These gases may be hazardous materials and TRC will appropriately transport, handle and store
them at all times.
1.6 Cautions and Potential Problems
1.6.1 Environmental Factors
Environmental factors may influence the performance of these methods. These factors include:
1. High moisture in soil or sediment. High moisture levels in soil/sediment can limit the amount
of contaminants that volatilize into the container headspace. High moisture levels affect PID
readings more than FID readings and may cause a positive or negative bias or inconsistent
and non-comparable readings. For this reason, headspace field screening readings of aqueous
samples using a PID may not be appropriate. A water trap or filter should be used with a PID
to reduce these impacts.
2. A slowly increasing response on a PID may result from moisture levels interfering with
instrument measurements. Instrumentation with digital (LED/LCD) displays may not be able
to discern maximum headspace response unless equipped with a maximum hold feature or
strip-chart recorder.
3. High organic levels in soil or sediment and organic matter in aqueous samples. Contaminants
can sorb onto organic matter (i.e., leaves, peat), which can limit the amount of contaminants
that volatilize into the container headspace and may cause inconsistent or non-comparable
readings. The presence of organic matter in aqueous samples (i.e., microbial populations) can
reduce volatilization of contaminants. High levels of organics in soil/sediment and aqueous
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 5 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
samples may also produce methane, a natural gas that is included in the TOV readings from
FIDs, but not recorded by PIDs. A charcoal filter may be used with an FID to remove the
methane from the vapor sample.
4. Limited pore space due to fines (e.g., clay or silt). It may be difficult to generate headspace
measurements in a tight clay matrix.
5. Meteorological variations, especially humidity and ambient temperature. Normal ambient
temperature variations could affect the amount of vapors that form in the headspace. Very
cold temperatures will limit volatilization of VOCs. Increasing ambient temperature as the
day progresses will result in more volatilization and higher readings, an effect that needs to
be considered when using the data to make decisions. PIDs may not be able to operate in
heavy rain so the Project Manager should be consulted if inclement weather is expected.
6. Background ambient levels of VOCs. Before beginning a headspace field screening program,
identify background ambient levels of VOCs. Taking these levels into account when
interpreting headspace field screening measurements will minimize the potential for false
measurements. Data may be corrected for background measurements; however, the use of
this procedure will be determined on a site-specific basis by the Project Manager.
7. Be aware of where the headspace readings are being obtained. Locations near potential
sources of VOCs, such as operating vehicles, operating generators, or air handling equipment
at a site, may contribute to transient volatile conditions and be a source of bias.
8. Certain instruments have multiple operating ranges. If the sample yields headspace field
screening results higher than the upper limit of calibration, recalibration to accommodate a
higher range may be necessary.
1.6.2 Ionization Potentials of Contaminants of Concern
The ionization potential of the contaminant is the energy required to completely remove an
electron from its atom. In general, the ultraviolet lamp in the PID will either be 10.6 eV or 11.7
eV. When selecting the proper lamp, the ionization potential of the contaminant(s) of concern
must be less than the ionization potential of the lamp. For example, if a PID is equipped with a
10.6 eV lamp, it will generally detect compounds with ionization potentials less than or equal to
10.6 eV. For most compounds, a 10.6 eV lamp is sufficient. Refer to Attachment B for a list of
compounds and their ionization potentials. Two examples of proper lamp selection are provided
below:
Example 1: Trichloroethene: Ionization potential = 9.47 eV.
Since the ionization potential is less than 10.6 eV, either the 10.6 eV or the 11.7 eV lamp could be used.
Example 2: 1,1,1-Trichloroethane: Ionization potential = 11 eV
Since the ionization potential is greater than 10.6 eV but is less than 11.7 eV, only the 11.7 eV lamp could
be used.
It should also be noted that the life of an 11.7 eV lamp is considerably shorter (i.e., 1-3 months)
than that of a 10.6 eV lamp (i.e., up to 3 years).
1.6.3 High Levels of Methane
If samples are suspected of containing high levels of methane (e.g., high levels of decaying
organics or sites undergoing natural or enhanced degradation), representative readings of non-
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 6 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
methane hydrocarbon vapors may be inhibited when using an FID. To avoid methane
interference, a PID should be used or if an FID is used, it should be equipped with a charcoal
filter on the inlet which will filter out all compounds except methane and ethane; the heavier
organic compounds are adsorbed onto the charcoal filter. Measurements can be taken with and
without the charcoal filter to determine the levels of methane/ethane in the sample and TOVs,
respectively. The use of a PID and one FID (without a filter) or two FIDs (one with a charcoal
filter and one without a charcoal filter) may be considered in order to obtain simultaneous
readings.
Measurement without charcoal filter = TOV Concentration (including methane and ethane)
Measurement with charcoal filter = Methane and Ethane Concentration
Measurement without charcoal filter – Measurement with charcoal filter = Total Non-
Methane/Ethane Hydrocarbons provided that the sample only contains hydrocarbons and no
other VOCs that would be detected by the FID.
NOTE: The loading capacity (amount of hydrocarbons which can be adsorbed on the charcoal
filter before breakthrough will occur) and lifetime of the charcoal filter must be verified with the
vendor prior to use. Depending on project needs, it may be advisable to have a supply of charcoal
on hand to replace spent filter material.
1.6.4 Use of Headspace Field Screening Data
It is important to note that measurements obtained using portable vapor/gas detectors such as a
PID or FID are considered qualitative and semi-quantitative. This type of data is sufficient for
demonstrating the relative presence of contamination, determining “hot spots,” and using as a
guide to direct subsequent investigations. This type of field screening data cannot be used to
identify specific contaminants and should not be used to determine whether a sample is “clean.”
1.6.5 Use of Thermal Enhancement for Headspace Measurements
Certain compounds (e.g., xylenes and other high molecular weight VOCs) yield a better response
when the headspace screening is performed with thermal enhancement. Thermal enhancement of
a sample can be performed using direct sunlight, a heated vehicle, a heated building, a hot water
bath, or a hot lamp. Refer to site-specific plans to determine the need for thermal enhancement.
Thermal enhancement may also be useful for headspace screening in cold weather situations.
1.7 Personnel Qualifications
Since this SOP will be implemented at sites or in work areas that entail potential exposure to
toxic chemicals or hazardous environments, all TRC personnel must be adequately trained.
Project and client-specific training requirements for samplers and other personnel on site should
be developed in project planning documents, such as the sampling plan or project work plan.
These requirements may include:
- Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 40-hour Health and Safety
Training for Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)
workers
- 8-hour annual HAZWOPER refresher training.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 7 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
2.0 PROCEDURES
Refer to the site-specific work plan and/or Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP), if applicable,
for any site-specific procedures. Other state or federal requirements may be above and beyond
the scope of this SOP and will be followed if applicable. In all instances, the actual procedures
used should be documented and described in the field notes. Attachment B lists the ionization
potentials of specific compounds. Refer to Section 1.6.2 for instruction on selecting a PID with
an appropriate lamp.
2.1 Calibration Procedures
PID and FID field instruments shall be operated and calibrated to yield TOVs in ppm
volume/volume (v/v) as isobutylene for the PID and methane for the FID. In certain instances,
other gases may be appropriate for calibration. Correction of results using response factors may
be appropriate; refer to the instrument manufacturer’s manuals for the proper procedure.
Batteries of the PID and FID should be checked prior to the beginning of the field event.
Following calibration, response checks should periodically be performed throughout the day to
demonstrate the responsiveness of the instrument. These checks can be performed by exposing
the PID or FID to the tip of a Sharpie pen; the performance of this check and the presence of
instrument response must be documented in the field notes. General calibration procedures are as
follows:
PID AND FID
1. Turn the instrument on and allow it to warm up for at least 10 minutes.
2. Fill a separate tedlar bag ¼ full with zero air; depress the bag completely to expel any
miscellaneous gases trapped in the bag. Fill the bag full with zero air. Alternatively, clean
ambient air can be used instead of a tedlar bag filled with zero air.
3. Set the PID or FID to the appropriate zero gas Calibration Mode.
4. Attach the probe to the tedlar bag, open the bag valve, and begin the calibration mode on the
instrument. Keep the bag attached until the meter finishes the calibration. Alternatively,
expose the probe to clean ambient air until the meter finishes the calibration.
5. Fill a tedlar bag ¼ full with the isobutylene standard for the PID or the methane standard for
the FID. Depress the bag completely to expel any miscellaneous gases trapped in the bag. Fill
the bag full with the isobutylene standard (PID) or methane standard (FID). Alternatively,
the instrument can be connected directly to the compressed gas standard cylinder.
6. Set the instrument to the appropriate span gas Calibration Mode. Enter the appropriate
calibration gas concentration in the meter.
7. Attach the probe to the tedlar bag, open the bag valve, and begin the calibration mode on the
instrument. Keep the bag attached until the meter finishes the calibration. Alternatively,
attach the probe directly to the compressed gas standard cylinder, open the cylinder valve,
and begin the calibration mode on the instrument; keep the cylinder attached until the meter
finishes the calibration.
8. Calibration should be performed in accordance with the site-specific work plan, at least at the
beginning of the day. Calibration checks should be performed as necessary. Calibration
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 8 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
should be checked if there is a substantial change in weather, if you have moved from an
indoor location to an outdoor location (or vice versa), or if inconsistent or non-comparable
readings are observed. The calibration check is performed using the compressed gas standard
followed by the zero air check. The measured value of the standard must be within +10% of
the true value. The zero air check should not yield a reading above background. All
calibration measurements must be recorded in the field book or on a field data form (see
Attachment A).
2.2 Field Screening Procedures
The following procedures should be followed for headspace field screening measurements of
solid and aqueous samples. For solid samples, a re-sealable plastic bag may be substituted for
clean jars; however, this depends on site-specific requirements and must be verified with the
Project Manager. Soil samples collected for field screening should not be used for laboratory
chemical analysis due to potential loss of volatile contaminants in the sample from sample
handling. Sample collection for headspace field screening and laboratory analysis of VOCs
should occur as soon as possible (i.e., preferably within minutes) after the sample is exposed to
air to minimize loss of TOVs due to volatilization.
1. Put on chemical-resistant gloves.
2. Fill a clean container one-third to one-half full with the sample to be analyzed. The type and
size of the container, as well as the amount of sample collected, should be consistent for all
samples collected at a site. See Section 1.3 for appropriate size containers for each matrix.
3. Quickly cover the open container top with one sheet of clean aluminum foil and apply the
screw cap to tightly seal the jar. Plastic bags filled with soil should be sealed.
4. Vigorously shake the jar or bag for approximately 15 seconds. Be sure that all samples are
shaken for approximately the same period of time.
5. Allow headspace development to occur for at least 10 minutes. The time allowed for
headspace development should be approximately the same for all samples; differences should
be noted. Where ambient temperatures are near or below 32ºF (0ºC), thermal enhancement of
the sample may be considered and modified via direct sunlight, a heated vehicle or building, a
hot water bath, a hot lamp, or similar. Site-specific conditions (e.g., sunlight, wind) may
impact the actual temperature. Otherwise, headspace development can occur at ambient
temperatures. Headspace development should not be allowed to occur so long that
condensation forms in the container.
6. Determine the background ambient level of TOVs. Record this value in the field book.
7. Vigorously shake jar for approximately 15 seconds after the headspace development period.
Be sure that all samples are shaken for approximately the same period of time.
8. Subsequent to headspace development, unscrew and remove lid to expose aluminum foil seal.
Be sure to hold edge of foil during the removal of the lid to ensure the foil seal remains in
place. Quickly puncture aluminum foil seal with instrument sampling probe, and insert probe
to a point about one-half of the headspace depth. Alternatively, for solid samples in a re-
sealable bag, partially open the seal, insert the probe into the bag, and re-seal the zipper
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 9 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
around the probe. Exercise care to avoid uptake of water droplets or soil particulates into the
instrument.
9. Following probe insertion through the aluminum foil seal or into the plastic bag, record the
highest meter response as the headspace concentration. Using the aluminum foil seal/probe
insertion method, maximum response should occur between 2 and 5 seconds.
10. The headspace screening data should be recorded in the field book and/or on a field data form
(see Attachment A).
11. All headspace screening waste should be returned to the original source site location or
disposed of in accordance with Section 3.0.
3.0 INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTE DISPOSAL
Field personnel should discuss specific documentation and containerization requirements for
investigation-derived waste (IDW) disposal with the Project Manager.
Each project must consider IDW disposal methods and have a plan in place prior to performing
the field work. Provisions must be in place regarding what will be done with IDW. If IDW
cannot be returned to the site, consider material containment, such as a composite drum, proper
labeling, on-site storage by the client, testing for disposal approval of the materials, and
ultimately the pickup and disposal of the materials by appropriately licensed vendors.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
The following procedures should be used for collecting headspace field screening measurements:
1. Operate and calibrate field instruments according to the manufacturer’s manuals.
2. Headspace measurements should be performed in duplicate on one sample each day, at a
minimum. This requires collection of two separate aliquots of sample. All procedures,
including the amount of time allowed for headspace development and the number of seconds
the containers are shaken, should be the same for each container. Ensure that both of the
containers are in the same environment during headspace development (e.g., both jars are in
the sun, both jars are in a heated car).
3. The results of duplicate samples should be compared; generally, the relative percent
differences (RPDs) of the replicate values should be <20 when readings are greater than 10
ppmV. RPDs may be higher when readings are less than or equal to 10 ppmV. If the RPD of
the replicate values is not within these criteria, make sure that the cautions and potential
problems listed in Section 1.6 were not encountered during the headspace measurements. If
none of these factors were encountered, perform a calibration check to ensure the instrument
is working properly. Document the test results as well as any performance or calibration
checks in the field book. RPD is calculated using the following equation:
X 100
(Reading 1 Reading 2)/2
RPD Reading 1 Reading 2
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 10 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
5.0 DATA MANAGEMENT AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT
All procedures and field screening results must be documented in the field book and/or on an
appropriate field data form. Refer to Attachment A for an example of headspace field screening
results documentation. Correction of headspace measurements for background values may be
performed; the use of this procedure will be determined on a site-specific basis by the Project
Manager. Any deviations from the headspace field screening procedures specified in this SOP, a
site-specific work plan, or a site-specific QAPP must be approved by the Project Manager as well
as documented in the field book. In such cases, compelling technical justification must be
presented and documented for the methodology employed. Refer to RMD SOP 001 for field
documentation procedures.
6.0 REFERENCES
Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
Expedited Site Assessment Tools For Underground Storage Tank Sites. EPA 510/B-97/001.
March 1997.
Attachment 11, Interim Remediation Waste Management Policy for Petroleum Contaminated
Soils. MassDEP WSC-94-400. April 1994.
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Underground Storage Tank Closure Assessment Manual.
MassDEP WSC-402-96. April 9, 1996.
RAE Systems, Inc. Technical Note TN-106, A Guideline for PID Instrument Response, 07/16.
7.0 SOP REVISION HISTORY
REVISION NUMBER REVISION DATE REASON FOR REVISION
0 APRIL 2015 NOT APPLICABLE
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 11 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment A
Example Documentation for
Headspace Field Screening Results
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 12 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Headspace Field Screening Log
Site Name ___________________________ Instrument Used (make/model)_____________________
Site Location ________________________ Calibration Gas Used/Concentration________________
TRC Personnel_______________________ Matrix/Sampling Method__________________________
Sample ID Location Depth Date/Time
Backgroun
d Reading
(ppmV)
Screening Results (ppmv)
Comments Instrument/Lamp
Reading 1 Reading 2 RPD Used
Soil Boring –
01, 2-4’
8/5/03-0700 2 24.6 25.3 2.8 South side of
excavation
PID / 10.2 eV
Soil Boring –
02, 0-2’
8/5/03-0815 2 1.5 1.2 22 North side of
excavation
PID / 10.2 eV
ppmV = parts per million by volume
RPD = relative percent difference
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 13 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment B
Photoionization Characteristics of Selected Compounds
NR – No Response
IE – Ionization Energy
C – Confirmed values (correction factors) indicated by “+” in this column; all others are preliminary or estimated
values and are subject to change
ne – Not Established ACGIH 8-hr. TWA
C## - Ceiling value, given where 8-hr. TWA is not available
TWA – Time-weighted average
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 14 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 15 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 16 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 17 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 18 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 19 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 20 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 21 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 22 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 23 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 24 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Attachment C:
Quick Reference Sheet
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 25 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Business Confidential – For Internal Use Only
Headspace Field Screening Procedure Page 26 of 26
Procedure No: RMD 014 Revision: 0 Effective: 04/2015
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 1 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Title: Procedure Number:
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental
Samples
SOP Fact Sheet
ECR 023
Revision Number:
0
Effective Date:
January 2018
Technical Reviewer
Darby Litz
Date
01/11/18
ECR Practice Quality Coordinator
Elizabeth Denly
Date
01/11/18
This document is proprietary property of TRC. It is to be used only by the person(s) to whom it has been
provided and solely for the express purpose intended. Any reproduction or distribution, for purposes other
than the intended, is forbidden without the express written consent of TRC.
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 2 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
SOP FACT SHEET
PACKAGING AND SHIPPING OF NON-HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
SAMPLES
Purpose and Objective
This fact sheet has been developed to guide TRC personnel in the methods for proper packaging and shipping
of non-hazardous environmental samples. In general, non-hazardous environmental samples include
drinking water, groundwater, ambient surface water, soil, sediment, treated municipal and industrial
wastewater effluent, biological specimens, or any samples not expected to be contaminated with regulated
levels of hazardous materials (dangerous goods). Samples collected from process wastewater streams,
drums, bulk storage tanks, soil, sediment, or water samples from areas suspected of being highly
contaminated may require shipment as hazardous materials (see below). Please note that packaging of vapor
and air samples is not included in this SOP Fact Sheet. Proper packaging and shipping of samples is important
for maintaining sample integrity and ensuring prompt and reliable shipment of the samples to the analytical
laboratory, as well as protecting the health and safety of the field, shipping, and laboratory personnel.
This Fact Sheet does not address the shipment of hazardous materials, as the shipping of hazardous
materials requires specialized packaging, labeling, shipping, and training/certification. Note: According to
the United States Department of Transportation, “the Secretary shall designate material (including an
explosive, radioactive material, infectious substance, flammable or combustible liquid, solid, or gas, toxic,
oxidizing, or corrosive material, and compressed gas) or a group or class of material as hazardous when the
Secretary determines that transporting the material in commerce in a particular amount and form may pose
an unreasonable risk to health and safety or property” 49 U.S.C 5103(a). If the composition and properties
of a waste sample or highly contaminated soil, sediment, or water sample are unknown, or only partially
known, the sample may not be offered for air transport. In addition, the shipment of pre-preserved sample
containers or bottles of preservatives (e.g., nitric acid [HNO3], sodium hydroxide [NaOH] pellets, hydrochloric
acid [HCl], Methanol, etc.), which are designated as dangerous goods by the International Air Transport
Association (IATA), is regulated. Shipment of nitric acid is strictly regulated. Consult the IATA Dangerous
Goods Regulations for guidance. Dangerous goods must not be offered for air transport by any personnel
except personnel trained and certified by IATA in dangerous goods shipment. Contact the laboratory if you
are unsure if your material is regulated or need assistance in shipping or transporting samples.
What to Bring (some or all of these may apply)
• Appropriate level of personal protection in accordance with the Site Health and Safety Plan
• Coolers with return address of TRC office written on inside of lid or coolers provided by laboratory
• Heavy-duty plastic bags and/or trash bags
• Plastic Ziploc® bags, small and large
• Fiberglass-reinforced packing tape or strapping tape is preferred, or clear packing tape or duct tape
• Packing materials, such as foam peanuts and/or Bubble Wrap®
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 3 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Ice (Blue ice not recommended)
• Custody seals
• Chain-of-custody forms
• Landing pad (can be purchased from Federal Express; see Attachment)
• Tie-on tags (can be purchased from Federal Express; see Attachment)
• Shipping labels and documents (e.g., air bill)
• Pens and markers, preferably waterproof
• Zip ties
• Clear tape
• Cooler labels (“Keep Refrigerated/Cool”, “THIS END UP”, “FRAGILE”, “Saturday delivery”, arrow
labels, etc.)
• Laboratory-prepared temperature blank
On-site Procedures
• Use a sturdy cooler in good condition. Secure and tape drain plug (inside and outside), if present,
with fiberglass-reinforced packing tape or duct tape.
• Line the cooler with a large heavy-duty plastic/trash bag.
• Verify that all caps on bottles are tight (will not leak).
• Verify sample labels and chain-of-custody records are completed properly.
• Pack samples with sufficient padding and ice to remain intact during shipment and at proper
preservation temperature.
• If glass bottles are being shipped, place a layer of shock-absorbent material, such as Bubble Wrap®,
on the base of the cooler to protect against breakage during shipping. Additionally, considered
placing shock-absorbent material between the sample containers and the cooler sidewalls.
• Consider placing all bottles in separate and appropriately sized plastic Ziploc® bags or Bubble Wrap®
bags provided by the laboratory. Up to three volatile organic analysis (VOA) vials may be packed in
one Bubble Wrap® bag (from the same sample point). All glass bottles should be wrapped in Bubble
Wrap®; all sample bottles should be placed in the cooler in a vertical position to minimize potential
leaks and cross-contamination.
• Verify appropriate trip blanks (for volatile organic compound [VOC] analyses) and temperature
blanks are included in the sample cooler in accordance with project-specific requirements. If multiple
coolers prepared for one project, keep VOC samples in the same cooler to minimize the number of
trip blanks submitted for analysis.
• Place ice in cooler. A plastic bag should be used as a moisture barrier between the ice and sample
bottle labels to protect label integrity. This can be accomplished by placing loose ice around sealed
Ziploc® bags containing sample bottles or by sealing ice in large plastic Ziploc® bags or trash bags and
placing around the sample containers. Ice should be below, in between, and on top of samples within
the large heavy-duty plastic/trash bag. NOTE: It is recommended that at least one-third of the cooler
volume should be filled with ice.
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 4 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
• Fill the remaining space in cooler with shock-absorbent material, such as sheets of Bubble Wrap®.
Keep in mind that the sample containers are less likely to break if their movement is minimized during
shipment.
• Place the completed chain-of-custody record for the laboratory in a plastic Ziploc® bag. Tape the bag
to the inner side of the cooler’s lid. NOTE: If laboratory courier service is used, the chain-of-custody
record may be handed to the courier and not be put inside the cooler; the courier must sign the
record upon receiving the samples. Alternately, you can treat the laboratory courier just as you
would a common carrier like Federal Express. In this situation, the chain-of-custody gets signed at
the laboratory upon receipt.
• The sampler should keep a copy of the completed and signed chain-of-custody record.
• Wrap cooler at least two times with fiberglass-reinforced packing tape (preferred) or duct tape at
each end of the cooler.
• Custody seals should be placed on the opening of the cooler. NOTE: Custody seals are not required
when laboratory courier service is used, as long as the courier signs the chain-of-custody document
as noted above. Consider applying custody seals even on hand-delivered or couriered coolers to
avoid potential confusion. Cover the custody seal with clear packing tape that extends around the
entire cooler and overlaps itself so that it cannot be easily removed without breaking the seal. In
some situations, it may be appropriate to install two (or more) custody seals, one at each end, placed
diagonally opposite from one another. The custody seals should be placed such that the cooler
cannot be opened without destroying at least one of the labels.
• Use a “THIS END UP” label or arrow labels to indicate proper upward position of the container.
• Add a label containing name and address of both the shipper and the recipient on the outside of the
container. Use Federal Express tie-on tags, if applicable, attached with zip ties to affix the label to
the cooler handle if possible.
Shipping
• Consider using prepaid shipping labels supplied by the laboratory, if possible.
• Determine ahead of time the location and deadline for when samples must be available for courier
pickup or at the shipper to ensure the samples go out on time.
• Ship the sample using an appropriate method, typically overnight or same day, to arrive by the
required time. Samples shipped on Friday for Saturday delivery must be coordinated ahead of time
to verify laboratory staff are available to receive the samples on weekends. Liberally apply “Saturday
Delivery” stickers to the outside of the cooler. Verify that the common carrier marks the cooler and
shipping documents appropriately for Saturday or Sunday delivery.
• Check the laboratory sample tracking for acknowledgment of receipt of container and arrival of
shipment.
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 5 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
Additional Guidelines when Using Federal Express
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 6 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
A. Shipping Coolers with Environmental Samples by Federal Express (FedEx)
TRC has experienced some issues with coolers not getting to their destination because of lost labels and this
has resulted in the recollection of samples. Shipping of coolers presents a unique problem. It is important
that the contents of coolers arrive at the laboratory in a timely manner, but sometimes, despite best efforts,
the shipping labels come off of the coolers because they do not adhere well. This may cause delays and/or
non-delivery of the coolers, resulting in samples that are no longer available or not appropriate for analysis
because of temperature and/or holding time requirements.
At the advice of FedEx, it is strongly recommended that every time a cooler is shipped, that two different
types of labels be used on the cooler:
1. A “landing pad” (FedEx #156841): A “landing pad” is a super sticky label that is adhered directly to
the top of the cooler. The barcode label then gets put on top of the landing pad. These landing pads
are designed specifically for use with odd-shaped or non-smooth surfaces.
2. A “tie-on tag” (FedEx #150454 large tag, or #149849 for small tag): Along with the landing pad and
label, it was recommended to also use a tie-on tag if there is a handle on the cooler. The tie-on tag
wraps around the handle of the cooler and then sticks to itself. The barcode label then gets adhered
to the longer side of the tie-on tag. For added strength, a zip-tie should also be used to secure the
tie-on tag to the handle.
Both the landing pads and the tie-on tags can be ordered by calling 800.GoFedEx and referring to the FedEx
#s above. In addition:
1. TRC staff should place these labels on the coolers, rather than having FedEx place them.
2. TRC staff should place a “Keep Refrigerated/Cool” label on the cooler, which may be helpful to keep
the shipment moving.
3. The use of laboratory courier service, when available, rather than FedEx, is suggested.
B. Insuring Sample Shipments
FedEx does NOT insure sample shipments; meaning if the shipment is lost or delayed, FedEx will not pay for
the cost to recollect the samples.
What FedEx does offer is a Declared Value; however, again this does not cover the cost to recollect the
samples. Therefore, do NOT pay the extra fee for a Declared Value when shipping a cooler of samples; it is a
waste of money.
What may be available is that TRC’s insurance program may cover losses in excess of $10,000. If you have
an incident that meets these criteria, you should notify your manager, Greg Hobbs and Andrew Johnson/TRC
legal for any loss you believe exceeds $10,000. TRC legal can address the merits of an insurance claim at that
point in time.
C. Insuring Equipment Shipments
When shipping equipment (e.g., a GPS unit), the following is suggested:
Standard Operating Procedure Fact Sheet
Proprietary Property of TRC – Unauthorized Use Prohibited
Packaging and Shipping of Non-Hazardous Environmental Samples Page 7 of 7
SOP Fact Sheet ECR-023 Revision: 0 Effective: 01/2018
TRC Controlled Document For Information Only
1. Using FedEx’s Declared Value option DOES make sense when shipping valuable equipment. Currently
FedEx’s cost for this option is $3 for shipments valued between $100 to $300, and $1 per $100 of
declared value for shipments in excess of $300. The cost of insuring equipment should be factored
into the cost of the project.
2. If the equipment does not have its own specialized shipping container (e.g., pelican case), then
request that FedEx package the equipment for shipment. If FedEx provides the packaging, and the
equipment is damaged, then FedEx is responsible. If TRC packages the equipment, then experience
has shown that FedEx will deny the claim, even if a Declared Value was used, because FedEx will claim
that it was improperly packaged.
Attachment D: Soil Vapor Sampling Form
ATTACHMENT D
Soil Vapor Probe Sampling Field Form
City of Fort Collins Brownfield
Volume per foot for 3/16"x1/14" tubing: 0.00543 liters/foot
Sample ID Date of
Sampling
Sample
Collected By
Installed
Vapor Point
Depth (ft bgs)
3 Volumes of
Tubing (L)
Time of Start
Purge
Time of Stop
Purge
Purge Flow
Rate (L/min)
Total Volume
Purged (L)
Time of
Sample
Total VOC
PID Reading
(ppm)
Comments
1 of 2
ATTACHMENT D
Soil Vapor Probe Sampling Field Form
City of Fort Collins Brownfield
Volume per foot for 3/16"x1/14" tubing: 0.00543 liters/foot
Sample ID Date of
Sampling
Sample
Collected By
Installed
Vapor Point
Depth (ft bgs)
3 Volumes of
Tubing (L)
Time of Start
Purge
Time of Stop
Purge
Purge Flow
Rate (L/min)
Total Volume
Purged (L)
Time of
Sample
Total VOC
PID Reading
(ppm)
Comments
2 of 2
WELL MATERIAL: PVC SS IRON GALVANIZED STEEL OTHER
SAMPLE ID: WELL DIAMETER: OTHER _______________________
PROJECT NUMBER: DATE: BY:
WATER SAMPLE LOG
PROJECT NAME: PREPARED CHECKED
DATE:
Dissolved Oxygen: No criteria specified
Oxidation/Reduction Potential: No criteria specified
validating different components of the project
data/information, for example, chain-of-custody forms,
receipt logs, calibration information, etc.
Yes Section
13.0
QAPP
c. Identifies issue resolution process, and method and
individual responsible for conveying these results to
data users
Yes Section
14.0
QAPP
f. Describes procedures to demonstrate acceptability of
hardware and software configurations
Yes Section
10.0
QAPP
Yes Section 4
Pages 5,6
QAPP / SAP
b. Details what should be done when control limits are
exceeded, and how effectiveness of control actions will
be determined and documented
Yes Section 7.0 QAPP
identifying individual(s) responsible for corrective
action and how this should be documented
Yes Table 9-1 QAPP
B3. Sample Handling and Custody
a. States maximum holding times allowed from sample
collection to extraction and/or analysis for each sample
type and, for in-situ or continuous monitoring, the
maximum time before retrieval of information
Yes Table 4-2 QAPP
4.3
SAP
d. Discusses what to do if sampling sites become
inaccessible
Yes Section 4
Page 3
SAP
e. Identifies project activity schedules such as each
sampling event, times samples should be sent to the
laboratory, etc.
Yes Attachment
A
SAP
WP/SOW/TO/RP Performance Period __10/1/15-9/30/18__
3. QA document consistent with the:
WP/SOW/PP for grants? Yes / No
SOW/TO for contracts? Yes / No
4. QARF signed by R8 QAM Yes / No / NA
Funding Mechanism IA / contract / grant / NA
Amount ____$20,000_________
Notes for Document Submittals:
1. A QAPP written by a Grantee, EPA, or Federal Partner must include for review:
Work Plan(WP) / Statement of Work (SOW) / Program Plan (PP) / Research Proposal
(RP) and funding mechanism
2. A QAPP written by Contractor must include for review:
a) Copy of Task Order Work Assignment/SOW
b) Reference to a hard or electronic copy of the contractor’s approved QMP
c) Copy of Contract SOW if no QMP has been approved
d) Copy of EPA/Court Order, if applicable
e) The QA Review must determine (with the EPA CO or PO) if a QARF was completed
for the environmental data activity described in the QAPP.
3. a. Field Sampling Plan (FSP) and/or Sampling & Analyses Plan (SAP) must include the
Project QAPP or must be a stand-alone QA document that contain all QAPP required
elements (Project Management, Data Generation/Acquisition, Assessment and
Oversight, and Data Validation and Usability).
c. SOPs must be submitted with a QA document that contains all QAPP required
elements.
Summary of Comments (highlight significant concerns/issues):
- See notes/comments in the SAP about adding specific references to the COGCC policies as applicable to the processes, the property
owner responsibilities for and the methods for sampling of abandoned sites as per the conference call with COGCC, TRC and EPA
HCL
Groundwater SVOCs/
PAHs
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, EB, and
MS/MSD
8 SW-846 3510C/8270C Cool to 4C
7 days to extraction;
40 days from
extraction to analysis
1 1-liter amber glass bottles
with Teflon-lined cap
Groundwater TPH-DRO Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SW-846 3510C/8015C Cool to 4C
14 days to extraction;
40 days from
extraction to analysis
2-40 mL VOA vials with
HCL
Groundwater TPH-GRO Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
SW-846 5030B/8015C Cool to 4C
7 days to analysis 2-40 mL VOA vials with
HCL
Groundwater
Dissolved
Gases:
Methane,
Ethane,
Ethylene
Field Sample, Field
Duplicate, and MS/MSD 8
RSK 175 Cool to 4C
14 days to analysis 3-40 mL VOA vials with
HCL
EPA Method 6010B
Nitrate and Nitrite EPA Method 300.0
Bromide EPA Method 300.0
Chloride EPA Method 300.0
Sulfate EPA Method 300.0
Alkalinity SM 2320B
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
MW‐08 One Grab Sample:
Groundwater
Groundwater
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential groundwater impacts
around the plugged and abandoned well.
Soil Vapor Probe Samples
SVP‐01 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐02 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐03 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐04 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
SVP‐05 Real‐time reading from
a multi‐gas meter
Soil Vapor
Screening for
Methane
If Methane is detected, additional
investigation will be required.
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
SB‐07
One Grab Sample:
Collected at the interval
of highest field screened
impacts.
Soil
Characterization
Sample
Characterize potential soil impacts around
the plugged and abandoned well.
Equipment
Blank
EB-#-mm-dd-yy EB = Equipment Blank
# = Sample Number
mm = month (e.g., 02)
dd = day (e.g., 01)
yy = year (e.g., 18)
MS/MSDs MW-#-MS/MSD
MW = Monitoring Well
# = Well Number
MS/MSD = Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate